Skip to main content

Full text of "Get that picture! The story of the news cameraman"

See other formats


GET    THAT    PICTURE!  —  THE 

STORY  OF  THE  NEWS 

CAMERAMAN 

By  A.  J.  EZICKSON 


In  this  vivid  portrayal  of  the 
newspaper  photographer  and 
hi?  profession,  Mr.  Ezickson  has 
toid  a  complete  story  of  a  branch 
of  modern  journalism  which  has 
grown  firmly  and  steadily  within 
the  past  decade.  The  photogra- 
pher is  the  central  character,  his 
background  is  the  teeming  news- 
paper office,  his  field  of  action 
the  world  in  which  he  cease- 
lessly works  his  camera  to  cap- 
ture the  news. 

Sixteen  years  of  daily  contact 
with  the  news  cameraman  has 
given  the  author  an  intimate  and 
thorough  knowledge  of  the  en- 
tire field  of  news  photography. 
He  has  been  "on  top"  of  some  of 
the  biggest  news  stories  that 
ever  broke  and  has  personally 
assigned  many  of  the  photog- 
raphers whose  results  have 
made  picture  history.  Ever  since 
his  graduation  from  the  Colum- 
bia University  School  of  Journal- 
ism in  1922,  Mr.  Ezickson  has 
been  connected  with  nearly 

(Continued  on  Back  Flap) 


From  the  collection  of  the 


7      n 

P   T   m 
rrejinger 

v    JJibrary 


t 


San  Francisco,  California 
2006 


M^c^  a. 

v 


©  International  News  Photo 
A   TRAGEDY   OF   THE   SEAS 

Sweeping  low  out  of  a  thick  mist  and  rain,  Mack  Baron,  International  News 
photographer,  made  this  first  picture  to  be  taken  of  the  burning  steamship 
Morro  Castle  off  Asbury  Park,  N.  J.,  in  1935,  in  which  134  passengers  and 
members  ot  the  crew  perished.  Note  lifeboat  with  survivors  in  foreground 
waiting  to  be  picked  up  by  rescue  vessel.  Later  other  photographers  ap- 
peared over  the  scene,  but  Baron  and  Pilot  Bill  Gulick  had  already  landed 
at  North  Beach,  Long  Island,  with  the  negatives  which  -were  rushed  by 
motorcycle  to  the  New  York  office  foi  an  outstanding  picture  beat. 


Get  That  Picture ! 

The  Story  of  the  News  Cameraman 


00 

By 

A.  J.  EZICKSON 

of  Wide  World  Photos 

00 


NATIONAL  LIBRARY  PRESS 


110  West  42nd  Street  New  York,  N.  Y. 


Copyright,  1938,  by 
NATIONAL  LIBRARY  PRESS 


PRINTED   BY   THEODOEE   GAUS*    SONS,   INC.,    NEW   YORK   CITY 


CONTENTS 

Page 

CHAPTER  I 
WHEN  A  BIG  STORY  BREAKS   9 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  CAMERA  Is  BORN  AND  BECOMES  A  GIANT 18 

CHAPTER  III 

THE  TRAIN,  PLANE,  PIGEON,  WIRE  AND  RADIO 

CARRY  THE  PICTURE 33 

CHAPTER  IV 
THE  EDITOR  SCANS  THE  PICTURE 49 

CHAPTER  V 
THE  ADVENTURES  OF  THE  NEWS  CAMERAMAN  ....     67 

CHAPTER  VI 
FURTHER  ADVENTURES  OF  THE  NEWS  CAMERAMAN.  .     83 

CHAPTER  VII 
THE  CAMERAMAN  ON  THE  JOB   104 

CHAPTER  VIII 
THE  CAMERAMAN  COVERS  THE  DAILY  EVENT  .  121 


CONTENTS—  (continued) 

Page 

CHAPTER  IX 
THE  WAR  PHOTOGRAPHER   138 


CHAPTER  X 
THE  WOMAN  NEWS  PHOTOGRAPHER 151 

CHAPTER  XI 
THE  AERIAL  PHOTOGRAPHER  GETS  THE  PICTURE.  ...    168 

CHAPTER  XII 
THE  PUBLICITY  MAN  GETS  THE  PICTURE 174 

CHAPTER  XIII 
THE  MINIATURE  CAMERA  ON  THE  NEWS  JOB 182 

CHAPTER  XIV 
THE  GREATEST  PICTURE  STORY  OF  ALL  TIMES  ....    193 


and  45  Illustrations 


GET  THAT  PICTURE! 


To 
FLO, 

My  Wife 


- 


©  Pictures,   Inc. 
STRIKE    CASUALTY 

Patrolman  C  V.  Satt  (right),  bloody  and  dust  covered  after  being-  showered 
with  rocks  and  bottles  in  Denver,  Colo.,  strike  riot  in  1935,  is  shown  being 
defended  by  a  comrade  who  rushed  ahead  of  the  line  of  fire  to  aid  him. 


• 


©  Pictures,   Inc. 

MONEY-KING    STRICKEN 

An  alert  cameraman  snapped  J.  P.  Morgan,  the  international  financier,  as  he 

was   removed   from   a   train   at   Mill   Neck,    Long-   Island,    after    suffering   an 

attack  of  neuritis  in  July,   1936.     Train  employes  and  friends  are  seeking  to 

make  him  quite   comfortable  on   the   stretcher. 


Chapter  I. 
WHEN  A  BIG  STORY  BREAKS 

The  picture  editor  was  typing  his  nightly  memorandum 
for  the  day  editor — a  summary  of  stories  which  broke  dur- 
ing his  shift  (watch  for  the  return  of  the  dirigible  Akron  to 
its  hangar  at  Lakehurst,  he  specifically  underlined),  and 
others  of  lesser  importance  which  needed  watching  for  pic- 
ture possibilities. 

The  caption  writer  had  cleaned  his  desk  top  and  was 
carefully  filing  the  night's  clippings. 

"What  a  night,"  he  muttered,  as  he  glanced  toward  the 
side  windows  as  a  heavy  rain  beat  against  the  panes,  and 
wondering  how  he  was  to  reach  home  without  rubbers  and 
umbrella. 

He  glanced  at  the  clock.    It  was  1.45  a.m. 

The  mail  clerk  had  finished  wrapping  the  batch  of  enve- 
lopes stuffed  with  photographs  while  the  motorcyclist  who 
was  to  take  them  to  the  train  mail  slot  and  then  deliver  his 
customary  evening  papers  (this  time,  by  subway  as  he  had 
left  his  motorcycle  at  a  garage),  lolled  at  a  nearby  table 
waiting  impatiently  for  the  last  trip  of  the  night. 

The  darkroom  printer  stood  in  the  doorway  of  the  dark- 
room exchanging  light  banter  with  one  of  the  "squeegee" 
boys  placing  a  few  odd  prints  on  the  ferrotype  machine  to  be 
dried  and  glossed. 

From  the  other  end  of  the  long  room  came  the  steady 
click  of  the  teletype  machines — the  endless  stream  of  stories 
coming  in  and  going  out  to  the  world's  four  corners. 

A  few  more  minutes,  and  there  would  be  an  exodus  of 
the  night  staff  to  the  elevators,  followed  by  a  dash  through 
the  rain  to  the  subways  for  the  homeward  rides. 


10  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

A  sudden  shout  from  the  city  editor  seated  at  the  desk 
at  the  farther  end  of  the  room. 

"The  Akron's  crashed!" 

Everyone  converged  toward  his  desk. 

The  night  editor  turned  toward  the  few  remaining  oper- 
ators. 

"Hold  it,"  he  shouted.    "We're  sending  an  EOS  flash !" 

That  flash,  with  the  steady  ringing  of  the  bell  at  the 
receiving  ends,  was  to  announce  to  excited  editors  from 
coast  to  coast  that  a  tragedy  had  befallen  America's  pride 
of  the  air. 

Everyone  stretched  neck  to  catch  the  words  the  city 
editor  was  scribbling  on  a  pad.  It  was  the  message  picked 
up  at  sea  from  the  German  tanker  Phoebus  and  being 
phoned  in  by  the  Radiomarine  Corporation  of  America. 

"Airship  Akron  with  77  men  afloat  off  Barnegat  Light- 
ship. Picked  up  some.  Chief  officer  and  three  men.  Can- 
not save  all.  45  miles  south  of  entrance  to  New  York 
Harbor.  Ten  to  15  miles  offshore." 

The  flash  was  already  spinning  over  the  wires  to  all 
parts  of  the  world. 

Every  department  was  galvanized  into  action. 

The  picture  editor  rushed  to  the  phone.  Calls  were 
placed  for  correspondents  at  Asbury  Park,  Long  Branch, 
Lakewood  and  Atlantic  City.  Then  another  for  a  pilot 
who  had  flown  often  for  the  syndicate  on  big  stories.  Still 
another  for  Holmes  Airport.  A  plane  must  be  chartered 
at  once. 

While  these  were  being  plugged  in,  the  general  manager, 
the  day  editor,  mat  editor  and  three  photographers  were  be- 
ing roused  from  their  sleep  by  the  ringing  of  the  phones. 
All  must  be  notified  at  once;  not  a  second's  time  is  to  be 
lost. 

Then  back  to  the  files.  The  folder  with  a  miscellany 
of  Akron  photographs.  A  fine  shot  of  the  giant  dirigible 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  II 

in  the  air,  another  in  its  hangar  at  Lakehurst,  some  interior 
views  showing  the  control  cabin,  sleeping  quarters,  a  scene 
along  the  catwalk,  and  others.  In  an  instant  the  printer  is 
making  copies.  The  negative  file  is  sought.  Of  the  best 
ones  a  full  service  is  ordered. 

The  portraits  of  the  two  known  commanding  officers, 
Admiral  William  A.  Moffett  and  Lieutenant  Commander 
Herbert  Wiley,  are  taken  from  the  files  and  copied. 

Then  back  to  the  typewriter.  Rush  messages  are  sent 
to  the  managers  of  the  various  bureaus  at  Chicago,  Cleve- 
land, San  Francisco,  Los  Angeles  and  Atlanta. 

The  message  reads :  "Service  your  lists  best  shots  Akron 
and  commanding  officers  Admiral  Moffett  and  Commander 
Wiley.  Keep  close  watch  on  casualty  list  and  keep  after 
shots  officers  and  men  from  respective  home  towns  in  your 
vicinity." 

Every  five  or  ten  minutes  a  dash  to  the  general  desk. 
About  2  130  another  message  is  received  from  the  Phoebus 
identifying  the  rescued  officer  as  Commander  Wiley.  Names 
of  the  three  enlisted  men  are  also  given. 

A  wireless  is  sent  to  the  captain  of  the  Phoebus  request- 
ing pictures  if  any  were  taken  of  the  rescue  of  the  four  sur- 
vivors and  that  such  pictures  will  be  picked  up  as  soon  as 
the  ship  docks. 

A  phone  call  is  placed  for  the  bureau  manager  at  Wash- 
ington. He  is  told  to  try  to  get  all  pictures  available  of  the 
Akron's  officers  and  men  from  the  Navy  Department  files 
as  soon  as  the  offices  there  are  opened  in  the  morning. 

Over  the  wires  flash  a  long  list  of  the  names  and  ad- 
dresses of  the  Akron's  personnel.  Messages  are  wired  to 
the  correspondents  of  the  cities  where  the  men  had  their 
homes  asking  for  stock  pictures  of  the  men  and  new  shots 
of  the  nearest  of  kin. 

A  photographer  who  lived  nearby  rushes  into  the  office 


12  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

and  starts  loading  his  plates.  His  case  soon  bulges  with  a 
complete  outfit,  loaded  holders,  flash  bulbs,  etcetra. 

"Get  down  to  the  Eureka  Auto  Company  office.  A  car 
has  been  ordered  for  you  to  drive  to  Asbury  Park,"  he  is 
told.  One  of  the  boys  accompanies  him.  The  train  sched- 
ules had  been  checked  and  there  was  no  service  to  Asbury 
Park  until  morning.  He  must  get  down  there  without  a 
moment's  delay.  Expense  money  is  thrust  into  his  hand,  a 
cry  of  "good  luck,"  and  last  minute  instructions  are  hurled 
at  him  as  he  dashes  for  the  elevator.  He  is  to  phone  the 
office  as  soon  as  he  arrives. 

The  correspondent's  calls  are  coming  in.  Jones  at  As- 
bury Park  is  advised  to  hire  a  good  seaworthy  boat  and 
have  it  in  readiness  for  the  staff  cameraman.  Brown  at 
Lakewood  is  instructed  to  get  down  to  Lakehurst  hangar 
in  a  rush  and  "shoot"  pictures  of  the  officers  making  rescue 
plans,  also  the  families  of  the  Akron  crew  (many  of  the 
men  had  their  homes  at  Lakehurst),  and  also  a  shot  of  the 
empty  hangar  at  Lakehurst,  a  sad  reminder  of  the  Akron's 
last  voyage. 

The  latest  news  bulletins  announce  that  the  Navy  De- 
partment has  ordered  the  new  cruiser  Portland  and  the 
destroyers  Cole  and  Bernadou  from  the  Brooklyn  Navy 
Yard  to  scour  the  rough  Atlantic  waters  for  the  missing 
crew. 

Pictures  of  the  vessels  are  dragged  from  the  files,  copied 
and  rushed  through  for  service. 

The  United  Air,  TWA  and  American  Air  Lines  offices 
are  phoned  to  learn  if  the  early  morning  outgoing  planes 
are  flying.  Looks  doubtful,  they  reply.  Weather  is  still 
bad.  ' 

A  new  crew  of  printers  and  boys  has  arrived,  as  well  as 
the  day  editor  and  another  caption  writer.  Two  photogra- 
phers come  in  are  told  to  load  plenty  of  holders;  one  is  to 
go  to  Newark  Airport  to  board  a  chartered  plane,  the  other 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  13 

to  Holmes  Airport.     They  are  to  take  off  at  the  crack  of 
dawn. 

Contact  is  made  with  the  Coast  Guard  station  at  Staple- 
ton,  Staten  Island.  Yes,  a  Coast  Guard  destroyer  is  leav- 
ing shortly,  and  will  be  able  to  accomodate  one  of  the  syndi- 
cate's photographers.  A  new  arrival  with  loaded  equipment 
is  hurried  there. 

More  news  bulletins  come  ticking  over  the  wires.  Naval 
planes  from  the  Reserve  Air  Station  at  Floyd  Bennett  Field 
will  shove  off  at  the  first  light  of  dawn.  Boats  from  the 
Beach  Haven,  Asbury  Park  and  Atlantic  City  Coast  Guard 
and  life  saving  stations  are  being  rushed  out  into  the  angry 
seas. 

A  new  flash  announces  that  the  Coast  Guard  destroyer 
Tucker  has  taken  aboard  Commander  Wiley,  two  enlisted 
men  and  the  body  of  the  fourth  from  the  Phoebus  in  a  mid- 
ocean  transfer  and  will  head  for  New  York.  The  ship  will 
arrive  at  the  Brooklyn  Navy  Yard  hospital  about  noon.  The 
Coast  Guard  is  phoned.  Yes,  pictures  of  the  transfer,  two 
shots,  are  being  developed  aboard  ship,  comes  the  answer, 
and  prints  will  be  distributed  to  the  newspapers  and  picture 
agencies  on  its  arrival. 

Anxiety  centers  around  the  departure  of  the  planes. 
Will  they  be  able  to  take  off?  It  is  still  raining,  though  not 
as  heavy  as  it  was  earlier,  and  a  fresh  northeaster'  still 
holds.  As  a  thick  gray  dawn  breaks,  the  flying  fields  report 
that  in  spite  of  a  poor  visibility  and  a  strong  wind,  the 
planes  will  take  off. 

News  is  still  scant  regarding  the  fate  of  the  Akron's 
crew.  The  Phoebus  and  a  score  of  other  ships  searching 
the  vicinity  of  the  crash  report  not  a  sign  of  any  man, 
living  or  dead.  One  of  the  ships  has  sighted  some  floating 
wreckage  but  it  is  being  pushed  violently  far  out  to  sea.  No 
doubt  but  that  the  heavy  combers  had  torn  the  huge  ship 


14  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

asunder  into  a  thousand  pieces  and  plunged  the  heavier  parts 
into  its  depths. 

Wires  have  arrived  from  the  bureau  managers  at  Los 
Angeles,  Chicago,  Atlanta  and  Cleveland.  Chicago  is  serv- 
icing its  list  three  good  shots  of  the  Akron,  also  a  closeup 
of  Admiral  Moffett  and  Commander  Wiley.  Cleveland  is 
servicing  two  Akron  views  and  Admiral  Moffett;  Los 
Angeles  the  same,  and  Atlanta  is  sending  out  two  of  the 
Akron  alone. 

A  general  note  to  the  picture  editors  of  all  the  sub- 
scribers has  been  rushed  over  the  wire  calling  their  attention 
to  several  views  of  the  Akron  which  had  been  serviced  on  a 
certain  date.  This  procedure  assists  them  in  the  search  of 
their  own  files  for  pictures. 

Trains  and  airmail  schedules  are  checked.  The  weather 
westward  is  good;  the  planes  will  take  off.  Packages  of 
photographs  for  the  nearby  evening  paper  subscribers  are 
given  to  a  train  porter  or  baggagemaster  to  deliver  to  the 
newspaper  representatives  on  their  arrival.  Within  an  hour 
after  their  arrival,  the  photographs  will  have  been  scaled, 
retouched,  rushed  to  the  photoengraving  department  for  the 
making  of  the  cuts,  then  locked  in  on  the  page,  mats  and 
castings  made  and  then  to  the  presses  for  the  early  editions. 

Representatives  of  the  air  fields  phone  and  announce 
that  the  planes  with  the  photographers  aboard  are  already 
in  the  air.  The  photographer  at  Asbury  Park  calls  and 
says  that  his  boat  is  ready  and  will  take  off  in  a  few  minutes. 

Motorcycle  men  are  stationed  at  the  airports  to  await 
the  return  of  the  flying  cameramen.  The  minute  the  planes' 
wheels  touch  the  ground  these  daring  drivers  will  be  rushing 
back  with  the  undeveloped  plates. 

The  first  phone  call  from  one  of  the  fields  comes  in  about 
eleven.  The  photographer  reports  his  plane  had  flown  low 
over  the  scene  and  cruised  around  for  a  radius  of  many 
miles  but  had  only  seen  a  few  bits  of  wreckage.  He  had 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  15 

also  made  shots  of  the  coast  guard  and  naval  vessels  plow- 
ing through  the  rough  seas  searching  for  wreckage  and  vic- 
tims. They  are  the  first  pictures  in  on  the  story,  not  much, 
to  be  truthful,  but  enough  to  illustrate  it  for  the  time  being, 
and  enough  to  set  every  man  and  machine  in  the  syndicate 
at  the  highest  pitch  of  action. 

The  motorcylist  dashes  in  with  the  holders.  The  editor 
turns  them  over  to  the  waiting  printer  who  locks  himself  in 
the  small  darkroom.  Within  five  minutes  they  are  out  of 
the  developer  into  the  hypo.  In  a  minute  they  are  fixed, 
given  a  hasty  wash,  and  the  first  negative  is  placed  into  a 
holder,  given  to  the  motorcycle  man  and  rushed  to  the  tele- 
photo  station.  It's  case  of  first  come,  first  served;  a  print 
is  made  and  within  fifteen  minutes  the  wires  to  Chicago, 
Cleveland,  Boston,  San  Francisco  and  Los  Angeles  are 
transmitting  the  picture  onto  a  loaded  drum  in  the  receiving 
rooms  at  the  respective  stations.  Managers  of  the  bureaus 
will  have  messengers  waiting  for  the  finished  films  to  rush 
them  back  to  the  offices  for  servicing. 

In  the  New  York  office,  prints  are  being  rushed  from 
the  other  negatives,  hurried  through  developing  and  fixing 
baths,  given  hasty  washes,  then  onto  the  ferrotype  machine 
where  the  pictures  are  dried  and  given  a  permanent  gloss. 
Captions  are  pasted  on  hurriedly  and  then  tossed  over  to  the 
mail  clerk  for  distribution  to  waiting  boys  to  rush  them  to 
the  evening  papers  and  to  the  Pennsylvania  and  Grand 
Central  stations  for  train  portering.  Others  are  rushed  to 
Newark  Airport  to  be  air  expressed  on  the  earliest  possible 
planes  to  faraway  members. 

Washington  in  the  meanwhile  has  advised  that  they  are 
airexpressing  a  good  layout  of  the  officers  of  the  ill-fated 
ship.  A  motorcycle  man  at  Newark  Airport  awaits  the 
arrival  for  speedy  despatch  back  to  the  office.  There  a  close- 
up  of  each  officer  is  placed  on  the  copying  camera,  two  on 
one  film,  and  within  a  few  minutes  are  ready  for  servicing. 


1 6  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

The  Lakewood  correspondent  phones  that  he  is  porter- 
ing  a  good  batch  of  pictures  he  made  at  the  Lakehurst 
hangar,  also  photographs  of  enlisted  men  given  to  him  by 
their  families.  These  are  also  met  by  a  boy  and  rushed  in 
for  printing. 

At  noon  a  battery  of  cameramen  await  the  arrival  of  the 
Tucker  at  the  Brooklyn  Navy  Yard.  Commander  Wiley 
and  two  enlisted  men  are  brought  ashore  on  stretchers  and 
the  body  of  the  fourth  who  died  aboard  the  Phoebus  is 
solemnly  lowered.  The  photographers  stay  to  make  hos- 
pital shots  while  boys  expedite  the  first  pictures  back  to  the 
offices. 

Through  the  entire  morning  and  afternoon  the  office 
is  a  tumult  of  action.  Every  second  counts  to  make  the 
necessary  planes  and  trains;  hundreds  of  prints  fall  off  the 
heated  ferrotype  machine  to  be  snatched  up,  straightened 
out,  captioned  and  shoved  hastily  into  envelopes.  Every 
man  and  boy  has  his  place,  his  function. 

Later  in  the  afternoon  the  other  flying  cameraman 
phones  on  his  arrival  that  he  had  made  some  shots  of  a  part 
of  a  dirigible  sticking  up  out  of  the  water  off  Beach  Haven 
on  the  Jersey  coast.  He  had  not  known  at  the  time  that  he 
was  "shooting"  another  tragedy  of  the  search;  the  small 
dirigible  J3  had  been  torn  by  the  squall  and  plunged  into  the 
ocean  within  sight  of  hundreds  of  horrified  spectators  who 
had  lined  the  shore.  The  J3  had  been  ordered  from  its 
hangar  at  Lakehurst  to  join  in  the  search  for  the  Akron. 

Another  thrilling  chapter  in  the  history  of  news  photog- 
raphy is  written  by  the  photographer  who  had  taken  off  in 
a  small  boat  from  Asbury  Park. 

Pitched  from  the  peaks  of  mountainous  waves  into  swirl- 
ing gullies,  his  tiny  craft  had  been  beaten  and  lashed  by  the 
waves,  threatening  to  swamp  and  sink  it  scores  of  times.  Icy 
waters  soaked  them  to  the  skins,  but  he  and  the  skipper  kept 
on  going  with  never  a  thought  to  imminent  disaster.  His  rigid 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  17 

fingers  still  clenched  the  dripping  camera  case.  The  credo 
of  the  newspaper  photographer  was  fixed  in  his  mind;  get 
the  picture.  That  is  all  that  mattered.  For  hours  they 
kept  on,  scanning  the  seas  in  every  direction.  Waves  beat 
the  craft  mercilessly;  a  wall  of  water  had  crashed  the  wind- 
shield glass  of  the  open  ship  into  their  faces.  With  blood 
flowing  from  many  cuts,  their  bodies  stiff  from  cold,  and 
soaked  through  and  through,  the  skipper  and  cameraman 
were  forced  to  return  as  darkness  slowly  crept  in.  From  the 
hotel  room  he  made  his  report,  he  was  grieved  because  he 
could  find  no  wreckage  to  photograph. 

Even  the  flying  Knights  of  the  Camera  were  unaware  of 
the  dangers  involved  in  their  jobs.  Their  land  planes  had 
flown  over  a  large  stretch  of  open  sea,  through  rain  and  fog 
and  mist  with  only  a  clearing  of  weather  now  and  again.  It 
would  have  been  foolhardy,  even  with  a  seaplane.  A  sudden 
plunge,  and  it  would  have  been  the  end.  But  the  search 
had  to  go  on.  The  pictures  must  be  taken. 

At  the  close  of  the  day,  a  haggard,  weary  force  of 
editors,  printers  and  boys  slumped  into  chairs  for  a  few 
brief  moments  of  rest  and  a  hasty  gulping  of  coffee  and 
sandwiches. 

Over  a  desk  stacked  with  a  jumble  of  papers,  clippings, 
photographs  and  messages,  the  picture  editor  scanned  a 
wire  just  received  from  one  of  the  subscribers. 

"Great  work.  Beat  competitors  by  half  hour  on  first 
pictures  of  Akron  disaster/' 

He  smiled.  A  scoop.  Well,  it  was  worth  it.  Just  then 
the  city  editor  bent  over  his  shoulder  with  news  copy  in  his 
hand. 

The  picture  editor  was  up  in  a  flash. 

"Hey,  Jack,"  he  yelled,  in  the  direction  of  a  weary 
cameraman.  "Get  going,  quick.  There's  a  five  alarm  fire 
on  the  East  River  waterfront." 

The  Akron  disaster  was  already  past  history. 


Chapter  II. 

THE  CAMERA  IS  BORN— AND  BECOMES  A 
GIANT 

THE  picture  age  is  here.  Everywhere  the  man  with  the 
camera  abounds,  from  the  northernmost  settlement  in 
Alaska  down  to  the  tip  of  Cape  Horn.  A  story  of  either 
paramount  news  importance  or  one  with  slight  feature  in- 
terest is  covered  by  the  ubiquitous  photographer.  His  lens 
is  trained  on  the  passing  event,  and  history  is  recorded 
with  the  unfailing  eye  of  the  camera.  It  is  the  truthful, 
impartial  observer. 

The  scientist  revels  in  its  judgment;  the  artist  thrills 
in  its  revelations  of  lights  and  shadows;  the  newspaperman 
marvels  in  its  power  to  portray  the  event. 

The  sweeping  beauty  of  a  moon  in  eclipse  is  focused 
and  caught  on  the  gelatine  of  a  film;  the  grandeur  of  the 
Alps  buried  in  snow  is  a  brilliant  spectacle  of  light  and 
shadow;  a  ship  is  hurled  against  the  rocks;  an  earthquake 
tumbles  the  works  of  man  into  hideous  ruins ;  a  mother  and 
child  seek  safety  in  flight  from  raging  flood  waters;  maidens 
dance  beneath  a  May  pole  or  Magyars  strew  flowers  at  a 
holy  feast;  all  the  joys  and  sorrows  that  beset  the  world 
are  in  a  flash  ensnared  by  the  tiny  lens,  never  to  escape. 

The  click  of  the  camera  is  heard  around  the  world. 

Little  did  Louis  Jacques  Daguerre  struggling  with  his 
plates  and  acids  in  his  tiny  Paris  laboratory  in  1839  realize 
that  one  day  his  invention  would  be  as  mighty  as  the  pen, 
and  mightier  than  the  sword. 

For  years  it  remained  the  toddling  infant.  A  daguerro- 
type  manual  of  1840  explained  that  the  most  rapid  ex- 
posure for  a  white  subject  in  direct  Summer  sunlight  was 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  19 

four  minutes.  A  vivid  contrast  to  the  present  day's 
i/2oooth  of  a  second  for  news  work  and  i/i,ooo,oooth 
of  a  second  in  the  scientific  laboratory! 

Daguerreotype  exposures  were  so  long  that  street  scenes 
showed  no  people;  traffic  and  pedestrians  did  not  remain 
still  enough  for  the  lens  to  record  the  image. 

Another  pioneer  in  England  helped  pave  the  way.  While 
Daguerre  was  working  on  the  method  of  taking  pictures  on  a 
silver  coppered  plate,  Henry  Fox  Talbot  experimented  with 
making  pictures  on  paper.  He  took  fine  drawing  paper, 
soaked  it  in  a  solution  of  salt  and  then  silver  nitrate.  This 
process  published  in  1839  was  the  only  practical  one  then 
for  making  direct  copies. 

Steadily  through  the  years  the  technique  and  the 
methods  of  reproduction  improved.  But  it  was  a  slow 
and  cumbersome  process.  Still  lifes  and  portraits  were  the 
vogue.  The  ladies  and  gentlemen  of  the  mid-Victorian 
era  flocked  to  the  studios  to  have  their  likenesses  captured 
between  frames  of  gilt  and  velvet. 

The  quality  of  the  photographs  was  good,  but  painfully 
slow.  It  took  hours  to  develop  the  plates;  a  longer  time 
to  fix  and  dry.  Scientists  labored  on  to  improve  the  sensi- 
tizing and  developing  processes;  the  subject  with  his  or  her 
head  held  into  immobility  by  a  rack  hidden  from  view  of 
the  camera  sat  in  the  chair  for  what  seemed  hours  long 
while  the  perspiring  photographer  fingered  his  huge  plates, 
focused  and  refocused  behind  his  large  black  cloth. 

So  massive  was  the  equipment  used  in  the  early  days  of 
its  growth,  that  a  journeying  photographer  was  forced  to 
use  a  wagon  for  carrying  it.  Besides  his  huge  camera  and 
plates,  there  was  his  glass,  collodion,  silver  nitrate,  devel- 
oper, fixative,  etc.  After  flowing  his  plates  with  collodion, 
he  exposed  his  subjects  from  ten  to  thirty  seconds,  then 
hurried  into  a  dark  compartment  for  developing.  The  en- 
tire operation  required  meticulous  handling  and  care. 


20  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

During  this  entire  period,  the  use  of  the  photograph 
for  newspaper  purposes  was  unknown.  The  illustrated 
weeklies  such  as  Leslie's  and  Harper's  in  this  country,  and 
the  London  Illustrated  News  and  others  abroad,  used  steel 
and  copper  engravings.  The  only  means  of  reproduction 
for  the  black  and  white  dailies  were  the  wood  cut  and  line 
drawing,  crude  but  effective. 

Joseph  Pulitzer,  the  dynamic  and  enterprising  publisher 
of  the  New  York  World,  realized  the  value  of  the  news- 
paper illustration  as  a  circulation  builder,  and  he  was  the 
first  to  make  extensive  use  of  woodcuts. 

The  artist's  conception  of  an  outstanding  personality 
and  event  was  etched  on  a  slab  of  chalk  mounted  on  a  piece 
of  wood.  Lead  was  poured  into  the  lines  of  the  sketch 
and  the  newsprint  took  the  resulting  impression. 

Other  leading  publishers  followed  suit,  and  toward  the 
end  of  the  century  the  competition  was  keen  in  the  publica- 
tion of  woodcuts  and  line  drawings. 

The  discovery  of  the  halftone  engraving  process  by 
Frederick  Eugene  Ives,  a  photographer  employed  by  Cor- 
nell University  in  1879,  opened  the  way  for  the  use  of  the 
photograph  as  a  newspaper  reproduction.  Still  many  years 
passed  before  the  perfection  of  engraving  processes  en- 
abled the  newspaper  to  publish  the  first  crude  news  photo- 
graph. It  was  a  slow,  uphill  climb,  but  the  young  giant 
was  on  his  way. 

The  first  man  to  write  pictorial  history  in  the  term  of 
news  was  Matthew  Brady,  a  commercial  photographer 
with  fine  studios  in  New  York  and  Washington.  The  Civil 
War  was  his  field  of  action.  His  photographs  of  the  con- 
flict, as  well  as  those  made  by  his  large  staff  of  assistants, 
are  his  fine  contribution  to  history. 

After  securing  official  permission  to  accompany  the 
Union  Army,  he  got  into  action  just  before  the  battle  of 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  21 

Bull  Run,  fought  on  July  21,  1861.    A  staff  of  twenty  men, 
employed  by  him,  was  hurried  into  other  sectors. 

Operators  worked  in  pairs,  one  manipulating  the  camera, 
the  other  in  the  dark  tent  which  was  mounted  on  a  horse- 
drawn  wagon.  The  huge  camera,  with  its  8  x  10  plates, 
poised  on  tripod,  was  then  trained  on  the  battlefield,  gen- 
erally after  the  firing  had  died  down  and  the  ground  was 
strewn  with  bodies.  The  bulky,  slow-speed  box  could 
not  catch  soldiers  charging  or  engaged  in  hand  to  hand 
fighting,  as  the  World  War  cameras  later  portrayed,  but 
still  the  job  was  almost  as  dangerous. 

Working  as  they  did,  they  were  openly  exposed  to  enemy 
fire  as  the  slow  wet  plate  caught  the  scene  for  perpetuity. 
Fragments  of  shell  often  shattered  their  cameras. 

One  of  Brady's  assistants,  J.  F.  Coonley,  was  taking/ 
a  picture  of  a  Union  bridge  when  a  body  of  Confederate 
cavalry  surprised  him  at  his  work.     They  opened  fire  but 
Coonley  completed  his  job,   then   dashed   for  the   engine 
and  train  assigned  to  him  for  the  task. 

One  of  Brady's  scenes,  called  "Harvest  of  Death," 
showing  the  bodies  of  soldiers  strewn  on  the  battlefield, 
was  widely  circulated  and  attracted  considerable  attention. 
On  seeing  this  and  other  war  photographs  taken  at  the 
time,  Oliver  Wendell  Holmes,  the  famous  poet,  remarked: 
"The  sight  of  these  pictures  is  a  commentary  on  civilization 
such  as  a  savage  might  well  triumph  to  show  its  mission- 


aries." 


The  photograph  was  already  impressing  mankind  in 
its  revulsion  to  the  bestial  savagery  of  war. 

At  a  later  date,  the  World  War  pictorial  record  was  to 
be  shown  to  the  world  to  reveal  horror  and  brutality  where 
the  magic  of  the  word  had  failed  to  impress.  The  lens 
had  stripped  warfare  of  its  glamor. 

It  was  unfortunate  that  the  newspaper  was  unequipped 
to  reproduce  these  war  scenes.  It  is  true  that  thousands 


22  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

of  prints  were  distributed  for  sale  (Brady  had  to  realize 
some  return  for  the  thousands  of  dollars  he  invested  in 
this  venture),  and  that  many  found  their  way  into  the 
illustrated  weeklies,  but  the  moral  effect  would  have  been 
the  greater  had  the  avid  readers  of  the  dailies,  scanning 
the  latest  war  news,  seen  these  stark  portrayals  of  the 
fighting  fronts. 

Many  of  Brady's  pictures  were  made  in  duplicate  and 
triplicate. 

But  his  venture,  the  first  into  the  realm  of  big  news, 
was  a  financial  failure.  One  of  his  creditors  acquired  one 
of  the  sets  of  negatives.  He  placed  another  set  in  storage, 
but  in  1873  he  was  forced  to  auction  these  when  he  was 
unable  to  pay  his  storage  bill.  The  War  Department  was 
the  purchaser. 

Only  through  the  untiring  efforts  of  General  Banjamin 
F.  Butler  and  James  A.  Garfield,  later  President,  was  Brady 
given  national  recognition  and  an  appropriation  of  $25,000 
was  finally  voted  as  payment  for  his  collection. 

At  the  present  time  there  are  in  the  care  of  the  Army 
Pictorial  Service,  a  branch  of  the  Signal  Corps  of  the 
United  States  Army.  There  are  over  6,000  negatives  in  the 
files. 

The  duplicate  set  was  virtually  forgotten  for  many 
years.  Carelessly  handled,  many  of  the  plates  were  cracked 
and  broken.  Finally  rediscovered,  they  were  reproduced 
in  a  ten-volume  publication  in  1911,  called  the  "Photographic 
History  of  the  Civil  War." 

The  news  photographer  had  for  the  first  time  carved  a 
niche  in  history's  hall  of  fame.  Brady,  the  commercial 
photographer,  is  remembered  as  the  news  photographer. 

For  a  long  period  following  the  close  of  the  Civil  War, 
there  was  little  improvement  in  photography,  although 
much  research  was  done  in  the  laboratories.  It  was  the  age 
of  the  familiar  tintypes. 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  23 

The  photographer  still  coated  his  glass  with  collodion, 
obtained  by  dissolving  nitro-cotton  in  a  mixture  of  ether 
and  alcohol,  immersed  it  in  a  solution  of  silver  nitrate  and 
then  placed  in  the  camera  still  wet.  After  the  exposure, 
it  had  to  be  developed  and  fixed  on  the  spot. 

The  spurt  came  when  silver  bromide  came  into  use  as  a 
sensitizing  agent  and  dry  plates  came  into  usage  with  the 
work  of  Bennett  in  1879. 

In  1880,  George  Eastman  put  his  dry  plate  on  the 
market.  Eight  years  later  he  introduced  to  the  public  the 
first  camera  which  did  not  have  to  be  supported  by  a  table 
or  tripod.  It  was  his  famous  Kodak.  The  camera  was 
able  to  take  100  exposures  on  bromide  paper,  but  the 
purchaser  was  forced  to  return  the  camera  with  the  ex- 
posed paper  to  Eastman's  Rochester  plant  to  be  unloaded 
and  developed.  The  paper  was  later  replaced  by  celluloid, 
followed  by  his  "daylight  loading  cartridges."  The 
camera's  compactness  and  reasonable  cost  appealed  to  the 
public. 

The  man  on  the  street  was  now  beginning  to  learn  and 
enjoy  the  art  of  photography. 

Pictures  in  newspapers  were  in  demand.  Pulitzer  filled 
his  morning  and  evening  World  with  the  crude  woodcuts  and 
line  cuts  made  from  drawings.  William  Randolph  Hearst 
did  the  same  with  his  morning  and  evening  Journal.  The 
battle  of  the  rival  giants  was  on.  Circulation  figures  leaped 
ahead.  The  Spanish-American  War  boosted  the  use 
of  pictures  and  the  circulation  of  the  rival  papers  leaped 
forward. 

It  was  not  until  the  turn  of  the  century  when  photo- 
engraving was  introduced  that  the  first  photographs  were 
used  as  newspaper  illustrations.  The  woodcuts  and  linecuts 
were  discarded  and  the  first  crude  photographs  made  their 
appearance  in  the  dailies. 

The   illustrated  weeklies  thrived.      The   enterprise   of 


24  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

Robert  J.  Collier  accounted  for  the  immediate  success  of  a 
new  weekly  he  started  about  the  time  of  the  outbreak  of  the 
Spanish-American  War.  He  sent  James  Henry  Hare, 
soldier  of  fortune,  war  correspondent  and  photographer, 
to  Cuba  to  cover  the  short-lived  conflict.  One  of  his  war 
pictures,  the  shattered  battleship  Maine  in  the  harbor  of 
Havana,  won  world  acclaim. 

Pictures  had  helped  Collier  to  fame  and  fortune. 

In  the  early  i9Oo's,  the  first  picture  syndicates  were 
started,  first  Bain's,  then  American  Press,  followed  by 
Underwood  and  Underwood  and  others.  In  those  years 
the  press  photographer  used  a  variety  of  8  x  10  cameras, 
bulky  and  tricky  to  manipulate.  The  Graphic  and  Graflex 
with  their  fast  lenses  and  shutters  had  yet  to  make  their 
appearance. 

While  Pulitzer  and  Hearst  tilted  swords  and  lifted 
news  photographs  to  front  page  importance,  it  remained 
for  the  genius  of  English  journalism,  the  late  Lord  North- 
cliffe  to  create  the  first  illustrated  daily  tabloid,  the  Daily 
Mirror.  It  proved  to  be  the  greatest  stimulant  to  news 
photography,  as  was  later  indicated  by  the  mad  scramble 
of  other  English  publishers  to  follow  suit. 

In  1903,  Lord  Northcliffe  or  known  then  as  Alfred 
Harmsworth  before  he  was  knighted,  had  started  the 
Mirror  as  a  women's  newspaper.  It  was  written  and 
edited  by  women.  The  venture  was  Northcliffe's  first  fail- 
ure and  cost  him  $500,000.  He  decided  to  change  it  into 
a  pictorial  tabloid,  the  first  of  its  kind.  The  people  liked 
pictures.  The  great  success  of  the  Illustrated  London 
News  and  the  Graphic,  both  weeklies,  attested  to  that. 

The  London  Daily  Graphic  had  been  using  line  drawings 
with  moderate  success.  Northcliffe  decided  that  news  pho- 
tographs would  win  the  readers.  And  it  did. 

In  went  a  staff  of  young  men,  vigorous  and  enterprising. 
Photographic  and  developing  departments  were  started, 


©    International    News    Photo 

DEATH  TAKES  A  FLING  IN  WALL  STREET 

The  scene  at  Broad  end  Wall  Streets,  in  the  heart  of  New  York's  financial 
district,  on  September  16,  1920,  following:  the  terrific  explosion  which  killed 
thirty  persons  and  injured  more  than  300.  The  blast  shattered  windows  for 
blocks  around  and  threw  the  financial  district  into  a  panic.  It  was  believed 
to  have  been  caused  by  a  time  bomb  left  in  a  one-horse  truck  in  front  of 
the  United  States  Assay  Office,  across  from  the  J.  P.  Morgan  Building-. 


^  Wide  World  Photos 

HOLDING    ON    FOR    DEAR    LIFE 

Desperately  clinging-  to  the  rigging-  of  their  wrecked  whaler,  the  Sohlagen, 
are  five  members  of  its  crew.  Below  them  are  the  swirling-  waters  of  the 
South  Atlantic  which  is  pounding  the  craft  to  pieces  as  it'  lies  on  the  jagged 
rocks  of  Robben  Island  off  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  Six  of  the  crew  lost 
their  lives.  These  five  survivors  were  taken  off  by  means  of  breeches-buoy 
shortly  after  this  remarkable  photograph  was  taken. 


r«friP|j 
•»  *  *«:< 


©  New  York  Daily  News  from  Acme 

BONUS  MARCHERS  AND  POLICE  CLASH 

A  tense  and  dramatic  scene  as  bonus  veterans,  armed  with  sticks,  pipes 
and  rocks,  grimly  fight  Washington,  D.  C.,  police  on  an  open  lot  within  a 
stone's  throw  of  the  nation's  Capitol.  Five  policemen  and  more  than  a  dozen 
veterans  were  injured  in  this  fray  which  took  place  in  summer  of  1932. 
Joseph  Costa,  New  York  Daily  News  photographer,  braved  flying  rocks,  to 
make  this  remarkable  picture. 


©    International    Newspictures 
PIER    COLLAPSE 

The  cameraman  snapped  this  remarkable  picture  the  instant  this  Sydney, 
Australia,  pier  collapsed,  throwing  many  persons  into  the  water.  A  boat 
carrying  300  hikers  from  Newcastle,  New  South  "Wales,  had  arrived  at* 
Sydney.  About  30  young  persons  jumped  on  to  the  wharf.  The  pier  gave 
way  under  their  weight.  Many  had  narrow  escapes  from  drowning. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  25 

and  a  staff  of  photographers  were  assigned  to  cover  stories 
throughout  Great  Britain.  He  engaged  correspondent- 
photographers  in  all  parts  of  the  world  to  rush  their  first 
and  best  material  to  him. 

When  the  change  was  made,  the  Mirror's  circulation 
had  dropped  to  20,000.  The  new  paper,  now  called  the 
Illustrated  Mirror,  started  with  a  circulation  of  60,000 
which  soon  increased  to  100,000. 

Special  trains  were  hired  to  rush  the  plates  back  to 
London;  the  Mirror  bloomed  with  photographic  beats.  To 
the  four  corners  of  the  world  went  his  camera  correspond- 
ents. One  of  them  accompanied  Colonel  Theodore  Roose- 
velt on  his  African  hunting  trip,  and  the  American  pub- 
lishers kept  the  cables  humming  with  requests  for  prints. 

The  enterprise  of  the  Mirror  in  despatching  a  camera- 
man post-haste  to  the  scene  of  the  Messina,  Italy,  earth- 
quake, proved  to  be  of  financial  benefit  as  well. 

The  speed  with  which  the  photographer  hastened  to 
the  scene  and  back  to  London  enabled  Northcliffe  to  sell 
duplicate  sets  of  photographs  all  throughout  Europe,  even 
including  Italian  newspapers.  He  made  an  $8,000  profit 
on  the  picture  beat.  During  the  Turkish-Italian  war,  the 
Mirror  flourished  with  photographic  scoops. 

In  the  beginning  it  was  difficult  to  secure  well  trained 
cameramen.  The  field  was  new  and  Northcliffe  paid  those 
he  hired  salaries  that  were  considered  fabulous  in  compari- 
son with  the  pay  of  the  average  news  reporter.  Youth  saw 
an  adventurous  and  well-paying  career  in  news  photography 
and  flocked  to  its  standards. 

Northcliffe  insisted  on  good,  clean  pictures.  He  was 
a  stern  censor  and  allowed  no  photographs  to  be  published 
that  he  thought  would  shock  the  good  taste  of  the  readers. 

An  illustration  of  this  was  shown  in  the  coverage  of  the 
Jeffries-Johnson  championship  fight  at  Carson  City,  Nevada. 
The  Mirror  was  spending  thousands  to  have  the  photo- 


26  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

graphs  rushed  back  to  England,  and  special  editions  were 
to  be  run  off.  Northcliffe  was  shown  the  proof  sheets  just 
before  the  paper  went  to  press. 

"Don't  print  one  of  those  photographs,"  he  shouted  to 
the  editor.  "It  is  likely  to  prove  offensive  to  our  decent 
women  readers." 

The  fight  pictures  were  never  published. 

For  many  years  Northcliffe  tried  to  interest  American 
publishers  in  the  daily  tabloid,  but  the  response  was  cold. 
The  American  reader  likes  his  full-sized  newspaper,  he 
was  told.  The  opinion  was  emphatic  that  the  tabloid  would 
never  flourish  on  American  soil. 

It  remained  for  many  years  to  pass  before  Joseph 
Medill  Patterson  and  Robert  R.  McCormick,  publishers  of 
the  Chicago  Tribune,  were  to  start  a  newspaper  which 
later  enjoyed  the  largest  circulation  in  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere, the  New  York  Daily  News. 

Prior  to  its  appearance  as  the  Illustrated  Daily  News 
on  June  26,  1919,  the  use  of  news  pictures  throughout  the 
United  States  was  making  a  slow  but  sure  progress.  Camera 
equipment  and  photographic  facilities  were  being  constantly 
improved.  The  reflex  cameras,  such  as  the  Graflex,  had 
made  their  appearance.  The  lea  with  its  4  x  6  plates 
was  a  handy  camera  enjoyed  by  the  early  news  photogra- 
phers. The  shutter  speeds  were  being  constantly  pushed 
upward.  Pictures  could  be  taken  under  all  conditions. 

Hearst  had  already  made  his  name  as  a  pioneer  of  news 
pictures  and  encouraged  his  editors  in  the  fast  shipment 
of  pictures  for  first  publication.  He  had  astounded  the  staid 
conservatives  by  chartering  a  special  train  to  rush  the 
Jeffries-Johnson  pictures  from  Carson  City,  Nevada,  to  his 
San  Francisco  publication  and  beat  the  opposition  by  so 
many  hours  that  they  could  not  use  them. 

In  1913  the  late  Adolph  Ochs,  publisher  of  the  New 
York  Times,  while  abroad,  investigated  German  develop- 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  27 

ments  in  rotogravure.  He  ordered  two  presses  to  be  ship- 
ped to  this  country. 

Early  in  1914,  the  first  rotogravure  supplement  in  the 
United  States  made  its  appearance  in  the  New  York  Times. 
It  contained  reproductions  of  paintings  for  the  Altman 
collection.  From  that  day  on,  the  Sunday  circulation,  then 
lagging  far  behind  the  daily  totals,  had  gained  a  solid 
100,000,  and  rotogravure  was  on  its  way. 

Under  the  able  management  of  the  late  William  Henry 
Field,  the  Illustrated  Daily  News,  later  changed  to  The 
News,  New  York's  Picture  Newspaper,  advanced  steadily 
in  prestige  and  circulation.  After  a  short  lapse  when  the 
circulation  dropped,  the  first  100,000  was  reached  in  De- 
cember, 1919,  climbing  steadily  upward,  until  in  December, 
1925,  the  daily  issue  averaged  more  than  one  million. 

When  the  short  lapse  of  a  decreasing  circulation  oc- 
curred, the  "I  told  you  so's"  beamed.  Of  course,  the  tabloid 
could  not  take  hold  in  America.  But  the  newspaper  was 
then  on  spindly,  toddling  legs.  It  was  seeking  a  way  out 
of  the  experimental  stage.  When  the  novelty  wore  off,  and 
the  paper  was  being  published  on  its  merits,  the  public 
realized  that  it  had  been  founded  as  a  lasting  institution,  and 
the  circulation  leaped  ahead. 

The  subway  riders  enjoyed  its  handy  size,  as  well  as 
its  pictures  and  features,  and  the  News  out  of  its  experi- 
mental stage  had  come  to  stay. 

The  managing  editor  was  Philip  Payne,  a  robust  New 
Jersey  newspaperman,  with  a  keen  sense  for  the  news  in 
pictures;  the  photographers,  almost  as  many  in  number 
as  the  reporters,  covered  the  local  events  with  their  trusty 
leas.  Continual  experimentation  went  on;  the  darkrooms 
were  improved,  close  attention  was  given  to  the  quality 
and  make-up  of  the  pictures;  the  News  developed  a  photo- 
engraving process  of  its  own  which  in  fine  results  had  no 
equal. 


28  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

At  the  close  of  1921,  the  News,  together  with  its  parent 
paper,  the  Chicago  Tribune,  started  the  Pacific  and  Atlantic 
Photo  Syndicate,  and  within  a  short  while  1500  photogra- 
pher-correspondents the  world  over  were  sending  in  their 
masterpieces  of  news  and  features. 

Other  picture  syndicates  had  already  made  their  start; 
Hearst  with  his  International  News  Photos,  the  New  York 
Times  with  the  Wide  World  Photos,  starting  in  1919 
with  a  staff  of  six  to  emerge  soon  with  hundreds  of  corres- 
pondents in  every  corner  of  the  world;  the  Newspaper 
Enterprise  Association,  started  by  the  Scripps-Howard 
combination,  later  to  become  the  Acme  News  Photos  and 
another  leader  in  the  picture-gathering  business.  In  1926, 
the  Associated  Press,  then  primarily  a  news  gathering 
organization,  turned  its  attention  to  the  importance  of 
news  pictures  and  inaugurated  the  Associated  Press  Photos. 

The  success  of  the  Daily  News  boomed  the  news  pic- 
ture as  a  powerful  circulation  builder,  and  picture  tabloids 
sprung  up  in  all  parts  of  the  country.  Even  those  pub- 
lishers who  had  been  loathe  to  change  format  and  policy 
swung  with  the  demand  and  opened  their  pages  to  news 
photographs.  They  built  their  own  photo-engraving  plants, 
subscribed  to  one  of  the  large  syndicates,  hired  a  staff  of 
photographers,  built  darkrooms  and  bought  equipment. 
Many  publishers,  to  get  the  best  results  possible,  subscribed 
to  all  the  leading  syndicates  so  that  they  could  reap  the 
benefits  of  periodical  scoops.  Still  others  added  the  roto- 
gravure supplement  to  their  Sunday  editions. 

With  competition  keen,  and  demand  intensified,  the 
keynote  of  the  syndicates  and  newspapers  became  Speed, 
more  Speed.  The  newspapers  employed  their  own  staff 
of  cameramen  to  cover  local  news;  the  syndicates  opened 
bureaus  in  the  key  cities,  staff  photographers  were  on  the 
job  from  coast  to  coast.  Able,  free-lance  photographers 
in  the  smaller  cities  and  outlying  districts  were  encouraged 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  29 

by  the  syndicate  to  send  in  their  material,  and  were  well 
paid  for  their  efforts. 

Hundreds  of  the  smaller  dailies,  weeklies  and  semi- 
weeklies  contracted  for  the  mat  services  built  up  by  the 
syndicates.  For  a  nominal  price,  the  picture  page,  in 
matrix  form,  would  be  received  by  the  smaller  newspaper, 
all  prepared  for  only  the  casting. 

Within  a  short  time  after  its  occurrence,  a  major  news 
story  would  have  its  pictorial  reproduction  scanned  over 
the  breakfast  table  of  every  resident  from  Maine  to  Cali- 
fornia. 

Mrs.  Vincent  Astor  at  a  Newport  horse  show  or  bask- 
ing in  the  Palm  Beach  sun;  the  Prince  of  Wales  attending 
an  official  function  or  jumping  the  hurdles  on  his  favorite 
horse;  the  ascetic  Mahatma  Ghandi  in  his  simple  linen 
cloth  and  Billy  Sunday  storming  at  the  unregenerate,  be- 
came as  fully  familiar  in  every  expression  of  look  and  eye 
as  the  local  deacon  or  groceryman. 

Cables  and  wires  were  speeding  the  news;  the  ships 
and  planes  and  trains  were  bringing  the  pictures. 

Chartering  planes  to  expedite  the  news  picture  became 
an  everyday  occurrence;  even  with  the  first  airmail  and 
later  expansion  of  routes,  the  syndicates  turned  to  the  fast- 
est means  of  conveyance  to  get  the  first  picture  in  on  a  big 
story. 

Photographic  laboratories  turned  scientific  experiments 
into  successes  to  meet  the  ever  increasing  demand  for  better 
and  speedier  products.  Larger  and  faster  lenses  were  built 
to  cope  with  poor  light  conditions  and  stop  the  speediest 
action.  Fast  emulsion  plates  were  put  on  the  market.  Pan- 
chromatic and  infra-red  negatives  were  manufactured  to 
overcome  atmospheric  conditions.  Development  of  acces- 
sory equipment,  as  light  meters,,  range  finders,  filters  and 
synchronizers,  were  reaching  their  highest  peak. 

The  trend  of  equipment  was  toward  compactness  and 


30  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

simplification.  The  three-foot  spread  pan  with  the  dan- 
gerous magnesium  powder  evolved  into  the  safe  and  handy 
photo  flash  bulb;  the  bulky  8  x  10  negatives  decreased  in 
size,  first  to  6£  x  8|,  then  to  5  x  7,  still  smaller  to  4  x  6, 
then  to  4  x  5,  and  finally  down  to  3J  x  4.  Huge  cameras 
were  discarded  in  favor  of  a  sturdy  and  compact  Graphic 
and  Graflex,  and  then  the  miniature  Contax  and  Leica  to 
snap  the  intimate  and  informal. 

The  newspaper  photographer  has  also  developed 
through  the  years  into  a  staunch  and  reliable  pillar  of  the 
press.  In  the  beginning  he  was  ofttimes  ignored  and  avoided 
by  the  reporter,  and  looked  down  upon  as  a  nuisance  and 
interloper.  True,  the  early  type  was  often  rude  and  brusque, 
but  the  rudeness  and  brusqueness  was  born  of  necessity 
and  the  flare-up  of  the  underdog.  He  had  to  push  himself 
into  unwanted  places  and  situations.  The  public  was  aloof 
to  the  cameraman  and  the  notables  felt  it  was  a  breach  of 
decorum  to  pose  for  him. 

Today  the  photographer  is  on  the  same  plane  with  the 
reporter.  On  most  stories  the  men  plan  together,  work  as 
one  unit.  The  publisher  has  seen  fit  that  the  newspaper's 
photographic  staff  is  given  as  much  care  and  attention  as 
his  reportorial  force.  Through  grit  and  courage,  loyalty 
and  self-sacrifice,  the  Knight  of  the  Camera  has  gained 
his  deserved  laurels. 

The  constant  desire  to  get  the  first  and  best  possible 
pictures  on  a  story  has  led  to  many  startling  changes  in 
transportation.  Planes  and  trains  were  chartered  fre- 
quently, and  even  speedboat  and  dog-sled  and  motorcycle 
were  used  to  bring  in  the  first  pack  of  negatives. 

The  following  illustration  of  coverage  on  a  big  story 
is  typical  of  the  many  of  the  time. 

Gunnar  Kasson  had  made  front  page  history  with  his 
dash  across  the  frozen  Alaskan  snows  with  dog  team  bear- 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  31 

ing  serum  to  diphtheria-stricken  Nome.  It  saved  thousands 
of  lives. 

The  pictures  of  the  arrival  made  by  a  Nome  photo- 
grapher-correspondent for  a  big  syndicate  were  turned  over 
to  a  Captain  Hegness  who  rushed  870  miles  from  Nome 
to  Nenana  in  a  record  trip  by  dog-sled,  traveling  18  hours 
a  day.  At  Nenana,  Hegness  boarded  a  train  leaving  for 
Seward,  400  miles  distant.  At  Seward,  the  steamship 
Alaska  was  waiting,  steam  up,  and  a  bundle  of  plates  was 
turned  over  to  the  captain.  In  Seattle,  1300  miles  south, 
the  coast  representative  of  the  syndicate,  started  north  with 
a  seaplane.  At  Cape  Jazon,  300  miles  north  of  Seattle, 
he  put  out  in  a  speedboat  and  received  the  plates,  heavily 
wrapped  in  oilcloth,  as  they  were  lowered  over  the  side 
of  the  ship.  Fifteen  minutes  later,  he  was  speeding  back 
to  Seattle,  arriving  there  15  hours  before  the  steamship 
Alaska.  From  Seattle  the  pictures  were  printed  and  dis- 
tributed. A  southbound  plane  was  chartered  to  fly  the  pic- 
tures to  the  California  members,  another  was  started  east 
with  prints  and  negatives  for  the  Central  and  Eastern 
bureaus  and  subscribers.  It  was  a  grand  scoop. 

As  speed  became  more  and  more  essential,  experiments 
were  being  conducted  in  many  quarters  to  transmit  picture 
by  wire,  utilizing  the  telephonic  and  telegraphic  wires.  In 
1921,  the  New  York  World  successfully  transmitted  the 
picture  of  an  Indian  head  to  the  St.  Louis  Post  Dispatch, 
using  a  telephone  circuit.  In  1923,  the  first  telegraphed 
picture  of  the  Japanese  earthquake  was  sent  from  Seattle 
to  Los  Angeles,  Chicago  and  New  York.  The  following 
year,  the  American  Telephone  and  Telegraph  Company 
demonstrated  their  first  pictures  of  the  Republican  Conven- 
tion in  Cleveland  in  a  test  of  telephone  wire  transmission. 
In  December  of  the  same  year,  the  Radio  Corporation 
of  America  gave  a  public  demonstration  of  picture  trans- 
mission by  radio  from  England  to  America.  Likewise  in 


32  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

Europe  wired  transmission  of  pictures  was  taking  a  firm 
hold. 

A  new  era  in  picture  gathering  and  reproduction  had 
been  opened.  It  meant  that  a  picture  could  be  received 
at  the  newspaper's  offices  with  almost  the  same  speed  as 
the  descriptive  story;  it  broadened  and  accelerated  the 
development  of  pictorial  journalism.  The  managing  editor 
shouted  with  the  same  gusto  for  the  picture  as  for  the 
story,  whether  it  broke  on  his  back  lots  or  in  the  Chinese 
hinterland. 

The  camera  had  become  a  powerful  giant  in  the  field 
of  journalism. 

And  he  is  still  growing! 


Chapter  III. 

THE  TRAIN,  PLANE,  PIGEON,  WIRE  AND  RADIO 
CARRY  THE  PICTURE 

From  the  first  days  of  the  news  picture,  the  newspapers 
and  picture  syndicates  have  utilized  every  means  of  convey- 
ance to  bring  the  reproduction  of  the  event  before  the  eyes 
of  the  reader:  from  the  interior  of  China  the  donkey  and 
jinrikishaw  have  brought  the  flood  and  famine  pictures;  the 
carrier  pigeon  carried  the  film  in  Japan;  native  runners 
brought  the  pictures  from  the  jungle  interiors;  dog  sleds 
bore  the  negatives  from  the  Arctic  wastes;  every  known 
vehicle  in  Europe  and  America  has  expedited  the  photo- 
graph, the  automobile,  train,  speedboat,  airplane,  dirigible, 
motorcycle,  until  man  turned  to  the  laboratory  and  found 
a  miracle  in  the  radio  and  telephone  wire  to  span  the  leagues 
in  a  lightning  leap  and  carry  the  picture  with  the  speed  of  a 
dot  and  dash  and  a  wired  conversation. 

In  the  beginning,  the  picture  languished  far  behind  the 
news  story;  days,  weeks,  and  even  a  month  or  two  would 
elapse  before  the  reader  would  be  presented  with  the  illus- 
tration. Today  we  are  presented  with  the  ultima  in  speed; 
a  picture  can  be  snapped  in  the  forests  of  the  Tyrol  and  in 
several  hours  the  readers  of  Los  Angeles  will  be  presented 
with  a  newspaper  reproduction,  literally,  before  the  story 
breaks,  for  there  will  be  about  a  ten  hour  difference  in  time. 

Editors  blinked  and  rubbed  their  eyes  when  the  late 
Lord  Northcliffe  ordered  his  photographer  to  charter  a 
vessel,  the  only  one  obtainable  in  Italian  waters,  to  carry 
him  to  Tripoli  to  cover  the  start  of  hostilities  between  Tur- 
key and  Italy,  and  when  he  docked  startled  a  cab  driver  by 
shouting:  "Drive  me  to  the  battlefield!"  It  was  setting 


34  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

historic  precedent,  and  the  newspaper  world  gasped  still 
more  when  the  London  Daily  Mirror  carried  the  first  and 
exclusive  pictures  of  the  conflict.  It  was  something  new, 
startling  in  the  world  of  newspapers,  and  when  the  circula- 
tion of  the  Mirror  leaped  higher  and  higher  with  North- 
cliffe's  successive  picture  scoops,  the  publishers  realized  then 
and  there  that  they  would  have  to  follow  the  dazzling  pace 
set  by  the  great  genius  of  Fleet  Street.  Chartering  ships 
and  trains  became  a  commonplace  in  the  field  of  news  pho- 
tography. Speed,  speed — more  speed — became  the  shib- 
boleth and  battle  cry  of  a  score  of  editors. 

Into  the  far  corners  of  the  world  went  the  man  with  the 
camera,  using  the  fastest  means  of  conveyance  to  get  to  and 
from  the  scene  of  the  story.  It  was  the  day  of  the  ship 
and  train;  the  airplane  had  yet  to  make  its  appearance.  By 
ship  and  train  the  cameraman  hurried  to  the  battlefields  of 
the  Balkan  Wars;  and  even  Northcliffe  had  earlier  dispatch- 
ed a  photographer  from  far-off  London  to  cover  the  gold 
rush  in  the  Yukon.  Distances  mattered  not;  it  was  the 
slogan  of  the  editor  then,  as  it  is  today:  "Get  the  picture! 
And  bring  it  back  first!" 

When  William  Randolph  Hearst  in  this  country  char- 
tered a  special  train  to  carry  the  first  pictures  of  the  Wil- 
lard-Johnson  fight  in  Carson  City,  Nevada,  to  his  paper  in 
San  Francisco  for  a  clean  beat  of  a  day  or  more,  he  was 
creating  a  new  epoch  in  pictorial  journalism  in  this  country; 
and  it  was  not  long  before  other  publishers  and  editors  took 
up  the  challenge  and  initiated  a  rivalry  which  still  holds 
until  this  day. 

The  problems  for  the  syndicate  and  newspaper  editors 
became  a  bit  more  involved,  complex.  It  became  not  alone 
their  duty  to  utilize  the  best  and  fastest  cameras  and  para- 
phernalia, the  speeding  up  of  printing  and  engraving  meth- 
ods, but  it  was  their  task  to  establish  the  best  and  fastest 
media  for  getting  the  cameraman  to  the  scene  and  back  with 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  35 

the  pictures  to  the  office.  Placing  the  pictures  in  the  mail, 
with  a  special  delivery  stamp  attached,  was  too  ordinary, 
too  regular  a  procedure.  The  editor  could  not  afford  to  sit 
back  in  his  swivel  chair  and  wait  for  the  arrival  of  the  post- 
man. 

The  syndicate  took  up  a  new  weapon.  A  cameraman  in 
a  distant  city  had  taken  some  spot  news  pictures.  How  to 
get  them  back  pronto?  Why  not  give  the  package  of  films 
or  prints  to  a  passenger  or  train  employe?  It  would  mean 
a  saving  of  several  or  more  hours,  so  the  trick  was  done. 
The  cameraman  would  entrust  the  pictures  to  the  passenger 
or  employe,  and  then  phone  or  wire  the  office  that  such  and 
such  a  party  in  a  certain  car  would  arrive  at  the  station  at  a 
certain  time,  and  the  syndicate  or  newspaper  representative 
would  be  at  the  station  to  pick  up  the  package.  But  great 
care  had  to  be  exercised  that  a  rival  paper  or  syndicate 
would  not  pick  up  the  package  by  "mistake."  Train  sched- 
ules were  figured  very  carefully  by  the  editor,  and  on  many 
occasions  time  would  be  saved  by  rerouting  a  package  from 
a  distant  city  on  several  different  lines.  Also,  many  min- 
utes would  be  saved  by  meeting  the  train  at  a  suburban 
point,  and  rushing  the  pictures  in  by  motorcycle.  It  became 
a  favorite  stunt  for  New  York  syndicate  editors  to  dis- 
patch a  motorcycle  man  to  Manhattan  Transfer  on  the  out- 
skirts of  Newark  to  pick  up  a  package  on  the  Pennsylvania 
system.  The  motorcyclist  would  be  back  in  the  office,  espe- 
cially if  it  were  located  in  the  Park  Row  district,  at  the  time 
the  train  was  pulling  into  Pennsylvania  Station  further  up- 
town. The  ten  minute  saving  meant  that  a  beat  could  be 
established;  the  sales  of  the  picture  added  to  the  syndicate's 
coffers;  to  the  newspaper  it  might  mean  the  making  of  an 
edition. 

The  early  planes  were  still  too  costly  a  proposition  ex- 
cept on  very  outstanding  stories,  and  then,  the  syndiqate 
would  not  hesitate  to  hire  the  best  available  pilots  and  the 


36  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

speediest  planes,  spending  thousands  of  dollars  to  bring  in 
the  first  pictures. 

There  were  more  thrills  in  the  airplane  race  from  Shelby, 
Montana,  to  bring  in  the  first  pictures  of  the  Jack  Dempsey- 
Tommy  Gibbons  fight  on  July  4,  1923,  then  there  was  in  the 
long-drawn  out  battle  between  the  ring  gladiators.  Eleven 
planes  competed  in  the  race.  Torrential  rains  and  fierce 
winds  held  no  terrors  for  the  doughty  fliers,  and  when  one 
was  forced  down,  another  plane  was  in  readiness  to  pick  up 
the  plates  and  carry  on.  Editors  in  the  home  offices  were 
glued  to  the  phones,  missing  their  meals  and  sleep,  keeping 
in  touch  with  the  distant  points,  ready  to  hire  automobiles 
and  fresh  planes  to  keep  up  the  gruelling  pace.  The  pilots, 
too,  reckless  in  their  defiance  of  the  elements,  for  the  planes 
in  those  days  were  mere  frameworks  of  body,  wing  and 
wire,  felt  the  cry  and  surge  of  battle  and  refused  to  quit, 
keeping  on  until  every  ounce  of  energy  was  spent.  Many  of 
them  staggered  out  of  their  cockpits  on  the  completion  of  a 
relay,  haggard,  famished,  punch-drunk,  as  though  they 
themselves  had  partaken  in  the  Shelby  "battle  of  the  cen- 
tury." The  storm  king  high  above  the  clouds  came  near 
giving  them  the  knockout  punch  in  many  a  rain-swept  corner. 

Well  lighted  fields  were  scarce.  The  airmail  service  had 
just  about  started.  The  country  could  not  boast  of  more 
than  a  half  dozen  good  airports  with  decent  runways.  The 
pilot  as  well  as  the  editor  and  cameraman  who  sometimes 
climbed  aboard  with  him  all  took  their  lives  in  their  hands 
when  a  delivery  of  pictures  had  to  be  made.  Many  a  flight 
started  and  ended  in  a  field  and  meadow.  Flares  on  an  open 
field  were  the  only  light  to  guide  the  starting  or  the  oncom- 
ing plane.  When  Wesley  Smith  took  off  from  the  grassy 
field  at  Van  Cortlandt  Park  in  New  York  City  on  the  night 
of  September  14,  1923,  to  carry  the  pictures  of  the  Demp- 
sey-Firpo  fight  at  the  Polo  Grounds  to  a  Cleveland  syndicate 
bureau,  flares  held  by  two  men  and  a  swinging  lantern  held 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  37 

by  a  third  was  the  only  light  available  to  give  Smith  his  di- 
rections for  a  most  thrilling  takeoff.  His  time  of  seven 
hours  in  landing  safely  at  a  Cleveland  field  through  a  lane 
of  flares  was  considered  a  marvelous  feat  in  those  days. 
Today  the  same  distance  is  traversed  in  about  two  hours  by 
one  of  our  high-speed  commercial  Goliaths  of  the  air. 

When  blizzards,  thick  fog  and  terrific  rainstorms  made 
it  absolutely  impossible  for  the  pilots  to  venture  into  the  air, 
the  syndicate  would  often  resort  to  the  chartered  train  to 
carry  the  pictures.  In  that  event,  an  entire  car  would  be 
set  up  with  darkroom,  printing  facilities,  and  tables  and 
typewriter  for  the  sorting  and  captioning  of  the  finished 
prints,  all  ready  for  instant  delivery  the  moment  the  train 
would  pull  in  at  the  station.  While  the  two  or  three  car 
train  swayed  and  lurched,  the  employees  would  calmly  go 
through  all  their  duties  of  turning  out  the  pictures  as  if 
they  were  back  in  their  own  offices.  In  one  trip  from  Wash- 
ington to  New  York  in  1925,  the  special  train  hired  by  a 
New  York  syndicate  to  develop  and  print  the  Coolidge  in- 
auguration pictures  made  the  226  mile  trip  in  three  hours, 
and  40^  minutes,  clipping  nearly  two  hours  from  the  ordi- 
nary running  time. 

On  another  occasion,  a  Boston  newspaper  frantically  de- 
manded the  pictures  of  the  Dempsey-Tunney  fight  in  Phila- 
delphia. The  weather  was  terrible.  Not  a  plane  could 
take  off.  The  enterprising  Boston  paper  wanted  the  pic- 
tures for  their  final  edition.  The  negatives  were  already  in 
New  York.  How  could  the  pictures  be  sent  to  Boston  in 
time  ?  Finally,  the  syndicate  in  New  York  arranged  the  hire 
of  a  special  train  from  New  York  to  Boston  at  a  cost  of 
$1,000.  The  two-car  train  plunged  through  the  storm  of 
the  night  with  a  clear  right  of  way,  and  the  pictures  were 
developed  and  printed  enroute.  The  train  broke  all  speed 
records  between  New  York  and  Boston,  thundering  along 
the  wet  rails  at  nearly  a  hundred-mile-an-hour  speed.  The 


38  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

Boston  morning  newspaper  got  their  pictures  and  made  their 
last  edition  for  a  clean  scoop  over  all  rivals. 

The  extension  of  the  air  mail  routes  to  all  parts  of  the 
country  and  the  inauguration  of  the  air  express  service  in 
1927  helped  speed  up  the  transportation  of  the  news  pic- 
tures, and  today,  thousands  of  pictures  are  being  sent  daily 
by  this  system.  Faster  commercial  planes  in  the  airmail 
services  are  continually  cutting  down  the  running  time,  and 
where  it  formally  took  30  hours  for  the  transportation  of 
a  picture  from  New  York  to  Los  Angeles  by  air,  the  same 
distance  is  covered  in  only  15  hours.  There  is  hardly  a  city 
of  any  size  in  the  country  that  is  not  linked  to  the  airmail 
network,  and  the  editor,  with  the  assistance  of  the  airmail 
guide,  is  able  to  reckon  closely  on  the  time  he  can  expect 
pictures  from  a  point  where  a  news  story  has  broken,  or  the 
time  a  member  newspaper  can  expect  to  receive  pictures 
which  have  been  syndicated. 

But  in  spite  of  the  efficient  service  rendered  by  the  air- 
mail and  airexpress,  the  syndicates  still  charter  the  plane 
on  extraordinary  occasions,  not  alone  to  make  the  invaluable 
airviews  and  transport  the  photographer  to  the  scene  of  the 
story,  but  also  to  bring  the  pictures  into  the  office  and  assist 
in  wire  transmission.  In  the  recent  New  London,  Texas, 
school-house  disaster,  in  which  455  children  and  teachers 
perished,  an  airplane  was  chartered  to  fly  from  Dallas  to 
Tyler,  fifteen  miles  from  the  scene  of  the  catastrophe,  pick 
up  prints  which  a  free  lance  photographer  had  made,  and 
continue  on  to  Memphis,  Tennessee,  to  meet  another  plane 
sent  from  St.  Louis  carrying  a  syndicate  bureau  manager 
with  a  portable  wired  photo  transmitter,  and  then  transmit 
the  pictures  direct  to  receiving  points  in  various  parts  of  the 
country. 

Bureau  managers  are  constantly  expediting  news  pictures 
to  various  other  points  by  air  express,  and  immediately 
after  shipping  in  such  manner,  they  wire  or  phone  the  office 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  39 

that  such  and  such  pictures  are  due  to  arrive  on  a  certain 
line  and  a  certain  time,  even  giving  the  waybill  number.  A 
motorcycle  boy  is  then  sent  to  the  airport  to  pick  up  the 
package.  Such  procedure  in  meeting  the  planes  often  results 
in  the  saving  of  at  least  a  half  hour  or  more  which  is  con- 
siderable, from  a  newspaper  editor's  standpoint. 

From  the  earliest  days  till  the  present,  the  plane  has 
been  a  reliable  carrier  of  the  news  picture,  and  the  picture 
syndicate  has  never  failed  to  rely  upon  it  in  time  of  need. 
A  notable  scoop  with  the  aid  of  a  plane  was  the  first  arrival 
of  the  pictures  showing  Gertrude  Ederle's  swim  across  the 
English  Channel  in  August,  1926.  A  package  of  pictures 
was  dropped  from  a  ship  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
River,  picked  up  by  a  waiting  seaplane,  and  then  brought  to 
New  York  in  a  record-breaking  four-plane  relay,  battling 
through  dense  fogs  and  terrific  electric  storms  to  give  the 
syndicate  a  24-hour  beat.  Through  the  continent's  worst 
flying  region,  a  New  York  syndicate  in  July,  1933,  sent  a 
plane  to  Cartwright,  Labrador,  1500  miles  away,  to  make 
the  pictures  of  the  first  landing  on  American  soil  of  the 
Italian  air  armada  of  24  planes  led  by  General  Italo  Balbo. 
It  set  a  new  record  in  aerial  trips  especially  to  make  pic- 
tures* In  1931,  a  chartered  plane  made  a  non-stop  flight 
from  Managua,  Nicaragua,  to  New  York,  carrying  the  first 
pictures  of  the  earthquake  disaster  which  killed  1000  per- 
sons, and  resulted  in  a  great  scoop  for  the  syndicate. 

From  the  day  a  ship  carried  a  London  Daily  Mirror 
photographer  to  the  scene  of  the  Messina,  Italy,  earth- 
quake in  1908,  to  make  the  first  pictures  of  the  catastrophe 
which  resulted  in  the  deaths  of  many  thousands,  the  steam- 
ship has  figured  in  the  thrilling  annals  of  picture  history. 
Over  the  vast  stretches  of  the  Atlantic  and  the  Pacific,  long 
before  the  dirigible  and  the  clipper  planes  spanned  the 
waters,  the  syndicates  have  depended  on  the  fast  greyhounds 


40  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

of  the  sea  to  bring  in  the  news  photographs  from  the  other 
continents. 

In  spite  of  the  occasional  outstanding  news  picture  sent 
by  radio  from  Europe  to  America,  the  large  liners  are  con- 
stantly bringing  in  the  bulky  packages  filled  with  the  best 
of  Europe's  news  and  feature  offerings.  The  pursers  are  en- 
trusted with  the  packages,  and  after  a  survey  by  the  customs 
men  at  Quarantine  for  payment  of  duty,  the  pictures  are 
turned  over  to  the  syndicate's  cameraman  who  has  boarded 
the  ship  from  the  government  cutter. 

Even  this  time  saving  method  has  not  been  found  to  be 
fast  enough  on  many  occasions.  A  terrible  disaster  will 
have  occurred  in  a  European  country,  costing  hundreds  of 
lives.  A  syndicate  here  will  wish  to  achieve  a  scoop  over  its 
rivals.  A  radio  message  will  be  sent  to  the  London  manager 
of  the  syndicate  that  the  pictures  will  be  picked  up  by  sea- 
plane off  the  American  coast.  A  cooper  aboard  the  ship 
will  make  a  fairly  large  sized  barrel,  place  the  pictures  in- 
side, and  then  solder  the  sides  to  make  it  waterproof.  About 
one  hundred  miles  off  the  coast,  as  a  seaplane  looms  in  the 
distance,  the  barrel  is  thrown  overboard.  The  plane  care- 
fully descends  on  the  swells,  lashes  the  barrel  to  the  pon- 
toons, and  pulls  it  in.  The  top  is  forcibly  taken  off  and  the 
pictures  removed.  After  some  difficulty,  the  plane  arises 
and  is  off  for  the  airport  nearest  the  office.  Another  device 
is  also  used.  The  syndicate  will  arrange  for  the  purchase  of 
a  life  preserver,  attach  a  sealed  can  with  the  pictures  en- 
closed, and  throw  it  into  the  water  for  the  pickup  by  the 
plane. 

The  dirigible  Hindenburg  was  called  into  service  by  a 
syndicate  to  bring  in  the  first  pictures  of  the  1936  Olympics. 
A  radio  message  was  sent  to  the  skipper  to  arrange  for  the 
attachment  of  the  pictures  to  a  parachute  to  be  thrown  over- 
board on  its  appearance  over  Lakehurst,  New  Jersey.  The 
syndicate  arranged  for  the  presence  of  a  customs  man  to 


m* 

•an 


**&••': 


R 


©    International    Xewspictures 

CHARGING  AT  THE  PHOTOGRAPHER 

Death  was  the  price  paid  for  this  picture  at  Morgan  Hill,  California.  Dr. 
Garruccio,  attracted  by  the  picturesque  burro  outfit  and  its  aged  prospector 
owner,  snapped  this  photograph.  Peter  Voiss,  the  aged  prospector,  is  shown 
leaping  with  rage  as  he  runs  toward  the  cameraman.  A  few  second  after 
snapping  this  picture,  Dr.  Garruccio  was  fatally  wounded  by  a  charge  of 
buckshot.  Authorities  developed  the  film  and  took  Voiss  into  custody. 


©  Acme  Newsplctures 
A    BREATHLESS    MOMENT 

Immediately  after  this  remarkable  picture  was  taken,  the  East  Indian  leopard 
sprang  upon  his  trainer,  Albert  Allcorn.  But  Olga  Celeste,  another  animal 
trainer,  grabbed  a  club  and  drove  off  the  animal,  saving  Allcorn  from  serious 

injury. 


©  Acme  Newspictures 
HEADING    FOR    THE    CAMERA 

A  remarkable  photograph  of  horses  tearing  down  the  home  stretch  on  a 
Long  Island  race  track,  taken  by  Charles  Brinkman,  a  Pacific  and  Atlantic 
Photos  staff  cameraman.  He  crawled  under  the  rail  and  flung  himself  on 
the  ground  to  point  his  camera  toward  the  charging  horses,  escaping  only 
by  a  few  scant  inches  from  being  struck  by  the  flying  hoofs. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  41 

check  the  contents  for  duty  payment.  At  daybreak  the  giant 
airship  swung  over  the  Lakehurst  hangar;  the  package  was 
dropped  and  picked  up.  For  six  hours  the  dirigible  was  un- 
able to  land  because  of  unfavorable  winds,  and  the  syndi- 
cate was  able  to  beat  its  rivals  all  over  the  country. 

The  motorcycle  is  a  favorite  means  of  fast  conveyance 
in  and  around  the  city.  Every  large  syndicate  has  two  or 
three  motorcycle  drivers,  and  on  big  stories,  such  as  cham- 
pionship fights  where  plans  are  carefully  made  in  advance, 
as  many  as  five  or  six  extra  motorcycle  men  will  be  hired. 
Through  the  dense  street  traffic  the  motorcyclist  will  flash 
in  and  out  bringing  in  the  first  undeveloped  plates  from  the 
fight  or  the  world's  series  games,  making  as  many  as  a  half 
dozen  trips  to  and  from  the  stadium.  It  is  a  common  sight 
to  see  as  many  as  a  dozen  motorcycles  bunched  outside  a 
fight  arena,  with  riders  at  the  handlebars,  all  ready  to  dash 
off  the  minute  a  boy  brings  out  the  precious  bundle  of  plates. 
Others  will  bring  prints  later  to  the  local  newspapers,  and 
still  others  will  streak  to  Newark  Airport,  14  miles  away, 
to  place  the  bundles  of  prints  aboard  the  waiting  planes. 
One  night,  a  motorcyclist,  with  a  clear  right  of  way,  made 
the  distance  in  14%  minutes,  just  in  time  to  make  the  plane. 
He  had  never  thought  he  could  make  it,  but  like  the  rest  of 
the  men  in  the  picture  game  who  always  try  for  success 
though  the  odds  are  against  them,  decided  to  make  the  at- 
tempt— and  he  succeeded.  Many  of  these  brave  fellows  have 
skidded  their  machines  along  wet,  slippery  streets  and  high- 
ways, always  flirting  with  injury  or  death,  to  carry  out  their 
jobs.  There  is  scarcely  a  picture  syndicate  motorcyclist  who 
cannot  show  you  marks  and  bruises  on  his  body,  the  results 
of  accidents. 

One  night,  a  rider  employed  by  a  picture  syndicate  was 
bringing  back  some  undeveloped  negatives  from  the  Long 
Island  City  Bowl  where  a  championship  fight  was  taking 
place.  Crossing  the  Queensboro  Bridge  at  great  speed,  he 


42  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

hit  a  car  full  on,  and  was  catapulted  from  his  machine,  land- 
ing on  his  head.  Barely  conscious,  he  mumbled  to  the  first 
passerby  who  rushed  to  his  aid:  "Quick,  get  a  taxi,  and  give 
the  driver  my  plates  strapped  there  to  the  machine.  He 
will  be  paid  at  the  office."  He  slumped  into  unconsciousness. 
Another  valiant  soldier  of  the  picture  army! 

In  the  frozen  stretches  of  the  Far  North  dog  teams  are 
often  used  as  the  fast  conveyance  to  bring  the  pictures  of  a 
Amundsen-Ellsworth  polar  flight  or  Byrd  expedition  to  a 
waiting  ship  or  plane.  Motor  boats  chugging  in  and  out  of 
the  Ohio  Valley  flood  waters  in  the  winter  of  1937,  were  a 
frequent  sight,  bringing  cameramen  in  and  out  of  the  other- 
wise inaccessible  places. 

In  Japan,  the  carrier  pigeons  have  been  used  for  many 
years  to  bring  in  the  first  news  pictures  from  the  rugged 
interiors,  and  well-equipped  pigeon  lofts,  some  housing  as 
many  as  500  birds,  are  to  be  seen  on  the  roofs  of  such  pub- 
lications as  the  Asahi,  the  Nichi  Nichi  and  Yomiuri  in 
Tokyo  and  the  Asahi  in  Osaka.  They  are  grey-green  birds 
typical  of  those  owned  by  carrier  fanciers  in  the  United 
States,  and  are  capable  of  making  50  to  150  mile  flights, 
sometimes  beating  an  airplane  to  the  office.  It  is  a  common 
sight  to  see  a  cameraman  go  out  on  an  assignment  in  the 
interior  carrying  a  basket  with  a  dozen  or  more  birds,  each 
carrier  wearing  an  aluminum  leg  ring  bearing  its  number 
and  name  of  the  newspaper. 

After  taking  his  picture,  the  cameraman  dons  a  black 
jacket,  and  under  this  flowing  robe  removes  the  exposed 
film  from  his  holder  and  loads  it  into  a  black  rubber  cylinder, 
about  four  inches  long  and  weighing  less  than  an  ounce.  A 
tiny  cap  is  then  screwed  tightly  on,  and  the  cylinder  is  then 
wrapped  around  the  bird's  neck  by  means  of  a  rubber  band, 
while  another  rubber  band  encircles  the  tail  to  keep  it  firmly 
in  place.  The  bird  then  takes  off,  never  stopping  until  it 
alights  on  a  desk  in  the  editor's  office.  From  a  distance  of 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  43 

50  miles,  the  pigeon  arrives  at  the  office  within  40  minutes. 
Another  bird  is  then  sent  with  a  duplicate  film  as  protection 
in  case  an  accident  overtakes  the  first  carrier.  These  birds 
are  also  often  used  in  carrying  films  from  ships  at  sea. 

The  greatest  boon  to  the  ever-widening  use  of  the  news 
photograph  has  been  the  introduction  of  the  radioed  and 
wired  picture.  Picture  "messages"  are  being  constantly 
flashed  in  most  parts  of  the  world.  Hours,  days,  even 
weeks,  have  been  cut  down  to  minutes  and  hours,  and  the 
publishers,  alive  to  the  readers'  ever-growing  demand  for 
the  immediate  news  picture,  have  subscribed  to  one  service 
or  the  other  which  has  its  own  wire  transmitting  device. 

In  the  early  experimental  days,  the  radio  and  wire  pic- 
tures were  crude.  Details  were  hardly  recognizable.  Some 
looked  like  wash  drawings  after  the  art  department's  re- 
toucher had  finished  salvaging  what  otherwise  would  have 
been  impossible  to  print.  But  the  spirit  of  enterprise  en- 
couraged the  inventors;  some  processes  were  tried  out  for  a 
while  and  then  discarded,  others  were  constantly  improved 
upon,  until  today  there  is  hardly  a  photograph  that  has  been 
wired  that  does  riot  compare  favorably  with  the  original. 
Even  in  the  more  difficult  field,  the  radio,  the  photographs 
transmitted  from  London  and  Buenos  Aires  to  New  York 
and  back,  have  taken  on  the  more  solid  look  of  an  original 
print,  and  some  radioed  pictures,  with  but  an  added  touch 
of  the  retoucher's  brush  can  scarcely  be  told  from  originals. 

The  first  pictures  of  the  Japanese  earthquake  in  Septem- 
ber, 1923,  had  been  thrown  from  a  Pacific  liner  near  Seattle 
to  a  waiting  plane.  An  unusual  experiment  had  been  plan- 
ned to  scoop  the  country  at  three  vital  points :  Los  Angeles, 
Chicago  and  New  York.  A  transparent  sheet  with  tiny 
numbered  squares  was  placed  over  the  picture  at  the  sending 
end.  Sheets  of  tiny  numbered  squares  were  at  the  receiving 
ends.  The  positions  and  lines  of  the  photograph  were  tele- 
graphed, as  well  as  the  additional  data  of  light  and  shade  to 


44  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

help  the  artist  fill  in  the  picture  at  the  receiving  end.  It  was 
a  long  and  costly  experiment,  but  the  result  bore  some 
resemblance  to  the  original. 

The  following  year  the  American  Telephone  and  Tele- 
graph Company  inaugurated  a  test  of  its  own  facsimile 
transmitting  machine  at  the  Republican  Convention  in  Cleve- 
land, and  the  result  was  a  startling  one,  although  it  showed 
vertical  lines  of  varying  thickness.  Three  years  earlier,  the 
New  York  World,  also  using  a  facsimile  transmission  over 
a  telephonic  circuit,  had  successfully  transmitted  the  picture 
of  an  Indian  head  from  its  New  York  office  to  the  St.  Louis 
Post  Dispatch,  but  for  some  reason  or  other,  the  experi- 
ments were  later  dropped. 

The  race  in  wired  pictures  was  on. 

In  New  York  two  inventors,  Marvin  Ferree  and  Joseph 
Wissmar,  working  for  a  picture  syndicate,  invented  a  pro- 
cess called  Telepix,  and  on  New  Year's  Day,  1925,  success- 
fully sent  a  picture  of  the  Notre  Dame-Leland  Stanford 
University  football  game  from  Los  Angeles  to  New  York 
and  Chicago  simultaneously  over  the  Western  Union  wires. 

All  the  details  of  the  picture  were  sent  over  the  telegraph 
wires  in  telegraphic  dots  and  dashes  of  various  sizes,  repre- 
senting all  the  various  tones  and  shadows  of  the  picture. 
The  picture  was  printed  photographically  on  a  metal  plate 
and  then  placed  on  the  cylinder  of  the  machine.  As  the 
drum  revolved,  deriving  its  power  from  a  small  electric 
motor,  a  needle  traced  over  its  surface  recording  all  the 
details  of  the  picture,  sending  its  impulses  over  a  telegraphic 
relay  to  a  machine  at  the  receiving  end.  It  was  all  done 
in  daylight.  When  the  picture  was  finished,  it  was  ready 
for  reproduction.  Received  on  a  plain  piece  of  paper,  it 
could  be  photographed  by  a  regular  copying  camera  to  be 
enlarged  or  reduced.  By  simply  throwing  a  small  switch, 
the  same  machine  could  either  transmit  or  receive. 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  45 

Though  Telepix  was  syndicated  to  quite  a  number  of 
cities,  the  A.  T.  and  T.  continued  on  with  their  facsimile 
transmission  experiments,  using  a  photoelectric  cell  to  trans- 
late light  and  shadows  of  the  picture  into  sound  impulses 
over  the  telephone  wires  and  then  reconverted  into  light 
beams.  In  a  test  on  March  4,  1925,  pictures  were  trans- 
mitted from  Washington  to  New  York  and  San  Francisco. 
The  test  was  a  decided  improvement  over  its  Republican 
Convention  experiment  the  year  previous,  since  the  effect 
of  the  vertical  striping  was  eliminated. 

The  powerful  A.  T.  and  T.  added  cities  to  its  list,  open- 
ing its  commercial  service  to  the  public  on  April  4,  1925. 
It  charged  $50  for  a  5  x  7  transmission  from  New  York 
to  Chicago,  $100  from  New  York  to  San  Francisco.  Boston 
was  added  in  November  of  the  same  year,  and  later  Cleve- 
land and  Atlanta.  Telepix  grew  for  a  while,  then  languish- 
ed. Facsimile  was  winning  out  over  the  dot  and  dash 
system. 

For  eight  years  the  Telephoto,  as  the  A.  T.  and  T. 
system  was  called,  remained  in  existence,  and  the  picture 
syndicates  made  ample  use  of  it.  But  after  sinking  $2,000,- 
ooo  into  the  venture,  they  decided  to  sell  it,  and  the  Associ- 
ated Press  grabbed  it  in  1934.  The  AP  inaugurated  their 
service  on  New  Year's  Day,  1935,  calling  it  Wirephoto. 
But  the  other  major  picture  syndicates  were  alive  to  the 
virtues  of  picture  transmission  by  wire,  and  so  the  New 
York  Times  Wide  World  Photos,  International  News 
Photos  and  Acme  Newspictures  inaugurated  their  own  wire 
picture  services,  the  Wide  World  its  Wired  Photos,  the 
International  its  Sound  Photos,  and  Acme  its  Telephotos. 

The  principles  underlying  each  system  of  transmitting 
pictures  by  wire  remain  practically  identical.  The  surface 
of  the  picture  on  a  revolving  drum  is  scanned  methodically 
by  a  beam  of  light  reflected  into  a  photoelectric  cell  which 
in  turn  produces  a  current  on  the  wire  directly  proportional 


46  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

to  the  light  reflected  from  the  varying  highlights  and  shad- 
ows on  the  picture.  The  current  is  amplified  and  then  sent 
over  the  wire  in  the  form  of  electric  impulses  to  a  receiving 
machine  in  a  distant  city.  A  light  valve  on  the  receiver 
transforms  the  electric  impulses  back  into  light  of  corre- 
sponding intensity,  and  the  process  of  scanning  on  an  un- 
exposed  film  wrapped  around  a  revolving  drum  is  repeated. 
The  time  for  transmitting  a  picture  ranges  from  eight  to 
fifteen  minutes. 

One  of  the  greatest  features  of  the  phototelegraphic 
equipment  now  in  use  is  the  portability  of  some  of  the 
machines.  One  of  the  portable  transmitters,  including  the 
case  in  which  it  is  carried,  weighs  as  little  as  sixty  pounds, 
and  a  photographer  or  operator  can  carry  it  with  the  ease 
of  a  suitcase,  dashing  to  the  scene  of  a  story  by  plane,  train 
or  auto,  ready  to  transmit  direct  from  the  scene  of  action. 
His  equipment  will  also  include  a  portable  developing  outfit, 
so  that  he  can  shoot  his  pictures,  develop,  fix  and  make  a 
print  on  the  spot,  then  go  to  the  nearest  telephone,  make  his 
proper  connections,  and  then  get  the  long  distance  operator 
to  place  the  call  to  a  receiving  point  hundreds  of  miles  dis- 
tant, the  same  he  would  do  were  he  to  make  an  ordinary 
long  distance  call. 

For  instance,  a  flash  comes  into  the  syndicate  office  that 
a  plane  has  crashed  seventy  miles  from  New  York,  a  few 
miles  from  an  airport.  The  photographer  with  his  equip- 
ment will  dash  into  a  chartered  plane  and  take  off  for  the 
scene.  He  will  snap  his  picture,  develop,  fix  and  print  from 
his  negative  on  the  spot,  go  to  the  airport,  wrap  his  picture 
around  the  transmitter  drum,  make  his  connections  on  the 
airport  telephone  and  then  place  his  call,  say,  to  a  paper  in 
Detroit.  While  his  call  is  going  through,  he  will  make  the 
necessary  dial  adjustments,  setting  his  proper  range  for  the 
shadows  and  highlights  of  the  picture.  The  phone  rings, 
the  Detroit  receiving  operator  is  ready,  and  the  picture  is 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  47 

then  started.  Within  a  half  hour  after  he  has  had  started 
the  picture,  a  finished  print  is  already  in  the  hands  of  the 
art  department  for  scaling  and  retouching  as  any  other  pic- 
ture, and  within  a  half  hour  after  that  be  in  the  newspaper 
on  the  street,  in  the  hands  of  the  reader. 

The  remarkable  feature  of  this  marvel  of  the  news 
photographic  field  is  this,  that  the  newspaper  can  go  to  press 
with  the  news  picture  at  about  the  same  time  the  story  is 
being  printed.  With  the  development  and  perfection  of 
phototelegraphic  equipment,  the  news  picture  has  set  a  new 
high  standard  of  reader  interest,  and  its  position  on  the 
newspaper  page  is  as  immediate  and  important  as  the  story 
itself.  How  remarkable  it  was  for  New  York  readers, 
several  thousand  miles  from  the  scene,  to  see  the  picture  of 
the  crushed  New  London,  Texas,  schoolhouse  accompany 
the  story  the  very  same  night  of  the  disaster — to  view  at 
one  glance  the  terrible  details  of  fallen  walls  and  strewn 
masonry  as  only  a  vivid  picture  can  portray,  and  more 
graphically  than  the  hundreds  of  words  could  express.  Wire 
transmission  of  pictures  is  truly  making  newspaper  history ! 

December,  1924,  was  another  important  date  in  the 
history  of  news  photography.  The  Radio  Corporation  ot 
America  opened  its  New  York  offices  to  the  public  for  a 
demonstration  of  a  small  machine  which  was  able  to  receive 
a  picture  "hurled"  through  the  ether,  across  the  Atlantic 
from  its  offices  in  Marconi  House  in  London.  In  less  than 
two  years,  Captain  R.  H.  Ranger,  an  R.  C.  A.  engineer,  had 
developed  the  remarkable  piece  of  apparatus. 

Like  the  machine  which  transmits  photographs  by  wire, 
the  photoelectric  cell  is  also  employed  in  the  radio  device 
to  scan  the  photograph  as  it  rotates  on  a  drum  or  cylinder. 
The  cell  transforms  the  light  waves  into  electrical  impulses 
which  are  transmitted  by  radio  in  the  same  way  dots  and 
dashes  are  sent  through  the  ether.  The  radio  impulses  are 
caught  by  a  receiving  instrument  thousands  of  miles  away, 


48  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

and  the  picture  is  made  up  of  a  series  of  tiny  dots.  Where 
the  picture  is  light  the  dots  are  very  thin  and  far  apart, 
where  there  are  shadows  the  dots  are  darker  and  closer  to- 
gether. Like  the  wire  transmission,  the  picture  is  received 
in  a  dark  room,  on  an  unexposed  8  x  10  film  wrapped 
around  a  drum.  The  only  difference  between  the  two 
systems  is  that  the  radioed  picture  is  a  varying  of  dots  in- 
stead of  lines. 

The  first  spot  news  picture  to  be  ordered  and  received 
by  a  syndicate  in  this  country  was  transmitted  from  London 
to  New  York  on  March  5,  1925,  and  showed  the  body  of 
President  Ebert  of  Germany  lying  in  state.  It  took  only 
25  minutes  for  the  actual  transmission  of  the  picture.  Five 
days  later  the  original  of  the  same  photograph  reached 
New  York  on  the  Aquitania. 

Phototelegraphic  equipment  is  now  installed  in  the  prin- 
cipal cities  of  Europe,  so  that  it  is  now  possible  for  any 
news  story  to  break  anywhere  on  the  Continent,  and  within 
several  hours  reach  a  reader  on  the  West  Coast  of  the 
United  States. 

It  is  possible,  at  times,  on  the  complete  coverage  of  a 
big  story  to  call  into  action  all  the  facilities  known  to  man 
for  the  speedy  delivery  of  the  news  picture.  Dog  team 
can  speed  pictures  from  the  northernmost  settlement  in 
Alaska,  the  prints  placed  on  a  train  to  a  port  city,  taken 
aboard  a  ship  to  a  point  near  Seattle,  picked  up  by  a  sea- 
plane, taken  to  Seattle  for  a  wire  transmission  to  New  York, 
radioed  to  London,  and  then  retransmitted  to  a  newspaper 
in  Vienna. 

The  scientist,  the  engineer,  the  editor,  the  cameraman, 
are  today  linked  in  a  united,  and  ever  tireless,  effort  to 
speed  the  news  photograph  to  the  reader,  so  that  when  he 
scans  the  picture  as  he  reads  the  accompanying  story  over 
his  breakfast  table,  he  can  truthfully  exclaim :  "This  picture 
age  is  marvelous!" 


Chapter  IF. 
THE  EDITOR  SCANS  THE  PICTURE 

Two  important  functions  rest  with  the  picture  editor  of  a 
syndicate;  the  assigning  of  a  photographer  to  get  the 
picture  and  the  selection  and  servicing  of  the  picture 
to  the  member  newspapers.  On  a  newspaper,  the  city 
editor  will  generally  assign  the  photographer  whose  prints 
will  be  turned  over  to  the  picture  editor  for  selection  and 
rnake-up.  In  both  cases,  he  is  the  liaison  officer  between  the 
man  with  the  camera  and  the  reader  who  scans  the  printed 
subject  with  either  amusement  or  thrill. 

Let  us  begin  with  the  day's  duties  of  a  syndicate  picture 
editor. 

The  editor  on  the  early  morning  shift,  called  the  lobster 
trick,  between  midnight  and  eight  a.m.,  calls  the  attention 
of  the  day  picture  editor  to  several  good  news  stories  that 
have  broken  in  the  early  morning  hours:  a  hotel  fire  at 
Lakewood,  N.  J.,  in  which  three  guests  perished,  and  the 
arrest  of  a  New  York  bank  embezzler  at  Providence,  R.  I. 
Correspondent-photographers  have  been  phoned  to  cover 
the  stories  and  word  should  be  expected  momentarily  that 
the  undeveloped  plates  are  being  rushed  back  by  train 
porter  from  Providence,  and  by  bus  driver  from  Lakewood. 

The  day  editor  then  looks  over  the  day  assignment 
sheet:  three  overnight  assignments  have  been  handed  out 
to  staff  photographers,  the  arrival  of  the  liner  Queen  Mary 
with  an  interesting  list  of  notables  and  also  a  MUST 
on  a  John  R.  Massey  and  his  bride,  both  of  Pittsburgh, 
which  the  Pittsburgh  member  has  wired  for  coverage;  the 
testing  of  a  new  type  of  airplane  at  Roosevelt  Field,  Long 


50  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

Island,  (a  clipping  announcing  the  test  of  the  new  plane 
had  been  attached  to  the  dated  page  several  weeks  in  ad- 
vance), and  the  continuation  of  the  Ross  murder  trial  at 
the  courthouse  in  Long  Island  City,  (Mrs.  Ross  had  shot 
and  killed  her  husband  in  their  spacious  Jamaica  home). 
The  latter  story  was  exciting  national  interest.  There 
was  plenty  of  thrill  and  drama  at  the  trial  including  sensa- 
tional disclosures  involving  several  well-known  Long  Island 
personalities,  and  only  the  day  previous,  the  accused  wo- 
man's mother  had  been  carried  out  of  the  courthouse  in  a 
shrieking  denunciation  of  the  prosecuting  attorney. 

It  promised  a  good  start  for  the  day's  presentation  of 
the  news  in  pictures. 

A  boy  brings  in  a  huge  stack  of  miscellaneous  mail, 
envelopes  with  news  and  feature  pictures  from  every  parr 
of  the  country.  Here  is  a  spectacular  shot  of  a  grain  ele- 
vator fire  in  Milwaukee,  (the  correspondent  had  attached 
a  note  that  he  had  duplicated  the  same  picture  to  the 
Chicago  office),  also  six  pictures  of  a  golf  match  at  Pine- 
hurst,  N.  C.,  another  showing  a  mother  and  father  with 
their  eighteen  children  ranging  in  age  from  six  months 
to  twenty-two  years,  another  showing  a  wrecked  automobile 
lying  astride  a  railroad  crossing  at  Wilmington,  Delaware, 
a  head  and  shoulder  shot  of  a  young  man  who  claims  to  be 
the  youngest  lawyer  in  Kansas,  a  picture  of  a  champion 
girl  archer,  another  interesting  shot  of  a  mother  bear  and 
its  cub  in  the  St.  Louis  Zoo,  a  negative  sent  in  by  a  Hunt- 
ington  Beach,  California,  contributor  showing  six  bathing 
beauties  frolicking  on  the  sands.  Another  correspondent 
has  forwarded  an  exclusive  shot  showing  a  pretty  Spring 
meadow  scene  with  snow-capped  Mount  Rainier  in  the 
background. 

The  editor  scans  these  with  the  keen,  discriminating 
eye  of  the  expert.  He  knows  at  first  glance  which  he  will 
accept  and  which  he  will  reject. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  51 

The  free  lance  and  correspondent-photographer  is  an 
important  contributor  to  the  syndicate,  and  usually  hail 
from  the  smaller  cities  and  outlying  sections  where  there 
are  no  staff  cameramen. 

The  editor  knows  that  the  Milwaukee  fire  shot  had 
been  serviced  by  the  Chicago  bureau.  An  early  morning 
wire  had  apprised  the  New  York  office  of  the  fact.  He 
will  thus  service  only  to  New  York  City  members  and  his 
own  regional  list,  to  the  salesmen  and  one  each  for  the 
London,  Paris  and  Germany  offices.  Spectacular  American 
fire  scenes  always  find  a  market  abroad. 

He  carefully  goes  through  the  golf  pictures.  It  is  a 
North-South  match  and  shows  the  winner  and  runner-up 
receiving  their  trophies,  also  an  interesting  shot  of  the 
winner  on  the  i8th  green.  These  are  the  two  worth  ser- 
vicing throughout  the  East.  The  rest  he  places  on  his 
secretary's  desk  with  a  note  attached  that  two  have  been 
purchased,  and  the  remainder  to  be  returned. 

Then  he  turns  his  attention  to  the  parents  with  their 
long  list  of  offspring.  Always  a  human  interest  feature! 
Such  large  families  are  an  anomaly,  (the  reader's  interest 
will  center  on  the  farmer,  a  poor  Louisiana  farmer,  and  his 
wife) .  How  they  flabbergast  us  with  their  defi  of  economic 
facts!  It's  an  immediate  purchase. 

The  wrecked  automobile  is  a  rejection.  One  killed, 
several  hurt.  But  automobile  accidents  are  so  common- 
place, and  Wilmington  is  so  far  away  from  the  editors  at 
Boston,  Buffalo  and  other  cities.  The  immediate  news  in- 
terest will  have  vanished  by  the  time  it  reaches  those 
papers.  The  Boston  and  Buffalo  picture  editors  will  have 
their  own  local  accidents  to  reproduce. 

The  youngest  lawyer  has  a  beguiling  smile,  a  nice  set  of 
teeth  and  broad  pair  of  shoulders.  But  the  editor  rejects 
it  without  a  twitch  of  conscience.  Poor  fellow,  he's  going 
back  to  Kansas.  There's  no  feature  value  in  a  legal  Adonis 


52  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

even  if  he  is  the  youngest.  The  correspondent  had  better 
wait  for  an  attractive  Portia.  The  readers  and  the  editors 
always  like  the  good-looking  girl  as  a  page  adornment. 
Somehow  it  smooths  the  blunt  edges  of  columns  of  murder 
and  fire  stories. 

The  champion  girl  archer  is  a  profile  shot,  the  print  quite 
flat.  The  original  negative  must  have  been  underexposed. 
There's  a  possibility  it  may  have  been  accepted  had  it  all 
the  perfect  tone  qualities  of  a  good  photograph.  Too  poor 
for  reproduction.  Into  the  rejection  file  it  goes. 

The  mother  bear  and  cub  is  an  immediate  acceptance. 
An  interesting  animal  picture  with  perfect  tone  quality  is  a 
sure-fire  sale.  Animals,  children  and  pretty  girls  head  the 
list  for  feature  picture  interest.  The  bathing  beauties  on 
the  beach  find  a  purchaser  for  the  same  reason. 

The  landscape  is  bought  as  a  special  rotogravure  picture 
to  be  one  of  ten  to  twelve  exclusive  pictures  to  be  serviced 
that  week  as  a  roto  page  layout  bearing  an  advance  re- 
lease date.  Generally  editors  of  rotogravure  supplements 
need  from  a  week  to  ten  days  to  prepare  their  Sunday  layout. 

The  morning  papers  are  carefully  searched  for  any 
picture  possibilities  and  the  stories  are  clipped  for  reference 
as  a  guide  for  the  editor,  the  photographer  and  the  caption 
writer.  On  page  three  he  finds  a  story  of  a  penthouse 
dweller  atop  a  midtown  skyscraper  who  is  raising  cabbages 
as  big  as  bowling  balls.  Good  I  A  photographer  is  imme- 
diately sent  to  the  address.  The  sports  page  contributes 
two  items  for  coverage :  Paddy  White,  the  aspirant  for  the 
lightweight  crown,  is  training  at  Stillwell's  gymnasium,  and 
the  Columbia  crew  is  going  out  for  a  practice  spin  on  the 
Hudson  at  five  o'clock.  Two  more  jobs  for  the  camera- 
men. A  three-year-old  musical  prodigy  has  been  discovered 
on  the  East  Side  and  another  photographer  heads  for  the 
nearest  subway. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  wires  are  clicking  off  the  news 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  53 

from  far  and  wide.  Violence  is  growing  in  the  Pawtucket, 
Rhode  Island,  textile  strike;  a  beautiful  1 8-year-old  girl 
has  been  found  slain  at  Wheeling,  West  Virginia;  a  well- 
known  movie  actress  has  been  threatened  with  blackmail; 
forest  fires  are  raging  throughout  Washington  and  Oregon; 
another  duststorm  sweeps  the  Texas  Panhandle;  a  con- 
ference of  Governors  on  the  relief  problem  is  taking  place 
at  the  various  points  to  expedite  good  material  to  the  near- 
est bureaus;  the  Washington  manager  is  reminded  to  rush 
prints  of  the  conference  to  the  members  in  those  states 
whose  Governors  are  represented;  the  Boston  manager  is 
told  to  send  a  staff  cameraman  to  Pawtucket  by  the  first 
train  and  duplicate  his  negatives  to  Boston  and  New  York. 

The  cables  report  an  attempted  assassination  of  the 
Japanese  Premier  and  a  British  warship  is  on  its  way  to 
the  Mediterranean  in  another  international  crisis.  Good 
page  one  stories !  Pictures  of  the  Premier  and  the  warship 
are  taken  from  the  files  and  serviced. 

On  stories  of  first  magnitude,  the  quality  of  the  print 
for  copying  and  servicing  need  be  only  fair  as  faded  lines 
and  spots  will  be  strengthened  and  the  dark  spaces  lightened 
and  grayed  by  the  expert  hands  of  the  retoucher  before  it 
is  handed  over  to  the  engraver. 

If  there  is  no  picture  of  the  warship  in  the  files,  the 
editor  will  search  Jane's  Fighting  Ships,  a  yearbook  filled 
with  reproductions  of  warships  of  every  nation.  The  pic- 
ture of  the  Japanese  Premier  will  undoubtedly  be  in  the 
files  as  special  attention  is  always  paid  to  building  up  the 
files  with  the  leading  officials  of  every  nation.  It  is  very 
rare  indeed  when  a  syndicate  does  not  have  a  good  recent 
study  of  the  President,  Premier  or  ruler  of  the  leading 
nations.  Pictures  of  prominent  men  and  women  in  all  sta- 
tions of  life  from  the  world  over  are  sought  for  continu- 
ously as  good  file  material  to  have  available  when  a  story 
breaks.  Newspapers,  as  well,  are  paying  more  and  more 


54  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

attention  to  their  picture  files,  and  personalities,  especially 
those  in  the  limelight,  are  never  discarded.  There  is  al- 
ways the  obituary  page  to  illustrate  on  the  announcement 
of  death. 

At  the  moment  the  picture  of  the  warship  is  being  copied 
for  servicing,  the  negatives  of  the  hotel  fire  arrive.  They 
are  immediately  turned  over  to  a  printer  for  developing. 
The  editor  selects  the  best  one  or  two  shots  for  servicing 
while  they  are  still  washing.  The  first  selection  shows  a 
well  exposed  general  view  of  the  fire  at  its  height,  another 
shows  one  of  the  injured  being  treated  on  the  spot.  Among 
the  discarded  ones  is  a  picture  of  one  of  the  victims,  badly 
burned,  being  carried  out.  It's  too  gruesome.  Pictures  of 
dead  persons  with  very  few  exceptions  are  taboo  with  most 
newspaper  publishers.  It  is  the  exception  and  not  the  rule 
when  pictures  such  as  those  of  Dillinger  and  Dutch  Schultz, 
America's  public  enemies,  in  death  are  exposed  to  the 
reader.  It  is  a  standing  rule  with  many  prominent  news- 
papers that  no  pictures  of  any  dead  person,  no  matter  what 
the  story  or  circumstance  may  be  can  be  published. 

Within  fifteen  minutes  after  the  arrival  of  the  negatives 
in  the  office,  prints  of  the  fire  are  on  their  way  to  the  local 
evening  newspapers,  and  by  train  porter  to  the  New  Eng- 
land, New  York  State,  New  Jersey  and  Pennsylvania  mem- 
bers to  meet  afternoon  or  early  evening  editions. 

The  servicing  of  every  picture  requires  good  judgment 
of  news  and  feature  values;  the  news  sense  of  the  editor 
must  encompass  the  required  needs  of  the  subscribers  from 
coast  to  coast,  as  well  as  those  in  foreign  countries.  The 
interest  may  contract  beyond  a  certain  unmarked  boundary; 
there  may  still  be  an  interest  alive  in  Chicago  while  beyond 
that  the  editor  may  pay  scant,  or  even  no  interest,  in  the 
story  such  as  the  New  Jersey  fire.  There  are  all  kinds  of 
imponderables  in  stories  and  pictures  marked  as  news. 
Where  the  wire  can  tick  off  a  few  descriptive  phrases  with- 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  55 

out  much  loss  of  time  and  money,  the  picture  syndicates  can 
hardly  afford  to  service  non-interested  subscribers  with  costly 
prints. 

The  syndicate  picture  editor  must  therefore  weigh  his 
servicing  carefully  before  he  turns  his  order  over  to  the 
printer.  Is  it  a  small  or  large  hotel?  Are  there  prominent 
names  involved?  Will  the  death  toll  increase?  Reader 
and  editor  interest  grows  proportionately  to  the  damage 
and  toll  of  life.  A  three-stick  story  on  page  four  will  be 
swung  to  a  full  column  on  page  one  when  the  death  toll  in 
a  hotel  disaster  will  rise  from  two  or  three  to  ten  or  more. 
The  picture  editor  will  scan  the  latest  news  developments 
carefully  before  he  puts  his  final  OK  on  the  order  sheet. 

Again  he  must  study  his  picture  solely  on  the  merits  of 
reader  attention.  Even  if  there  were  no  loss  of  lives,  the 
picture  may  be  an  unusual  one,  such  as  the  Milwaukee  grain 
elevator  fire  shot  received  earlier.  If  it  only  shows  a  few 
wreaths  of  smoke,  he  will  most  certainly  limit  its  service. 
If  there  are  flames  shooting  through  the  windows  with 
plenty  of  smoke  showing  the  picture  effect  will  be  enhanced, 
and  the  service  will  be  increased.  If  the  shot  had  been  made 
after  the  fire  is  extinguished,  the  gutted  ruins  of  partially 
remaining  walls  will  have  told  the  story  in  almost  as  graphic 
terms  as  the  fire  itself,  and  the  picture  will  be  given  as  much 
attention.  In  other  words,  the  picture  must  always  convey 
the  full  impression  of  the  details  and  significance  of  the 
story. 

The  human  interest  element  must  always  be  considered, 
too.  In  catastrophes  as  floods  and  fires  the  fate  of  the  vic- 
tims have  a  stronger  appeal  to  the  emotions  of  the  reader 
than  the  extent  of  the  disaster.  The  devastating  1937  Ohio 
River  floods  bore  out  that  fact.  Flood  waters  sweeping  up 
to  the  roofs  of  homes  revealed  the  magnitude  of  the 
catastrophe,  but  the  most  stirring  pictures  taken  were  not 
those  of  the  waters  but  of  the  refugees  and  the  heroic  men 


56  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

and  women  who  fought  to  prevent  further  toll  of  life. 
Photographs  of  a  mother,  worn  from  exhaustion,  nursing 
her  baby  in  a  refugee  camp,  a  boy  with^his  dog  and  few 
possessions  he  managed  to  save  from  his  submerged  home 
shown  in  the  background,  a  lineup  of  weary,  haggard,  dis- 
heveled refugees  outside  a  tent  awaiting  their  handout  of 
food,  and  a  string  of  convicts  on  a  levee  helping  in  the  battle 
for  life,  were  the  pictorial  masterpieces  that  stirred  the 
world.  They  told  the  story  as  no  thousands  of  words  could 
have  impressed. 

When  the  picture  of  the  bank  embezzler  under  arrest 
at  Providence  arrived,  there  was  not  much  time  wasted  to 
judge  picture  or  service  value.  One  picture  told  the  story; 
the  shot  of  the  embezzler  flanked  by  detectives  arriving  at 
the  court-house  sufficed.  A  distribution  to  members  from 
Maine  to  Pennsylvania  wrote  finis  to  that  news  story. 

The  ship  news  photographer  who  covered  the  arrival  of 
the  liner  Queen  Mary  brings  in  several  large  envelopes 
packed  tightly  with  the  cream  of  Europe's  news  and  feature 
offerings  of  the  past  week.  The  editor  searches  keenly  for 
the  spot  news  which  takes  immediate  precedence :  there  is 
the  wreckage  of  an  Imperial  Airways  plane  which  crashed 
near  Paris,  killing  eight  passengers;  the  thrilling  rescue  of 
a  foundering  steamer's  crew  and  passengers  in  the  North 
Sea,  and  Paris  riot  scenes  showing  a  street  battle  between 
the  Rightists  and  Leftists  in  the  heart  of  the  French  capital. 
Those  involving  personalities  are  then  selected:  Mussolini 
with  his  arm  raised  in  Roman  salute  and  chin  thrust  for- 
ward in  familiar  angle,  greeting  a  Fascist  assemblage;  Hitler 
reviewing  a  battalion  of  troops ;  Stalin  attending  the  funeral 
of  a  confrere  in  Moscow;  Foreign  Minister  Anthony  Eden 
of  England  leaving  10  Downing  Street  after  an  important 
conference  with  the  Prime  Minister,  and  Premier  Blum  of 
France  being  interviewed  by  reporters  after  another  Cabinet 
crisis. 


©    International   News   Photo 

FELLED   BY   AN    ASSASSIN'S    BULLET 

With  blood  from  his  wound  seeping-  through  the  white  of  his  shirt,  Mayor 
Anton  J.  Cermak  of  Chicago  is  assisted  to  a  car  to  be  rushed  to  a  hospital 
in  Miami,  Fla.,  the  night  of  February  15,  1933.  The  Mayor  was  struck  by 
one  of  five  bullets  fired  by  Guiseppe  Zangara  in  the  direction  of  President 
Roosevelt,  and  later  died  in  the  hospital  Zangara  was  put  to  death. 


£)   Wide   World  Photos 

THE    ASSASSINATION    OF    A    MONARCH 

This  picture  was  snapped  an  instant  after  Petrus  Kalemen  had  fired  a  deadly 
hail  of  lead  into  the  bodies  of  King  Alexander  of  Jugloslavia  and  Foreign 
Minister  Louis  Bartheu  of  France,  at  Marseilles,  France,  in  October,  1934. 
Colonel  Piollet  is  striking  the  assassin  with  his  sabre  while  police,  soldiers 
and  citizens  rush  to  seize  the  assassin.  He  was  slain  by  the  mob. 


Pictures,   Inc. 

STRIKE  MARCH  TURNED  INTO  BLOODY  BATTLEGROUND 
Police  hammering-  strike  demonstrators  into  submission  when  they  dispersed 
a  crowd  marching-  on  an  open  field  near  the  Republic  Steel  Corporation  plant 
at  South  Chicago,  May  30,  1937.  Eleven  strike  sympathizers  were  killed. 
This  and  other  pictures  taken  by  news  cameramen  were  studied  by  members 
of  the  Senate  Civil  Liberties  Committee  in  effort  to  fix  responsibility  for 

the    killings. 


©   Wide  World  Photos 
ATTACKING    A    CIO    OFFICIAL 

Ford  Company  special  policemen  piling-  into  CIO  organizer  Richard  T. 
Frankensteen  on  the  bridg-e  near  the  Ford  plant  at  Dearborn,  Michigan, 
May  26,  1937,  following-  an  attempt  of  the  United  Auto  Workers  Union  to 
distribute  leaflets  to  the  workers  leaving-  the  plant.  Frankensteen  was 
brutally  beaten.  The  news  photographers  were  the  next  target;  many  had 
their  cameras,  plates  and  holders  broken,  and  others  forced  to  flee  beyond 

the    city    limits. 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  57 

There  are  six  duplicate  sets  of  these  outstanding  photo- 
graphs. One  set  is  immediately  copied  for  servicing,  an- 
other given  to  the  mat  editor  for  his  page  of  pictures,  an- 
other set  is  rushed  by  motorcycle  boy  to  Newark  Airport 
to  be  sent  by  plane  to  the  Chicago  bureau  for  western  distri- 
bution, and  the  remaining  sets  are  given  to  salesmen  to  sell 
to  the  newspapers  for  either  daily  or  Sunday  rotogravure 
use. 

Competition  in  foreign  coverage  is  keen.  There  are  few 
stories  breaking  in  European  countries  that  are  not  covered 
by  the  news  photographer.  The  number  of  picture  syndi- 
cates, especially  in  England,  far  outnumber  those  in  this 
country.  It  is  a  continual  race  to  make  the  first  and  fastest 
liner  back  to  America,  and  the  pursers  are  swamped  with  the 
bulging  envelopes  entrusted  to  them  for  delivery  to  an  ac- 
credited representative  of  the  American  syndicate. 

Scattered  among  these  spot  news  pictures  are  a  mis- 
cellany of  interesting  photographs,  scenes  and  personalities 
from  many  lands :  an  English  peer  and  his  bride  leaving  an 
historic  London  church,  a  iO5-year-old  Scotch  woman  smok- 
ing her  pipe,  a  Hollywood  beauty  kissing  the  Blarney  Stone, 
a  Normandy  festival,  an  American  Congressman  and  his 
wife  vacationing  in  the  French  Riviera,  a  new  type  of  motor- 
boat  spinning  along  on  the  waters  of  the  Thames — about 
ten  of  these  are  laid  aside  for  servicing  as  soon  as  the  spot 
news  pictures  will  have  been  copied,  printed  and  distributed. 
In  a  few  days  they  will  have  made  their  appearance  in  the 
large  dailies,  a  week  or  two  later  in  many  of  the  nation's 
seventy  Sunday  rotogravure  supplements. 

From  the  fjords  of  Norway  to  the  burning  sands  of  the 
Sahara  the  tiny  eye  of  the  camera  is  trained  on  the  Old 
World,  and  the  ways  of  prince  and  peasant,  premier  and 
dictator  become  familiar  symbols  to  the  American  reader. 
However,  all  pictures  are  not  made  available.  The  censor 
in  many  countries  determines  what  should  be  published;  the 


58  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

official  distributor  is  a  government  agency  prepared  to  keep 
from  the  public  anything  they  deem  detrimental  to  their  own 
interests.  The  news  becomes  the  propaganda,  but  the  pic- 
ture syndicate  has  no  choice  other  than  to  accept  the  gov- 
ernment's handout  and  give  it  world  distribution.  The 
reader  is  left  to  decide  what  is  real  news  and  what  is 
propaganda. 

From  these  photographs  gathered  from  all  parts  of  the 
Old  World,  the  readers  Jin  America  are  daily  presented  with 
the  shifting  scenes  and  personalities;  the  European  setting 
is  no  strange  and  mysterious  other  world  whose  characters 
are  delineated  by  the  imagination.  We  can  almost  see 
Stalin  and  Hitler  and  Mussolini  in  the  flesh  as  the  camera 
reveals  their  grimaces  and  characterizations.  We  can  see 
the  Spanish  soldier  and  the  Russian  worker,  the  London 
shopkeeper  and  the  French  peasant.  Before  our  eyes,  on 
the  printed  page,  they  pass  in  daily  review. 

The  ship  news  negatives  are  placed  on  the  editor's  desk. 
Only  those  of  national  figure  are  syndicated:  the  American 
Ambassador  to  the  court  of  St.  James  returning  for  a  brief 
holiday,  and  a  motion  picture  actress  whose  name  is  known 
from  coast  to  coast.  The  others  are  placed  in  the  files, 
properly  identified.  One  never  knows  when  their  names 
will  spring  suddenly  into  prominence. 

Into  the  hands  of  the  editor  numerous  clippings  of  local 
events  are  placed  by  an  assistant,  tips  on  others  breaking 
at  the  moment  are  relayed  by  the  city  editor,  but  the  syndi- 
cate editor,  unlike  the  picture  editor  of  a  metropolitan  news- 
paper, pays  little  attention  to  these.  The  blowing  up  of  a 
manhole  on  Eighth  Avenue  or  a  little  known  recluse  found 
slain  among  his  rags  in  a  Houston  Street  basement  excites 
no  reaction.  The  story  must  be  of  national  sweep,  or  at 
least  of  a  regional  interest. 

The  stories  sweeping  in  on  wires  from  all  parts  of  the 
country  go  through  a  more  intense  sifting  in  the  hands  of 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  59 

the  editor.  Looking  through  the  thousands  of  words  he 
knows  at  a  glance  what  the  newspaper  editor  will  want.  For 
a  coverage  of  these  stories  he  selects  his  best  correspondent- 
photographers  from  a  long  list  on  file  and  despatches  wires 
instructing  them  to  send  the  outstanding  shots,  either  by 
mail  or  airmail  or  airexpress  to  the  nearest  bureau  point  and 
duplicate  to  New  York.  The  editor  has  always  at  hand  the 
name  of  the  correspondent  to  whom  he  can  turn  in  any 
emergency.  The  able,  active  correspondents  are  paid  well 
and  promptly.  Their  telephone  numbers  are  listed  in  a  well 
kept  file  in  event  an  outstanding  story  breaks  in  the  vicinity 
of  their  homes. 

The  picture  editor  must  also  have  available  the  names 
of  persons  and  companies  to  whom  he  can  turn  when  a  story 
breaks:  publicity  men  connected  with  the  hotel,  stage  and 
screen,  large  corporations,  steamship  lines  and  railroad 
companies,  automobile  hiring  concerns,  police  officials,  air- 
port officials,  and  press  representatives  of  schools  and  col- 
leges. The  names,  addresses  and  telephone  numbers  of 
capable  plane  pilots  are  always  listed.  A  sudden  story  may 
demand  their  immediate  services. 

In  his  drawer  must  always  lie  airmail  and  railroad  guides 
and  road  maps,  and  close  at  hand  Ayer's  Annual,  which  is 
a  complete  listing  of  newspapers  and  editors,  and  an  atlas 
to  check  places  and  distances  for  the  guidance  of  staff 
photographers  and  correspondents  on  story  coverage. 

At  every  moment  of  the  day  he  must  be  constantly  aware 
of  members'  deadlines  and  what  planes  should  be  made  with 
airexpress  packages  to  reach  the  members  in  time  for  their 
editions;  the  time  is  figured  from  the  moment  the  negative 
arrives  till  it  is  printed  and  captioned,  and  not  a  second  is 
wasted  up  till  the  time  a  dust-sprayed  motorcyclist  dashes 
up  to  a  plane  on  a  Newark  runway  ready  for  a  scheduled 
flight  and  hands  the  package  of  pictures  to  the  pilot. 

More  packages  arrive :  airexpressed  envelopes  with  pic- 


60  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

tures  from  San  Francisco,  Los  Angeles,  Chicago  and  Cleve- 
land. Prints  are  assorted  for  local  distribution.  Others 
are  copied  for  European  sales. 

Another  photographer  is  assigned  to  a  fashion  show 
(good  fashion  pictures  are  always  in  demand  by  the  mem- 
bers), and  another  is  rushed  to  a  Coney  Island  fire  (the 
famous  New  York  resort  is  known  the  world  over  and  any 
considerable  damage  there  is  of  international  news  interest). 

It  is  a  day  of  continual  selection  of  photographs,  servic- 
ing, close  watching  of  distribution,  keen  awareness  of  news 
copy  for  picture  coverage.  The  picture  syndicate  editor 
rarely  has  an  idle  moment.  When  he  has  it  is  generally  ap- 
plied to  planning  a  picture  layout  which  he  hopes  will  be 
exclusive. 

He  works  amid  a  sea  of  constant  action :  caption  writers 
bent  over  their  typewriters  striving  to  keep  up  with  the  pace 
of  the  ordering;  photographers  hurrying  to  and  from  their 
assignments;  printers  exposing  print  after  print  to  be  rushed 
through  developing  pans  and  water  tanks,  boys  ferrotyping 
and  captioning,  mail  clerks  distributing,  motorcyclists  in  and 
out  with  their  packages.  It  is  a  whirlwind  of  activity,  tense, 
thrilling. 

Picture  syndicates  will  turn  out  an  average  of  25,000  to 
30,000  prints  weekly,  and  each  print  must  stand  up  under 
the  test  of  news  and  feature  value  and  quality  of  tone  and 
composition. 

It  is  the  picture  keeping  a  steady,  grinding  pace  with  the 
news. 

Where  the  syndicate  picture  editor  will  evaluate  pictures 
for  the  perusal  of  hundreds  of  editors  who  will  select  from 
the  mass  those  that  meet  his  particular  needs,  the  picture 
editor  of  a  daily  newspaper  must  subject  the  pictures  that 
pass  through  his  hands  to  a  more  rigid  survey.  The  photo- 
graph that  he  approves  will  be  the  one  to  be  printed. 

The  syndicate  editor  thinks  in  terms  of  mass  production, 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  6 1 

the  newspaper  editor  concentrates  on  the  single  shot;  the 
syndicate  editor  thinks  of  distances  and  train  and  airmail 
schedules,  the  picture  editor  of  the  daily  is  absorbed  with  the 
deadline  and  edition  and  makeup. 

The  policies  of  the  newspaper  picture  editors  vary,  strik- 
ing a  very  close  line  to  the  needs  and  policies  of  the  pub- 
lishers. One  conservative  newspaper  may  scatter  only  a 
half  dozen  photographs  through  its  pages,  a  tabloid  picture 
paper  will  adhere  to  a  daily  program  of  four  or  five  full 
pages  of  pictures  with  illustrations  with  story  on  every  other 
page. 

In  former  days  before  the  paper  had  its  own  staff  of 
photographers,  its  own  photoengraving  plant  and  paid  no 
attention  to  picture  syndicates,  it  was  the  fashion  to  "dress 
up"  the  one  or  two  pictures  used,  generally  selected  by  the 
managing  editor,  with  decorations  of  scrolls,  arabesques 
and  rosettes.  The  fancy  art  decoration  redeemed  the  poor 
reproduction. 

With  the  introduction  of  improved  engraving  processes 
and  the  use  of  more  and  better  news  and  feature  photo- 
graphs continually  pouring  in  from  syndicate  and  staff 
photographer,  the  picture  editor  was  hired  solely  to  concen- 
trate on  the  intelligent  handling  and  selection  of  photo- 
graphs, and  give  them  artistic  as  well  as  news  meaning.  The 
picture  has  become  as  important  in  matter  of  content  and 
display  as  the  news  story,  the  caption  head  as  striking  and 
original  as  the  news  headline. 

A  big  story  breaks.  The  picture  editor  of  the  daily 
turns  to  his  own  file  for  a  stock  cut  or  photograph  to  illus- 
trate it  with  personality  or  scene.  If  the  story  occurs  with- 
in the  vicinity  of  the  newspaper  office,  the  staff  photographer 
will  be  rushed  to  bring  back  the  earliest  possible  shot  in 
order  to  make  the  succeeding  edition.  A  far  away  story 
will  throw  the  editor's  dependence  on  the  syndicate  to  rush 
it  along  in  the  fastest  possible  way  by  either  train  or  plane, 


62  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

or  more  recently,  the  transmission  of  the  picture  over  the 
telephone  wire. 

A  close  contact  always  exists  between  the  picture  editor 
and  the  desks  of  the  city  and  managing  editors.  There  are 
illustrative  possibilities  in  most  stories.  The  city  editor  will 
see  to  it  that  a  photographer  accompanies  the  reporter,  the 
managing  editor  will  press  the  use  of  a  picture  for  an  out- 
standing page-one  story,  and  space  for  the  use  of  the  illus- 
tration will  be  alloted  accordingly  in  the  makeup  of  the 
pages. 

With  the  daily  newspaper,  the  local  story  becomes  as 
important  for  illustration  as  the  seemingly  more  vital  news 
from  far  away  places.  The  reader  is  as  much  interested, 
sometimes  more  so,  in  seeing  the  picture  of  an  automobile 
crash  in  his  own  city,  though  there  may  have  been  only  a 
few  injured,  as  in  the  crash  of  a  car  in  which  many  were 
killed  hundreds  of  miles  distant.  The  picture  of  a  waif 
lost  in  the  subway,  a  foundling  in  a  local  hospital,  the  lay- 
ing of  a  cornerstone  of  a  local  edifice,  the  addition  of  new 
paintings  for  the  city  museum,  the  Mayor  honoring  fire  de- 
partment heroes — all  these  events  of  immediate  interest  to 
the  reader  assume  an  all-important  position  in  the  schedul- 
ing of  pictures  for  the  daily.  Such  pictures,  at  times,  con- 
stitute a  majority  of  the  pictures  used.  Only  the  most  strik- 
ing of  the  news  and  feature  shots  furnished  by  the  syndicate 
will  make  up  the  remainder. 

On  some  newspapers,  the  editors  of  the  sports,  society 
and  financial  departments  will  suggest  and  plan  the  use  of 
pictures  for  their  respective  pages.  On  others,  the  picture 
editor  will  assume  the  prerogatives  of  all  departments. 

The  use  of  the  one-column  personality  picture  is  wide- 
spread. It  helps  relieve  the  monotone  of  the  page  of  words. 
As  a  result,  the  newspaper  sees  to  it  that  a  good  personality 
file  is  built  up  and  well  preserved. 

Seldom  does  the  paper  go  beyond  the  two  and  three 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  63 

column  cut  except  when  the  value  of  the  news  or  the  com- 
position of  the  picture  demands  it.  A  large  group  of  persons 
at  an  important  function  cannot  be  very  comfortably  com- 
pressed into  a  two  or  three  column  picture;  the  general  view 
of  a  golf  match  or  a  shot  of  five  horses  in  a  thrilling  finish 
will  be  justifiably  "blown  up"  into  a  four  or  five  column 
cut. 

Each  picture  must  be  weighed  carefully  for  content, 
quality  and  composition.  The  foreign  picture  must  have  a 
background  suggestion  of  locale  especially  when  it  is  a  per- 
sonality shot,  the  big  news  story  must  convey  in  a  flash  the 
story  itself;  the  pathos,  tragedy  or  humor  of  a  story  must 
leave  an  immediate,  indelible  impression.  The  picture  must 
breathe  life,  action,  vitality,  it  must  be  animated  to  make 
it  outstanding.  The  value  of  a  photograph  of  a  dust  storm 
is  enhanced  when  a  person  with  handkerchief  to  face  is 
caught  within  the  range  of  the  camera,  the  effect  of  a  fire  is 
intensified  when  firemen  are  shown  battling  the  blaze  or 
hurrying  up  ladders  to  rescue  trapped  victims.  The  shot 
of  a  counterfeiting  outfit  reveals  a  better  story  when  a  gov- 
ernment operative  is  shown  examining  the  cache. 

Every  hour  brings  to  the  daily  picture  editor  a  fresh 
supply  of  photographs :  syndicate  offerings  and  those  turned 
in  by  the  staff  photographers.  There  may  be  four  or  five 
editions  to  make,  and  the  editor  tries  to  give  each  edition  a 
fresh  makeup  with  the  new  photographs  displacing  or  sup- 
plementing the  earlier  shots  used. 

The  picture  quality  is  carefully  considered.  There 
should  be  plenty  of  sharply  defined  detail  and  should  have 
all  the  middle  tones  between  black  and  white  for  a  perfect 
half  tone  engraving.  No  matter  how  good  the  subject  may 
be,  it  may  not  be  used  if  it  is  either  too  flat  or  too  contrasty. 

The  editor  must  study  his  picture  carefully  before  writ- 
ing his  caption.  On  the  picture  tabloids  this  task  is  en- 
trusted to  a  special  caption  writer.  Generally  a  three  or 


64  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

four  line  text  is  written,  but  it  must  be  brief  and  concise, 
containing  all  the  essential  facts.  The  top  line  or  head 
must  be  vigorous,  and  have  the  "punch".  Names  of  persons 
and  places  must  be  carefully  gone  over,  and  the  text  must 
be  carefully  checked  against  the  news  story.  With  feature 
pictures,  original,  vigorous  captions  help  enliven  the  illustra- 
tions and  captivate  the  readers. 

The  picture  editor  must  make  every  picture  worth  the 
space  it  occupies. 

The  job  of  the  picture  editor  of  an  illustrated  tabloid 
like  the  New  York  Daily  News  is  a  very  important  and 
interesting  one.  Throughout  the  day,  before  the  presses 
start  rolling  off  the  more  than  a  million  and  a  half  papers, 
the  editor  is  continually  busy  with  selection  and  makeup. 
He  sees  a  daily  average  of  400  pictures,  including  about  a 
hundred  local  shots  taken  by  the  staff  of  25  photographers. 

Dozens  of  photographs  must  be  selected  for  the  double 
truck  (the  inside  two  page  spread),  the  extra  page,  and  the 
front  and  back  pages,  besides  the  numerous  illustrations  with 
story  scattered  throughout  the  paper.  His  deadline  for  the 
pink  or  first  edition  is  an  hour  earlier  than  the  written  mate- 
rial. The  extra  page  is  ready  about  three  p.m.,  the  double 
truck  is  all  set  at  four  o'clock,  the  back  page  at  five  and  the 
front  page  at  five-thirty. 

After  a  page  is  laid  out  on  a  dummy,  the  exact  size  as 
the  form  in  the  composing  room,  the  spaces  are  numbered 
as  well  as  the  size  of  the  eventual  cuts.  The  photographs 
with  the  dummy  are  handed  to  the  caption  writer  who  scans 
the  pictures  for  caption  suggestions  and  then  hands  them 
back  to  the  art  department.  After  they  are  scaled  and  re- 
touched and  the  subject  of  the  picture  written  on  the  back, 
the  pictures  are  sent  to  the  engraving  department.  An 
original  listing  of  pictures  is  sent  along  with  them,  a  dupli- 
cate is  kept  in  the  art  department  on  a  loose  leaf  book  as  a 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  65 

record  of  the  size  and  number  of  the  pictures  to  be  pub- 
lished. The  dummy  is  checked  against  that  record. 

The  copy  desk  of  the  news  department  which  has  al- 
ready been  notified  that  pictures  will  accompany  a  story, 
receives  the  captions  to  be  sure  that  they  jibe  with  the  story. 
The  captions  for  the  full  pages  occupy  a  space  of  about 
three  square  inches.  The  art  of  condensation  reaches  its 
highest  form  on  the  paper  like  the  News.  Not  a  single 
word  is  wasted. 

Within  thirty  minutes  after  the  photograph  arrives  in 
the  engraving  room  a  cut  is  ready  for  the  printer  at  work  in 
the  composing  room  who  also  gets  his  caption  type  and  puts 
it  in  the  assigned  space.  If  it  is  too  long,  the  caption  is  cut 
and  reset.  One  printer  is  assigned  to  each  picture  page. 
Before  the  cuts  arrive  he  will  have  built  up  the  spaces  for 
them  with  blocks  of  various  sizes.  The  form  is  locked  up 
and  the  cuts  are  then  laid  on.  From  the  composing  room, 
the  form  is  rolled  on  a  movable  table  or  chase  to  the  stereo- 
typing room  where  the  mats  and  castings  are  made.  Shortly 
thereafter  the  giant  rotary  presses  start  rolling  off  the 
printed  pages. 

Although  the  last  edition  goes  to  press  at  three  in  the 
morning  there  are  numerous  occasions  when  the  paper  is 
replated  at  a  much  later  hour,  up  till  about  six  o'clock,  in 
order  to  publish  a  picture  on  a  sensational  news  story. 

The  tabloid  picture  editor  will  continually  vary  makeup 
in  order  to  give  each  new  edition  a  fresh  appearance.  The 
square  or  rectangular  picture,  with  its  even,  set  appearance 
is  mortised  (the  lines  of  the  square  or  rectangle  are  indent- 
ed), and  the  layout  of  the  page  assumes  a  striking  blend  of 
artistic  composition,  appealing  to  the  eye. 

The  cream  of  the  news  photographic  world  is  at  the  dis- 
posal of  the  daily  newspapers.  Picture  agencies  offer  them 
the  best  of  their  material  either  by  subscription  to  the  serv- 
ice or  outright  purchase  of  the  individual  picture  offered  by 


66  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

the  agency  salesman;  freelance  photographers  in  and  around 
the  city  submit  the  products  of  their  cameras,  the  alert  staff 
photographers  are  on  top  of  every  local  story.  The  news- 
papers today  never  suffer  a  dearth  of  picture  material. 

Whether  it  be  on  the  News,  the  picture  paper  with  the 
country's  largest  circulation,  or  on  the  smallest  daily  using 
the  picture  mats,  the  function  of  the  picture  editor  is  primar- 
ily the  same.  He  must  judge  the  picture  with  a  keen  ap- 
preciative eye  of  the  artist  and  reporter;  he  must  entertain 
and  instruct  his  readers;  he  must  learn  to  discriminate  be- 
tween the  interesting  and  the  prosaic,  the  objectionable  and 
the  pleasing.  He  must  never  override  his  readers'  good 
taste. 

The  picture  editor  is  a  strong  link  in  the  journalistic 
chain.  The  circulation  builders  can  well  afford  ever  to 
strengthen  that  link.  The  readers  are  taking  a  great  fancy 
to  his  work  these  days. 


Chapter  F. 

THE  ADVENTURES  OF  THE  NEWS 
CAMERAMAN 

With  a  courage  born  of  nerve,  sheer  audacity  and  a 
tenacity  of  will,  the  modern  newspaper  photographer  has 
added  a  vivid  chapter  of  romance  and  adventure  to  the 
annals  of  journalism.  Spurred  by  the  battle-cry:  "Get  the 
picture!"  he  has  stormed  the  heights  with  his  little  black 
box,  captured  his  objective  and  returned  to  his  ranks  with 
the  picture  safely  in  tow.  He  is  the  true  soldier  of  Peace ! 

The  news  cameraman  is  always  ready  in  a  flash  to  meet 
any  emergency;  without  qualm  or  fear,  he  is  prepared  to  go 
through  fire  and  water  at  the  word:  uGo !"  He  scales 
dizzy  heights  of  buildings  to  get  the  unusual  angle,  he  treads 
narrow  girders  on  unfinished  bridges  to  get  the  shot  of  the 
men  at  work;  through  fire  and  hurricane  and  flood  he 
dashes  unhesitatingly  to  snap  every  view  of  a  disaster.  The 
only  anxiety  that  besets  him  is :  "Did  my  pictures  scoop  the 
town?  Did  my  plates  arrive  at  the  office  ok?" 

At  the  end  of  a  big  story  that  has  carried  him  far  afield, 
he  will  return  to  the  office,  rummage  through  the  huge  stack 
of  negatives  he  has  sent  back,  and  find  one  lone  shot  that 
will  be  slightly  out  of  focus.  It's  enough  to  spoil  his  appetite 
for  days.  Disregarding  slaps  on  his  back  from  the  editor 
acclaiming  his  great  work,  he  will  naively  murmer:  "Gee, 
wonder  what  the  deuce  caused  this." 

He  just  cannot  grasp  the  fact  that  even  the  world's  best 
cameraman  can  once  in  a  while  get  a  slightly  out  of  focus 
picture.  The  big,  robust,  daring  cameraman  can  be  so  de- 
lightfully child-like  at  times,  the  schoolboy  who  is  irked 
because  he  didn't  get  100  instead  of  99  on  his  test  paper. 


68  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

The  cameraman  thrives  on  the  thrill  of  a  big  story.  Like 
a  true  member  of  the  Fourth  Estate,  he  will  dash  in  and 
out  of  taxis,  planes,  trains  and  ships,  bang  his  toes,  bump 
his  head,  tear  his  clothes,  and  miss  his  meals,  only  to  be  sure 
that  he  gets  every  shot  and  angle  of  the  story  he's  covering. 
He  strives  for  nothing  but  the  best  results,  and  he  will  sink 
into  an  easy  chair  the  following  morning  with  a  singing 
heart  and  a  boyish  grin  as  he  holds  the  paper  at  arm's 
length,  and  beholds  his  picture,  a  five  column  "beauty"  on 
the  front  page.  Oh,  boy,  it  was  worth  everything  to  get  just 
that! 

Whether  a  story  breaks  in  the  frozen  wastes  of  the 
Arctic  or  the  miasmic  jungles  of  the  Amazon,  the  photogra- 
pher gets  his  picture.  It  may  take  an  hour  or  it  may  take 
days  to  trek  to  the  scene,  but  he  finally  gets  his  picture,  and 
there  is  no  turning  back  till  he  does. 

There  is  the  story  of  the  three  transatlantic  fliers,  Cap- 
tain Herman  Koehl,  Baron  Ehrenfried  von  Huenefeld  and 
Captain  James  Fitzmaurice,  who  were  stranded  on  the 
bleak  Greenly  Island  off  the  coast  of  Labrador  when  their 
plane  crashed  into  the  ice  and  snow. 

Newspapers  and  syndicates  had  despatched  cameramen 
in  planes  to  Murray  Bay,  Canada,  on  the  first  lap  of  a 
projected  flight  to  reach  the  men  and  get  the  first  pictures. 

Between  the  men,  heavily  clad  against  the  cold  of  the 
dying  days  of  Winter,  and  the  three  intrepid  fliers  hemmed 
in  on  their  Labrador  island,  lay  a  thousand  mile  stretch  of 
bleak  Canadian  country,  constantly  swept  by  fierce  blizzards. 
Cameramen  and  reporters  from  the  country  over  had  con- 
verged toward  Murray  Bay  as  the  last  hopping  off  point  for 
Greenly  Island. 

The  editors  at  their  office  desks  were  frantically  phoning 
and  wiring.  "Try  at  all  costs  to  get  through!"  was  the 
tenor  of  their  commands.  But  the  hardiest  fliers  demurred. 
It  would  be  suicide  to  try  to  buck  those  blizzard  winds.  The 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  69 

planes  remained  on  the  ice  poised  for  flight  but  could  not 
get  off.  Fuel  was  being  constantly  brought  in  by  dog  sled 
from  Quebec  to  keep  the  motors  warmed  up  in  case  of  a 
break  in  the  weather. 

Finally  it  remained  for  Captain  Edward  Jackson  of  the 
New  York  Daily  News,  a  veteran  news  cameraman  who 
had  seen  service  in  the  World  War  and  accompanied  Presi- 
dent Wilson  to  Versailles  for  the  Peace  Conference,  to  make 
the  "suicidal"  attempt.  His  comrades  of  the  typewriter  and 
camera  were  startled.  He'll  never  get  through !  While  his 
editors  at  the  office  held  their  breaths,  fearful  of  a  sudden 
flash  from  the  Canadian  wilds  that  he  had  cracked  up, 
Jackson  kept  on  going  till  his  plane  nosed  down  on  the 
snows  of  Greenly  Island.  He  found  the  fliers  being  com- 
fortably taken  care  of  by  the  lighthouse  keeper  of  the  island. 

His  first  shots  of  the  stranded  fliers,  sent  back  to  New 
York  by  a  relay  of  planes,  thrilled  the  News'  million  read- 
ers. And  millions  more  enjoyed  the  sight  of  the  remarkable 
shots  when  the  News'  syndicate,  the  Pacific  and  Atlantic 
Photos,  gave  them  world  distribution. 

Any  moment  of  the  day  or  night,  winter  or  summer, 
may  suddenly  rouse  men  on  the  desk  or  in  the  darkroom  to 
startling  action.  The  wires  may  be  ticking  off  a  common- 
place story  from  Kenosha,  Wisconsin,  or  Bombay,  India, 
when  suddenly  the  little  bell  rings,  and  the  operator  excited- 
ly bends  over  to  get  the  first  words  of  a  tremendous  story 
breaking. 

It  was  toward  the  late  afternoon  of  a  hot  July  day  in 
1921.  Editors  were  poring  over  routine  copy,  and  the  day 
photographers  back  from  mediocre  assignments  were  lolling 
in  the  darkrooms  waiting  for  their  plates  to  develop,  when 
the  electrifying  flash  came  over  the  wires :  uThe  Navy  muni- 
tions plant  at  Lake  Denmark,  New  Jersey,  has  exploded." 

Within  a  few  minutes,  hired  cabs  and  autos  were  rushing 
newspaper  and  syndicate  photographers  to  the  scene;  the 


7©  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

early  darkness  found  them  piling  out  at  Dover,  the  nearest 
town.  The  sky  was  alight  with  the  flames  from  the  burning 
buildings  and  the  air  was  being  split  with  the  explosions  of 
thousands  of  shells.  They  could  not  get  too  close  to  the 
scene.  Armed  guards  turned  them  back  from  the  roads 
leading  to  the  blazing  inferno. 

But  pictures  have  to  be  taken !  There  are  deadlines  and 
editions  back  in  the  city,  so  while  they  chafe  under  the 
guards'  strict  orders  not  to  proceed  further,  the  photogra- 
phers turn  to  make  pictures  of  the  injured  and  wounded  at 
the  hospital  in  Dover,  the  sentinels  on  duty,  the  alarmed 
towns-people  watching  the  fire  from  the  nearest  vantage 
points. 

Without  being  told,  the  news  cameraman  instinctively 
knows  that  if  he  can't  get  the  best  shot  possible,  whether  it's 
forbidden  or  circumstances  keep  the  picture  out  of  reach  of 
his  lens,  he  will  get  the  next  best  shot  so  long  as  it  will 
furnish  illustration  for  the  story. 

However,  the  restrictions  did  not  keep  several  New 
York  editors  from  entering  the  grounds.  Caveo  Sileo,  as- 
signment editor  with  the  International  News  Photos,  had 
been  home  when  the  news  of  the  explosion  was  phoned  to 
him  from  the  office.  Overhearing  the  phone  conversation, 
Mrs.  Sileo  realized  there  was  danger  and  determined  to 
accompany  her  husband. 

When  they  reached  Dover  by  auto  they  were  barred 
from  the  reservation.  After  entering  an  unused  entrance 
they  climbed  over  high  fences  and  jumped  to  the  inside  of 
the  grounds.  It  was  a  veritable  uNo  Man's  Land"  with 
bullets  whizzing  by  and  shells  bursting  in  air.  For  more 
than  two  hours,  while  they  crouched  beside  trees,  Sileo,  who 
had  taken  his  camera,  kept  shooting  away  with  his  plates. 
They  then  headed  back  to  their  car  and  shot  toward  Dover 
where  Sileo  made  more  pictures  of  the  injured  in  the  hos- 
pitals before  returning  to  New  York. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  71 

It  is  a  rare  occasion  when  the  managing  editor  of  a  news- 
paper will  accompany  a  photographer  to  the  scene  of  a  story, 
but  on  this  one,  Frank  Hause,  then  managing  editor  of  the 
New  York  Daily  News,  hopped  from  his  desk  and  rushed 
by  car  to  Dover,  accompanied  by  a  cameraman. 

From  a  shaky  observation  tower,  Hause,  with  the  skill 
of  an  officer  in  battle,  directed  the  work  of  the  photogra- 
pher, and  both  stuck  through  the  blazing  inferno  till  they 
had  secured  a  complete  pictorial  record. 

The  following  day,  Mack  Baron,  International's  flying 
photographer,  flew  over  the  scene  of  destruction.  In  utter 
disregard  of  exploding  shells,  shrapnel  and  jagged  pieces 
of  metal,  Baron  passed  the  word  along  to  the  pilot  to  dip 
low.  Skimming  through  the  air  but  a  few  hundred  feet 
above  the  ground,  Baron  snapped  some  remarkable  closeups 
and  did  not  turn  back  for  Roosevelt  Field  until  he  had  ex- 
hausted his  magazine.  Upon  landing  the  pilot  called 
Baron's  attention  to  jagged  tears  in  the  wings. 

Carl  Nesensohn,  a  veteran  news  photographer  who  has 
been  with  the  New  York  Times  Wide  World  Photos  since 
its  inception,  was  in  Brooklyn  on  his  way  home  one  July  day 
in  1916  when  the  sound  of  a  terrific  explosion  followed  by  a 
burst  of  fire  stopped  him  in  his  tracks. 

It  was  the  famous  Black  Tom  explosion  and  fire  on  the 
Jersey  City  docks  which  killed  two  persons  and  caused  a 
property  loss  of  $22,000,000. 

Across  the  bay,  on  the  Jersey  shore,  Carl  saw  flames 
shooting  skyward.  He  rushed  back  to  the  office,  loaded  his 
holders  and  headed  for  the  Battery.  After  much  pleading 
and  payment  of  a  small  sum,  he  induced  the  owner  of  a 
small  craft,  hardly  much  larger  than  a  row  boat,  to  take  him 
across. 

While  they  were  nearing  the  Jersey  shore,  burning 
barges,  some  loaded  with  exploding  munitions,  swept  by, 
perilously  close.  They  finally  maneuvered  the  boat  along- 


72  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

side  a  dock  at  a  fairly  safe  distance  from  the  fire.  Carl 
told  the  skipper  to  wait  for  him  until  after  he  had  made  a 
few  shots.  But  when  he  returned  he  found  the  boat  gone. 
The  wind  was  sweeping  the  fire  closer  and  soon  the  shore 
end  of  the  dock  was  ablaze.  Fortunately,  a  New  York  City 
fire  boat  hove  into  view  and  took  him  aboard.  From  the 
ship  he  was  able  to  take  more  views.  Not  satisfied  with 
these,  he  begged  permission  to  be  let  ashore  for  a  few 
minutes,  and  he  managed  to  get  some  remarkable  closeups, 
not  without,  however,  getting  the  soles  of  his  shoes  burned 
and  his  suit  riddled  with  red  hot  cinders. 

It  was  one  of  Nesensohn's  many  exciting  adventures  in 
the  news  game. 

In  1935  he  was  assigned  to  cover  the  passenger  liner 
Morro  Castle  which  still  aflame  from  stem  to  stern  had 
drifted  onto  the  beach  at  Asbury  Park,  N.  J.  The  boat 
while  bound  from  Havana  to  New  York  had  caught  fire  off 
Asbury  Park  and  134  passengers  and  members  of  the  crew 
perished. 

After  the  smoke  and  flames  had  died  down  on  one  end 
of  the  ship,  Nesensohn  secured  the  permission  of  the  Coast 
Guard  to  be  swung  aboard  the  ship  in  a  breeches  bouy.  He 
was  the  first  photographer  to  set  foot  on  the  burning  ship. 

The  steel  plates  of  the  deck  were  still  fiery  hot  but  he 
kept  on,  shooting  his  pictures.  In  many  places  the  plates 
had  buckled  into  wave-like  formations  and  Carl  had  to  slide 
up  and  down  before  finally  reaching  the  burned  out  staircase 
leading  to  the  upper  decks. 

Jagged  pieces  of  metal  and  splinters  of  charred  wood 
ripped  his  clothing.  The  hot  steel  was  like  a  volcano  under 
his  feet.  He  kept  constantly  to  the  windward  side  lest  the 
flames  and  smoke  from  the  other  side  of  the  ship  billow  back 
into  his  face.  He  finally  managed  to  reach  three  decks  of 
the  ship  maneuvering  the  camera  in  all  directions  to  get  the 


©  Wide  World  Photos 
REFUGEES   OF   THE   FLOOD 

Tired,  dispirited,  her  f?ce  drawn  from  anguish  and  worry,  Mrs.  Mary  Mooney, 
of  Luxora,  Arkansas,  huddles  her  two  children  close  to  her  on  cots  provided 
for  them  in  a  concentration  camp  at  Memphis,  Tenn.  They  were  fed  and 
housed  along-  with  thousands  of  others  who  were  forced  to  flee  their  homes 
during1  the  disastrous  Ohio  and  Mississippi  Rivers  flood  in  January,  1937. 


©   Wide   World   Photos 

FOUND    IN    THE    SCHOOL    RUINS 

One  of  the  few  survivors  of  the  New  London,  Texas,  Consolidated  School 
disaster  looks  for  her  books  amid  the  strewn  mass.  The  school  was  com- 
pletely wrecked  by  a  gas  explosion,  killing  nearly  500  students  and  teachers, 

on   March   18,    1937. 


©   Wide   World   Photo 

THE    PRINCE    IS    HEADING    FOR    A    FALL 

The  Duke  of  Windsor,  when  he  was  Prince  ftf  Wales,  was  the  victim  of  a 
series  of  spills  before  he  gave  up  horse-racing.  The  ubiquitous  cameraman 
clicked  his  camera  the  instant  the  former  King-  was  thrown  from  his 
saddle  while  riding  in  a  Welsh  Guards  Challenge  Cup  race  in  England.  In 
another  instant,  the  royal  equestrian  was  rolling  in  the  muddy  turf,  but  was 

uninjured. 


Pictures,   Inc. 
HIS    LAST    FIGHT 

One  of  the  most  dramatic  fight  pictures  ever  taken  is  this  one  showing  Ernie 
Schaaf,  Boston  heavyweight,  at  the  instant  he  went  crashing  to  the  floor 
after  Primo  Camera,  Italian  giant,  had  landed  a  straight  left  to  his  face  in 
the  13th  round  of  their  fight  at  Madison  Square  Garden,  New  York  City,  night 
of  February  10,  1933.  Schaaf  lay  unconscious  for  an  hour  and  was  then 
removed  t'o  the  Polyclinic  Hospital  where  he  died  four  days  later  following 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  73 

best  angles.  He  obtained  the  first  shots  of  the  burned  out 
interior  of  the  vessel. 

With  his  clothing  burned,  ripped  and  torn,  his  shoes 
almost  burned  through  and  his  face  coal  black  from  the  soot 
and  smoke,  he  finally  managed  to  reach  shore  and  return 
to  his  hotel  to  pack  the  negatives  for  speedy  shipment  back 
to  New  York. 

Later  another  news  photographer  went  aboard  the  ship 
but  forgot  to  keep  to  the  windward  side.  He  was  overcome 
by  the  smoke  and  heat  of  the  nearby  flames,  and  fell  face 
down  on  the  hot  deck.  Fortunately  he  was  spotted  by  an- 
other cameraman  and  carried  off,  painfully  burned. 

For  these  heroes  of  the  lens,  it  was  just  another  day's 
assignment. 

Every  job  has  its  potential  thrills  and  dangers,  but  the 
daring  bearer  of  the  camera  faces  all  without  the  batting 
of  an  eyelash. 

When  word  came  that  the  situation  in  Cuba  was  be- 
coming more  serious,  that  the  regime  of  President  Machado 
was  about  to  fall,  mobs  were  attacking  and  being  attacked 
by  gun  fire,  Seymour  Ress,  Associated  Press  cameraman, 
was  immediately  flown  from  New  York  to  Miami  and  then 
over  to  Havana  in  the  first  outgoing  Pan  American  Airways 
plane. 

He  had  made  some  remarkable  shots  of  the  soldiers 
with  machine  guns  and  rifles  in  action,  crowds  scurrying  to 
safety,  a  newspaper  plant  afire,  and  was  on  his  way  to  the 
Pan  American  Airways  office  in  Havana  to  put  his  plates 
aboard  a  plane  when  he  was  attacked  by  a  mob  at  the 
entrance  to  the  airfield.  They  forced  him  back  into  his 
automobile  at  the  point  of  guns,  smashed  his  camera  and 
some  of  his  plates,  and  he  was  released  only  after  some  of 
the  cooler  heads  had  intervened. 

When  Ress  had  seen  the  mob  coming,  he  had  the  trigger- 
quick  sense,  with  which  so  many  of  the  news  photographers 


74  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

are  blessed,  to  conceal  some  of  the  plates  on  his  person. 
After  he  was  freed,  he  immediately  inquired  about  charter- 
ing a  plane  to  fly  to  Miami  but  sorrowfully  learned  that 
President  Machado  had  taken  the  only  plane  available  to 
fly  to  Nassau,  the  Bahamas,  in  a  dash  to  safety.  He 
advised  his  New  York  office  of  his  plight,  and  they  at  once 
ordered  a  plane  from  Miami  to  fly  to  Havana  to  pick  up 
his  plates. 

On  another  occasion,  his  quick  thinking  enabled  Ress 
to  secure  an  exclusive  picture  for  his  syndicate. 

After  the  announcement  of  the  appointment  of  William 
Woodin  as  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  in  President  Roose- 
velt's cabinet  had  come  over  the  wires,  Ress  was  assigned  to 
get  a  new  picture  of  the  appointee.  The  night  editor  had 
phoned  Woodin's  home  in  advance,  but  the  butler  had  an- 
nounced that  he  had  gone  to  the  home  of  a  friend  for  dinner. 
Ress  was  hurried  there,  but  on  arriving  was  barred  from 
entering.  The  butler's  laconic :  "Sorry,  sir,  but  Mr.  Woodin 
will  not  want  to  be  interviewed  or  photographed"  threaten- 
ed no  pictures.  Undismayed,  Ress  hung  about  the  house 
entrance  for  a  while,  pleading  with  the  butler  several  times 
to  allow  him  in,  but  it  fell  on  deaf  ears.  The  butler  had  his 
orders.  Finally,  an  idea  struck  Ress.  On  the  back  of  a 
card,  he  scribbled:  "Mr.  Woodin,  please  allow  just  one 
photograph.  The  office  insists  that  I  get  a  picture  and  I 
do  not  want  to  return  until  I  do."  The  butler  was  per- 
suaded to  bring  the  card  to  Mr.  Woodin.  It  worked.  Ress 
was  allowed  to  enter  and  he  made  several  poses.  The  ex- 
clusive pictures  were  rushed  back  to  the  office  and  shortly 
thereafter  they  were  being  syndicated  to  all  parts  of  the 
country. 

It  proved  that  there  are  no  such  words  as  "it  can't  be 
done"  in  the  vocabulary  of  the  news  photographer. 

The  cameraman  must  at  all  times  keep  a  cool  head, 
think  fast  and  keep  both  feet  to  the  ground.  There  is  no 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  75 

wavering  or  retreating.  He  must  keep  on  firing  away  with 
his  camera  as  though  he  was  left  alone  to  man  a  machine 
gun  nest  in  the  face  of  enemy  fire. 

In  June  1932,  Joseph  Costa,  New  York  Daily  News 
photographer,  was  assigned  to  go  to  Washington  to  cover 
the  bonus  marchers.  The  veterans  had  camped  in  all  parts 
of  the  Capital  and  were  daily  becoming  more  insistent  on 
having  their  demands  met.  For  a  while  things  were  fairly 
peaceful,  but  finally  the  local  police  threatened  to  go  into 
the  shacks  and  empty  buildings  where  the  men  had  taken 
shelter  and  drive  them  out.  The  situation  came  to  a  head 
one  July  day  when  the  police  went  into  the  buildings  and  at 
the  point  of  pistols  pulled  out  some  of  the  marchers.  Others 
had  to  be  carried  out.  Costa  made  his  pictures  of  these 
scenes  and  rushed  to  the  airport  to  ship  his  plates  back  to 
New  York. 

He  returned  to  confer  with  Superintendent  of  Police 
Glassford  who  was  standing  on  a  Pennsylvania  Avenue  lot 
with  a  few  of  his  men  nearby.  Suddenly  a  group  of  the 
marchers,  led  by  a  husky  fellow  holding  aloft  an  American 
flag,  came  forward  from  the  other  end  of  the  lot.  Glassford 
and  his  men  rushed  to  head  them  off,  and  Costa  tagged 
along  with  them.  One  of  the  policemen  tried  to  snatch  the 
flag  from  the  hands  of  the  leader.  Stones  flew  through  the 
air,  followed  by  a  veritable  barrage  of  bricks,  lead  pipes  and 
pieces  of  plumbing.  The  battle  raged  for  about  five  minutes, 
and  while  the  police  and  the  veterans  were  locked  in  hand 
to  hand  battle,  Costa  stood  his  ground  between  them  and 
calmly  snapped  his  pictures.  Bricks  and  stones  flew  past 
him  and  one  struck  his  shoulder  and  almost  felled  him,  but 
he  kept  on  shooting  his  plates.  Finally,  the  police,  outnum- 
bered and  given  orders  not  to  shoot,  retreated  and  took 
shelter  behind  the  improvised  huts.  Unmindful  of  the  pain 
in  his  shoulder,  Costa  dashed  for  the  airport  and  shipped 
his  plates  back  to  his  office.  They  were  the  most  thrilling 


76  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

pictures  taken  of  the  bonus  marchers'  "war"  and  received 
front  page  prominence  all  over  the  world. 

Costa  returned  that  night  to  take  the  pictures  of  the 
burning  of  the  veterans'  shacks  when  the  marchers  were 
finally  driven  out  of  their  improvised  homes  on  the  Capital's 
open  lots. 

His  pictorial  record  of  the  story  was  complete. 

Two  of  the  most  remarkable  news  photographs  ever 
taken  of  the  assassinations  of  high  officials  were  made  by 
William  Warnecke,  of  the  former  New  York  World,  and 
Samuel  Schulman,  an  International  News  Photos  staff  cam- 
eraman. 

Warnecke  was  assigned  to  make  pictures  of  Mayor 
Gaynor  of  New  York  boarding  a  steamer  at  a  Hoboken 
dock  in  1910.  He  went  aboard  with  the  official  party,  when 
suddenly  a  bullet  from  the  pistol  of  an  insane  crank  struck 
down  the  city's  Chief  Executive.  As  the  Mayor  tottered 
with  blood  flowing  from  the  side  of  his  face,  Warnecke  who 
had  already  trained  his  camera  on  the  Mayor  snapped  his 
picture.  It  is  a  remarkable  photograph  showing  two  of  the 
official  party  rushing  forward  to  assist  the  Mayor  at  the 
instant  he  was  shot. 

Schulman's  historic  picture  was  taken  at  a  later  date. 
He  had  gone  with  a  score  of  reporters  and  cameramen  to 
Bayfront  Park  in  Miami  to  cover  the  arrival  of  President- 
elect Roosevelt  in  February  1933.  Schulman  made  a  few 
shots  from  the  bandstand  including  one  of  the  President- 
elect seated  on  top  of  his  car  waving  to  the  crowds  and 
Mayor  Anton  Cermak  of  Chicago  and  Henry  L.  Doherty 
standing  close  to  him.  He  climbed  down  into  the  crowd 
to  greet  Mayor  Cermak  whom  he  knew  very  well.  Bob 
Clark,  Secret  Service  man,  was  passing  at  the  time.  The 
firing  started.  Schulman  saw  the  orange  flashes  and  said: 
"This  sounds  like  Chicago,  Mayor."  The  Mayor  said 
nothing,  but  groaned  and  collapsed.  Clark  and  Schulman 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  77 

tried  to  pick  him  up,  not  knowing  at  the  instant  that  he  had 
been  shot.  They  thought  he  had  been  pushed  by  the  crowd. 
Then  Clark  felt  blood  on  his  fingers  and  shouted:  "He's 
been  shot!"  The  crowd  took  up  the  shout.  Schulman 
slipped  back  to  make  his  remarkable  picture  while  Clark, 
L.  L.  Lee,  City  Manager  of  Miami  and  W.  Wood,  Na- 
tional Committeeman  for  Dade  County,  were  assisting  the 
wounded  Mayor. 

Schulman  then  turned  to  get  the  shots  of  the  assassin, 
Guiseppe  Zangara,  who  was  quickly  nabbed.  The  plates 
were  quickly  developed,  sets  of  prints  were  run  off  for  special 
distribution,  and  the  negatives  were  on  the  way  to  New 
York  on  the  early  morning  plane. 

Every  emergency  is  met  in  a  twinkling  of  an  eye, 
whether  it  be  on  the  coverage  of  a  flood  or  fire,  explosion  or 
earthquake. 

George  Watson  of  Acme  News  Photos  was  working 
in  his  laboratory  in  the  Daily  News  building  in  Los  Angeles 
one  March  day  in  1933  when  he  saw  the  developing  fluid 
spilling  out  the  pan  and  felt  the  floor  shaking  under  his  feet. 
He  felt  the  trembling  increase  with  recurrent  earthquake 
shocks.  It  was  no  time  to  stay  in  the  building.  He  grabbed 
his  camera,  rushed  into  the  street  and  took  pictures  of  a 
crumbling  structure.  Realizing  that  more  violent  tremblors 
may  topple  his  office  into  ruins,  he  rushed  back,  got  some 
developer  and  then  returned  to  the  street.  In  the  back  of  an 
automobile,  he  developed  his  plates  and  rushed  to  the  tele- 
photo  office  with  a  finished  negative  for  wire  transmission. 

Working  amid  mobs  bent  on  destruction  of  life  or  prop- 
erty is  dangerous  business  for  the  news  cameraman.  It  calls 
into  play  every  ounce  of  mental  and  physical  strength  and 
courage.  The  cameraman  has  oftimes  become  the  target 
of  the  crowd's  pent-up  hate  and  frenzy. 

The  leaders  of  a  mob,  especially  in  a  lynching,  do  not 


78  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

want  their  pictures  taken  for  fear  of  being  recognized  and 
prosecuted  by  the  law. 

A  lynching  mob  was  battering  down  the  doors  of  the 
San  Jose,  California,  jail  one  night  in  November,  1933,  to 
get  to  two  accused  slayers,  John  M.  Holmes  and  Thomas 
B.  Thurmond,  when  Louis  Gardner,  a  San  Jose  Mercury 
Herald  cameraman,  along  with  other  photographers,  started 
banging  away  with  their  cameras.  The  fury  of  the  crowd 
was  turned  on  him  when  he  set  off  the  flash  bulbs.  They 
were  bent  on  destroying  his  plates  and  camera.  Quickly  he 
turned  and  slipped  them  to  Paul  Leaman,  a  fellow  reporter, 
who  raced  out  of  the  crowd  and  tossed  them  into  the  auto- 
mobile of  Mrs.  Wilson  Albee,  wife  of  the  news  editor  of 
the  paper.  She  rushed  them  safely  to  the  office. 

Gardner  was  seized  and  searched,  and  elbowed  about  in 
a  rough  fashion,  before  he  was  released. 

Mob  fury  at  Salisbury,  Maryland,  in  November,  1933, 
spelled  many  an  anxious  moment  for  the  cameramen  and 
reporters  who  were  beaten  and  buffeted  before  they  were 
able  to  find  a  safe  retreat  in  a  hotel  room. 

The  militia  had  been  sent  by  Governor  Ritchie  to  arrest 
a  number  of  men  supposed  to  have  been  the  leaders  of  a 
mob  which  several  months  previous  had  lynched  George 
Armwood,  a  negro,  who  had  been  arrested  charged  with 
raping  an  aged  white  woman. 

After  the  militia  had  been  forced  to  retreat  in  face  of 
overwhelming  numbers,  the  crowd  wreaked  their  vengeance 
on  the  newspapermen.  Automobiles  and  cameras  were 
destroyed,  and  a  sound  truck  was  hurled  into  the  Wicomico 
River.  The  manager  of  the  hotel  where  they  were  stopping 
came  to  their  aid.  He  spirited  them  into  a  top  floor  room 
while  a  crowd  outside  and  in  the  lobby  were  yelling  for  them. 
Later  they  were  able  to  retreat  through  a  back  door  and 
race  for  planes  and  cars  in  waiting  outside  the  town  limits. 

Even  the  wrath  of  an  individual  who  is  averse  to  having 


GET   THAT    PICTURE  79 

his  or  her  picture  taken  may  be  turned  upon  the  photogra- 
pher. 

At  a  wrestling  match  in  Philadelphia  in  April,  1934, 
Donald  Corvelli,  an  Evening  Ledger  photographer,  was 
knocked  down  by  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt,  Jr.,  when  he  tried 
to  snap  his  picture.  With  a  shout  of:  "I  don't  like  to  have 
my  picture  taken!",  young  Roosevelt  jumped  on  the  camera 
several  times  to  destroy  it  as  well  as  the  plates.  But  quick 
thinking  saved  Corvelli's  shot.  He  managed  to  shove  the 
holder  under  his  coat  before  his  equipment  went  down  under 
the  stamping  of  feet.  It  appeared  the  next  day  in  Corvelli's 
paper. 

A  touch  of  the  humorous  may  sometimes  relieve  the 
tension  and  anxiety  on  a  picture  assignment.  It  smacked 
more  of  the  slapstick  comedy  of  the  early  movie  days  in  the 
following  story  of  George  Schmidt,  New  York  Daily  News 
photographer. 

Schmidt  was  assigned  to  cover  the  Bud  Stillman  wedding 
at  the  home  of  his  mother,  Mrs.  Fifi  Stillman,  at  Grand 
Anse,  Canada.  He  had  to  fly  from  Grand  Mere  50  miles 
up  the  St.  Maurice  River  to  get  to  the  house.  He  and 
John  O'Donnell,  a  fellow  reporter,  had  made  arrangements 
with  the  other  newspaper  reporters  and  cameramen  to 
cover  the  job  for  them.  The  News  men  were  to  get  the 
preliminary  stuff  that  day  and  fly  back  to  Grand  Mere  where 
the  rest  were  waiting.  Schmidt,  knowing  Mrs.  Stillman 
well  on  previous  assignments,  had  obtained  her  permission 
to  cover  the  wedding. 

After  circling  about  for  a  while,  the  flying  boat  finally 
managed  to  alight  in  log-filled  waters  close  to  the  shore  of 
a  small  island  opposite  the  Stillman  home.  An  employee 
of  Mrs.  Stillman's  seeing  them  alight  rowed  over  to  them 
and  brought  them  to  the  mainland  to  greet  Mrs.  Stillman. 
At  first  she  thought  they  were  guests.  When  she  learned 
they  were  newspapermen  she  ordered  them  to  get  out.  She 


8o  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

had  changed  her  mind  about  permitting  photographs  of  the 
wedding. 

Crestfallen,  they  went  back  to  the  island.  But  the  flying 
boat  could  not  take  off.  The  pilot  told  them  he  had  to  go 
back  alone  and  he  could  not  take  off  with  the  load  of  three 
persons.  There  they  were  stranded  on  the  island  and  dark- 
ness was  coming  on.  They  had  not  had  anything  to  eat 
since  morning.  They  hallooed  to  the  man  with  the  boat  who 
took  pity  on  them  and  brought  them  back  to  the  mainland. 
They  sat  themselves  down  on  a  back  road  hoping  that  a  car 
would  pass  to  take  them  to  the  nearest  town.  Darkness 
was  fast  approaching.  Mrs.  Stillman's  chef,  out  for  a  walk, 
saw  them  and  asked  them  into  the  kitchen  for  a  bite.  Sand- 
wiches and  tea  gulped  down,  they  surreptitiously  stole  back 
to  their  places  on  the  road. 

Finally  a  truck  carrying  chairs  for  the  wedding  taking 
place  the  following  day  hove  into  sight,  and  the  driver  told 
them  he  would  take  them  to  La  Toque  after  they  were 
through  unloading.  At  three  in  the  morning,  the  truck 
showed  up  again,  and  after  a  bumpy  ride  in  which  Schmidt 
thought  he  had  broken  his  plates,  arrived  at  La  Toque  at 
seven  o'clock. 

In  the  meantime  the  reporters  and  cameramen  awaiting 
impatiently  their  return  at  Grand  Mere  had  thought  that 
Schmidt  and  O'Donnell  had  doublecrossed  them,  so  they 
decided  to  take  a  train  to  La  Toque  and  then  go  by  car  to 
the  Stillman  home.  The  News  men  tumbled  out  of  the 
truck  as  the  others  were  getting  off  the  train,  and  there  were 
a  few  angry  words  passed  before  they  were  told  what  hap- 
pened. Grins  and  laughter  followed.  They  then  all  decided 
to  cover  the  wedding  en  masse. 

The  wedding  was  taking  place  on  the  lawn  as  the  news- 
papermen drove  up.  Decidedly,  no  pictures  would  be  al- 
lowed. The  place  was  barred.  The  cameramen  decided 
to  hop  the  fence.  The  bride  and  groom  were  cutting  the 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  8 1 

wedding  cake  when  the  photographers  stormed  the  grounds. 
Infuriated,  Mrs.  Stillman  dashed  to  the  end  of  the  table 
where  a  pile  of  large  plates  were  stacked,  and  one  by  one, 
started  hurling  them  at  the  photographers.  Weaving  in  and 
out,  ducking  the  plates,  the  cameramen  kept  on  shooting 
their  pictures.  Mrs.  Stillman  or  no  Mrs.  Stillman,  plates 
or  no  plates,  they  could  not  come  a  thousand  miles  without 
getting  their  shots.  Their  work  done,  they  scampered  back 
to  the  road  amid  the  angry  shouts  of  the  Canadian  back- 
woodsmen and  the  laughter  of  the  New  York  socialite 
guests. 

On  many  occasions,  newspaper  publishers  have  been 
forced  to  take  defensive  measures  to  protect  their  camera- 
men from  violence. 

During  a  textile  strike  in  Passaic  and  Clifton,  N.  J.  in 
March,  1926,  the  police  of  the  two  towns  beat  many  report- 
ers and  cameramen  in  an  attempt  to  keep  them  away  from 
the  mills.  There  was  much  talk  of  rough  police  tactics  in 
dealing  with  the  strikers,  and  the  police  did  not  want  the 
news  and  pictures  to  get  out.  Five  thousand  dollars  worth 
of  cameras  and  equipments  were  smashed  in  their  raids  on 
the  photographers. 

The  situation  was  serious.  The  New  York  Mirror  sent 
two  armored  cars  with  reporters  and  cameramen.  The  New 
York  News  sent  one. 

Despite  attempts  made  by  traffic  policemen  to  hold  them 
up  on  pretexts  of  traffic  violations,  they  got  through,  and 
the  newspapermen  got  their  pictures  and  stories. 

Covering  the  same  story,  Larry  Froeber,  Daily  News 
cameraman  and  other  photographers  were  on  the  roof  of  a 
building  snapping  the  scenes  of  a  riot.  Just  as  they  were 
about  to  leave,  with  their  backs  to  the  street,  they  were  seen 
by  the  police.  Larry  conducted  his  fellow  workers  into  an 
empty  room  a  few  stories  below  when  the  police  opened  the 
door.  But  they  had  hidden  their  cameras  in  an  old  stove. 


82  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

"Damned  glad  you  have  no  cameras,"  was  the  parting  shot 
of  the  police  as  they  walked  out. 

The  cameraman  has  braved  the  dangers  of  flood  and 
fire,  risked  his  life  in  war  and  peace  time  strife  and  run  the 
gauntlet  of  inflamed  mobs.  He  has  not  come  through  un- 
scathed. Clubs  have  left  their  marks  and  bullets  their 
wounds.  Many  a  photographer  has  laid  down  his  life  in  the 
line  of  duty. 

Many  years  ago  the  Goodyear  Company  launched  its 
first  blimp,  a  fourteen  passenger  craft.  It  was  to  make  a 
triumphant  flight  over  Chicago. 

Fourteen  men  board  the  blimp  for  an  inspection  flight 
over  the  city.  In  midair  the  ship  catches  fire.  The  men 
leap  from  the  ship  as  it  drops  into  the  heart,  of  the  city  and 
crashes  in  flames  on  the  roof  of  a  bank  building.  One  who 
leaps  is  Milton  Norton,  an  International  News  Photos 
cameraman,  but  not  until  after  he  had  made  a  shot  of  the 
fire.  His  parachute  floats  down  but  then  catches  on  the 
cornice  of  a  La  Salle  Street  building.  Norton  drops  four 
stories  to  the  street. 

When  he  awakens  for  a  brief  conscious  moment  his 
weary  eyes  encompass  the  circle  of  anxious  friends  and 
relatives,  and  he  whispers:  "How  did  my  plates  come  out?" 

A  loving  voice  replies:  "They  came  out  swell."  With 
a  smile  on  his  lips,  he  breathed  his  last.  He  never  knew 
that  the  negative  he  had  placed  in  his  hip  pocket  had  been 
pounded  into  a  thousand  bits. 

Back  of  all  these  thrilling  stories  of  the  unsung  heroes 
of  the  press  lies  just  one  dominant  and  all-compelling  pur- 
pose— the  will  to  serve  his  editor  and  the  public  well.  His 
is  the  song  and  sage  of  the  mechanized  world  in  which  we 
live;  he  seeks  no  honors,  no  glory,  he  goes  about  his  daily 
duties  with  but  a  single  thought  in  mind,  a  simple  and  pro- 
found loyalty  to  his  profession. 

He  is  the  Man  behind  the  camera ! 


Chapter  VI. 

FURTHER  ADVENTURES  OF  THE  NEWS 
CAMERAMAN 

After  many  years  of  tilting  with  adventure  in  Hawaii, 
Samoa,  Russia,  the  Philippines,  in  which  he  recorded  with 
facile  pen  the  thrill  and  danger  of  revolution,  war,  intrigue 
and  the  day-in-and-day-out  event,  prosaic  recording  but 
never  lacking  in  color,  Linton  Wells,  world  famous  cor- 
respondent, finally  returned  to  his  home  soil  in  1921 — a 
welcome  respite  from  the  swirling  currents  of  the  Orient. 
He  settled  in  Hollywood  and  wrote  articles  on  the  movie 
colony  glamor.  It  was  not  long  before  Wells,  who  could 
produce  as  fine  a  news  picture  as  he  could  a  thrilling  yarn 
for  page  one,  was  called  upon  to  play  the  master  role  in 
one  of  the  most  exciting  picture  stunts  ever  pulled. 

Wells  was  in  Los  Angeles  when  the  flash  was  received 
that  the  liner  City  of  Honolulu  caught  fire  seven  hundred 
miles  from  Los  Angeles  while  on  her  maiden  trip  from 
Honolulu,  and  soon  afterward,  the  relieving  word  that  the 
United  States  Army  transport  Thomas  had  rescued  every 
passenger  and  member  of  the  crew  and  was  bringing  them 
to  San  Pedro.  Wells,  at  the  time,  was  Pacific  Coast 
manager  of  the  Pacific  and  Atlantic  Photos,  syndicate  of 
the  Chicago  Tribune  and  New  York  Daily  News,  which 
had  been  organized  late  in  1921  to  service  the  two  live 
newspapers  with  the  best  news  pictures  from  all  parts  of 
the  world,  and  later  to  branch  into  one  of  the  largest 
distributors  of  news  and  feature  reproductions. 

Without  losing  a  moment's  time,  he  flashed  a  radio 
message  to  the  survivors  aboard  the  Thomas  bidding  for 
pictures  of  the  burning  ship  and  the  actual  scenes  of  the 


84  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

rescue.  An  answer  was  given  that  he  could  get  six  rolls 
of  undeveloped  film  for  $150,  which  he  accepted. 

Then  he  went  to  work  on  a  plan  of  action.  Un- 
doubtedly, other  picture  agencies  were  also  bidding  for 
pictures  taken  of  the  disaster.  It  would  not  do  to  wait 
for  the  perfunctory  arrival  of  the  ship  at  San  Pedro.  So 
he  hit  upon  the  idea  of  boarding  the  Thomas  somewhere 
at  sea  to  obtain  the  first  photographs  and  interviews.  A 
wireless  to  the  Captain  requesting  permission  to  do  so  was 
answered  with  a  curt  refusal.  The  Captain  bluntly  stated 
that  he  would  not  pick  up  anyone.  Undaunted,  Wells  went 
ahead  with  his  plans.  He  chartered  a  flying  boat  and  took 
off  in  search  of  the  rescue  ship. 

Visibility  was  perfect.  The  sea  was  as  smooth  as  glass. 
Wells  figured  that  the  Thomas  would  be  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Santa  Barbara  Channel,  so  he  ordered  the  pilot 
to  fly  in  that  direction.  Sighting  the  ship,  the  aviator 
maneuvered  the  plane  until  it  was  about  fifty  feet  above 
the  water.  Wells  then  rose  from  his  seat  in  the  bow, 
tightened  his  life  jacket,  muttered  a  prayer,  and  leaped 
over  the  side.  Inside  the  jacket,  encased  in  waterproof 
material,  was  a  wad  of  five  hundred  dollars. 

When,  after  what  seemed  an  eternity,  he  rose  to  the 
surface,  he  shook  the  water  from  his  eyes  and  glanced 
around.  The  plane  was  already  heading  back  toward  the 
California  shore.  The  Thomas  loomed  ahead  in  the 
distance.  Minutes  of  waving,  and  then  Wells  saw  a  life- 
boat being  lowered.  He  breathed  a  sigh  of  relief.  He 
felt  he  could  not  have  stayed  much  longer  in  the  cold 
water  which  seemed  to  be  paralyzing  him  from  shoulder 
to  toe.  In  a  short  while  he  was  hoisted  aboard  and  faced 
the  Captain.  A  torrent  of  abuse  escaped  from  the  Cap- 
tain's lips  when  he  told  him  the  purpose  of  the  stunt,  but 
after  much  pleading,  the  skipper  relented  and  he  was 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  85 

allowed  to  seek  his  interviews  and  purchase  his  rolls  of 
film. 

Fifteen  minutes  of  fast  work  brought  him  enough 
words  and  undeveloped  film  to  fill  many  newspaper  pages. 
In  the  meanwhile  he  kept  an  eagle  eye  open  for  the  return 
of  the  plane.  It  soon  came  into  sight  and  made  a  perfect 
landing  some  distance  from  the  starboard  bow.  Wrapping 
his  films  and  notes  in  the  waterproof  material,  he  dived 
overboard.  Swimming  furiously,  he  fought  his  way  from 
the  sucking  currents  around  the  ship  to  meet  the  seaplane 
taxiing  toward  him.  He  was  hauled  into  the  plane's  cock- 
pit, and  in  a  trice,  they  were  in  the  air,  winging  full  speed 
toward  San  .Pedro.  Three  hours  later  he  was  in  Los 
Angeles  with  the  first  pictures  and  stories  of  the  disaster — 
a  full  twelve  hour  beat  over  his  competitors. 

Some  time  later,  Wells  figured  in  another  news  photo- 
graphic exploit  which  revealed  him  as  a  man  of  extra- 
ordinary courage  and  ingenuity. 

Forty-seven  miners  were  trapped  4600  feet  under- 
ground when  a  cave-in  followed  by  fire  on  an  upper  level 
cut  off  their  escape  in  the  gold-bearing  Argonaut  Mine  at 
Jackson,  California,  a  town  of  5000  inhabitants  in  the 
mountains  of  Amador  County.  A  desperate  attempt  to 
rescue  them  by  boring  a  tunnel  through  an  adjacent  shaft 
was  being  started  when  scores  of  newspaper  men  and 
women  and  photographers  converged  on  the  grief  stricken 
town.  Day  and  night,  without  a  moment's  letup,  the 
rescue  party  toiled  on,  ever  beset  by  fears  that  they  could 
not  reach  the  trapped  men  in  time.  It  was  a  grim  drama 
that  electrified  the  world. 

But  the  reporters  and  photographers  were  confronted 
with  a  problem  which  threatened  to  nip  in  the  bud  one  of 
the  best  stories  in  years.  The  citizens  of  Jackson  were  a 
tough  lot,  a  law  unto  themselves,  and  they  were  "agin" 
the  jidea  of  publicizing  their  misfortune.  So  they  con- 
tinually harassed  the  representatives  of  the  press,  goading 


86  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

them  into  fights,  reviling  and  threatening  them.  With  the 
days  passing,  the  tension  became  greater,  and  the  nerves 
of  everyone  were  ready  to  snap.  The  bellicose  Sheriff  of 
Amador  County  was  gun  and  shield  behind  the  residents 
and  lined  up  solidly  with  them  to  hinder  the  work  of  the 
newsmen  and  women,  with  instructions  to  shoot  any  man 
on  mine  property  with  a  camera.  His  favorite  reply  to 
protests  was:  uGet  the  hell  out  of  here  if  you  don't  like 
the  way  you're  being  treated!" 

The  day  approached  when  the  rescue  party  was  about 
to  break  through  to  the  entombed  miners.  The  photogra- 
phers were  gathered  on  the  porch  of  the  hotel  discussing 
the  ways  and  means  of  getting  pictures  at  the  mine 
entrance.  A  group  of  citizens  heard  them  and  sauntered 
over. 

"Listen,  you  fellows,"  one  husky  shouted,  "I'm  warn- 
ing you.  Get  the  hell  out  of  this  town,  and  get  out  quick. 
I've  got  a  brother  down  there,  and  if  any  one  of  you  guys 
starts  taking  pictures>  I'm  startin'  shootin'."  The  others 
nodded  their  heads  in  assent.  A  second  voiced  a  like  warn- 
ing. A  third  and  fourth  followed  suit.  The  sheriff  in  the 
meantime  had  given  strict  orders  that  no  pictures  were  to 
be  taken  at  the  mine  entrance.  The  outlook  was  hopeless. 
Most  of  the  photographers  that  day  packed  up  and  left 
town. 

Wells  had  been  assigned  to  take  pictures  as  well  as 
cover  the  news.  Reluctant  to  leave,  he  decided  to  wire 
his  boss,  Teddy  Beck,  managing  editor  of  the  Chicago 
Tribune.  The  answer  came  back:  "Get  pictures.  Dead 
or  alive."  He  went  into  consultation  with  his  associate, 
B.  W.  Hellings,  San  Francisco  bureau  manager.  They 
decided  that  if  Beck  wants  pictures,  he'll  get  them. 

They  then  bought  two  vest  pocket  Kodaks  which  they 
placed  inside  their  caps,  cutting  holes  in  them  so  the 
lenses  would  have  free  play.  They  then  tested  their 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  87 

ability  to  focus  the  cameras  blindly,  press  the  trigger  and 
turn  the  film  accurately  without  attracting  attention. 

In  the  meantime  word  had  been  flashed  that  the  rescue 
party  had  broken  through  and  found  the  trapped  men 
dead.  Wells  posted  himself  at  the  mine  entrance  while 
Hellings  went  to  the  cyanide  mill  where  the  bodies  were  to 
be  taken  to  be  prepared  for  burial.  Seating  himself  on  a 
pile  of  lumber,  Wells  placed  the  cap  covering  the  camera 
on  his  knee.  jNearby  was  a  deputy  sheriff  with  a  .45 
hanging  from  his  hip.  The  first  three  corpses  were  being 
carried  out  of  the  shaft  and  lifted  onto  stretchers  a  scant 
ten  feet  away  from  Wells.  He  pressed  the  trigger.  In 
his  ears  the  click  sounded  like  a  boom  of  thunder.  But  the 
sheriff  made  no  move.  He  was  safe.  He  twisted  the 
roller-key  and  shot  again.  After  his  roll  of  film  was 
taken,  Wells  rose,  stretched,  and  walked  casually  back  to 
his  car. 

In  the  meantime  Hellings  had  been  employing  the 
same  surreptitious  methods  to  get  pictures  of  the  bodies 
laid  out  in  the  temporary  morgue.  They  met  at  a  pre- 
arranged spot,  and  then  hurried  over  to  the  darkroom  of 
a  local  photographer  which  they  had  hired.  They  were 
overwhelmed  with  joy  to  find  that  both  strips  of  film  were 
perfect.  There  wasn't  a  single  out-of-focus  shot.  In  a 
little  while  they  were  on  their  way  to  a  plane  which  they 
had  kept  waiting  for  a  week.  Off  like  a  shot,  they  headed 
for  Mather  Field  in  Sacramento,  and  soon  afterward,  the 
only  pictures  ever  taken  of  the  dead  miners  were  aboard 
an  eastbound  train — a  perfect  scoop ! 

A  week  later,  Wells  received  a  warning  that  he  better 
never  set  foot  again  in  Amador  County — or  else! 

Thus  the  ingenious  cameraman  learns  how  to  overcome 
all  opposition.  Sometimes,  as  in  the  case  of  Wells  and 
Hellings,  it  is  the  wrath  of  a  citizenry,  backed  up  with 
guns,  which  they  have  to  face.  Other  times,  company 
officials  remain  adamant.  It  may  be  a  mine  disaster,  an 


88  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

explosion,  a  fire,  a  strike — it's  a  set  of  circumstances 
enough  to  break  down  any  man's  morale  and  almost  forces 
him  to  go  slinking  back  to  the  office  with  the  weak  plea 
that  there  are  simply  no  pictures  to  be  made. 

But  the  trigger-quick  cameraman  nine  times  out  of  ten 
will  work  out  a  solution.  Take  the  case  of  Anthony 
Camerano,  a  youthful  mainstay  on  the  staff  of  the  Associ- 
ated Press  Photo  Syndicate. 

The  night  editor  had  received  word  that  the  workers 
in  the  power  house  of  the  Brooklyn  Manhattan  Transit 
Company  had  staged  a  sit-down  strike.  It  threatened  a 
complete  tie-up  of  one  of  the  two  main  subway  lines  in 
Brooklyn.  Camerano,  on  the  night  trick,  was  assigned 
to  go  to  the  Kent  Avenue  plant.  On  his  arrival  there  he 
met  a  score  of  other  cameramen  milling  around  in  front  of 
the  plant.  It  meant  the  usual  pictures — a  night  flash  of 
the  exterior,  a  shot  of  the  strikers  bunched  at  the  windows 
jeering  and  laughing  at  the  police  and  crowd  below  them. 
But  Camerano  wanted  an  interior  shot,  and  he  was  de- 
termined to  get  it.  But  how?  The  police  firmly  ruled 
no  photographer  was  to  be  allowed  in. 

Camerano  glanced  upward  and  saw  that  one  of  the 
first  story  windows  where  some  of  the  strikers  were  gath- 
ered was  about  fifteen  feet  above  the  ground.  He  went 
into  action  immediately.  Beckoning  Frank  Gebman,  an- 
other news  photographer,  to  one  side,  he  whispered  his 
plans  into  Frank's  ear.  They  turned  and  saw  the  police 
at  a  fairly  safe  distance  from  the  spot.  Cautiously  mak- 
ing their  way  to  a  place  directly  below  the  window, 
Camerano  huskily  whispered  to  one  of  the  strikers :  uHey, 
buddy,  make  a  shot  for  me.  I'll  get  the  camera  up  to 
you."  The  striker,  stirred  by  the  boldness  of  the  stunt, 
replied  that  he  would.  Up  went  Gebman  on  Camerano's 
shoulders  and  handed  over  the  camera  to  the  striker,  giv- 
ing him  a  few  crisp  instructions  how  to  use  it.  In  a  min- 
ute, the  camera  plotters  saw  the  reflection  of  a  flash.  They 


©  Acme  Newspictures 

A  BLOW  THAT  ALMOST  COST  TUNNEY  HIS  TITLE 

Jack  Dempsey  landing  the  blow  that  floored  Jack  Tunney  and  kept  him  on 

the    canvas    for   thirteen    seconds    during-    their    battle    for    the    heavyweight 

crown  at  Chicago,   September  22,   1927.     Tunney  resumed  the  fight  and  won, 

retaining  his   crown. 


©    International    Newspictures 

HO-HUM— MOVIE    LIFE    IS    SO    BORING 

Brought   to   Hollywood   to   act   in   the   movies,    Big   Blaze   prefers   his   native 

haunts  in  Africa,  and  gives  one  big  yawn  to  make  you  realize  he's  tired  of 

the    movie    lots.      More    of    that    fearsome    display    of    sharp    teeth,    and    he 

will    probably   be    sent    back. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  89 

smiled.  There  Hvas  a  chance  that  the  fellow  up  there 
might  have  missed,  but  still.  .  .  .  Gebman  climbed  on 
Camerano's  shoulders  once  again,  reached  for  the  camera, 
whispered  many  thanks,  and  amid  the  cheers  of  the  strik- 
ers, raced  quickly  from  the  scene.  Later,  the  shot  was 
found  to  be  perfect.  The  two  conspirators  would  have 
liked  to  have  taken  one  more  grand  shot — the  look  of 
bewilderment  and  chagrin  on  the  faces  of  the  company 
executives  when  they  saw  the  picture  in  a  page-one  spread 
in  the  morning  papers. 

Camerano  is  a  brave  fellow.  Just  one  of  a  legion  of 
camera  bearers  who  withstand  all  the  rigors  of  their 
profession  without  a  murmur  and  take  injuries  in  the  stride 
without  a  twitch  of  a  muscle. 

Tony,  as  he  is  popularly  called  by  his  co-workers,  was 
covering  the  sinking  of  the  steamer  Lexington  in  the  East 
River  one  cold  Winter  night.  With  a  boy  to  assist  him 
in  carrying  the  equipment,  he  had  rushed  down  to  the 
vicinity  of  the  Brooklyn  Bridge.  From  the  end  of  a  New 
York  shore  pier  he  made  a  couple  of  shots  of  the  funnel 
sticking  up  out  of  the  river's  murky  depths.  He  then 
learned  that  the  main  part  of  the  wreck  was  a  half  mile 
further  upstream.  On  the  run,  Tony  and  the  boy  jumped 
into  a  taxi  which  he  had  kept  waiting  and  headed  for  the 
scene. 

,He  reached  for  his  spread  pan.  The  bright  flare  from 
the  magnesium  powder  was  what  was  needed  to  illumine 
enough  of  the  scene  to  bring  the  wreckage  into  sharp 
relief.  From  a  small  bottle  he  dumped  about  two  ounces 
of  the  dangerous  powder  onto  the  pan.  He  could  hardly 
keep  it  steady.  A  strong  wind  was  blowing.  He  reached 
into  the  case  for  his  gloves  but  then  suddenly  remembered 
that  he  had  left  them  in  the  office.  Without  them  he 
realized  that  there  would  be  some  danger  to  the  job,  but 
without  stopping  to  weigh  the  consequences,  he  kept  on 
with  his  preparations  for  taking  the  picture. 


90  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

As  he  tried  desperately  to  steady  the  pan,  the  wind 
blew  some  of  the  powder  onto  his  bare  hand.  He  pulled 
the  flash,  and  then  a  terrible  pain  shot  through  him.  The 
spread  pan  clattered  to  the  ground.  The  flash  had  ig- 
nited the  loose  powder  on  his  hand.  He  took  one  glance 
at  it.  It  was  a  backened  mass  from  finger  tips  to  wrist. 
But  Tony  realized  that  one  shot  would  not  suffice  on  a 
story  of  that  magnitude.  Biting  his  lips  from  pain,  Tony 
had  his  assistant  give  him  four  more  holders  and  then 
made  four  more  shots.  When  they  reached  the  office,  he 
handed  over  the  holders  to  the  editor  in  methodical  fash- 
ion and  then  asked  for  medical  assistance.  He  was  rushed 
to  the  hospital  in  a  cab.  But  Camerano  was  not  content 
to  rest  until  the  doctor  had  phoned  the  office  and  learned 
that  all  his  shots  were  good.  He  stayed  in  the  hospital 
until  his  hand  healed. 

Many  photographers  have  been  thrust  into  a  "battle 
line"  of  a  story  with  but  a  minute's  warning,  and,  as  a 
result,  they  have  Jiad  to  suffer  tortures  because  of  the 
lack  of  adequate  safeguards.  But  they  never  uttered  a 
squeal  so  long  as  they  had  their  trusty  cameras  and  plenty 
of  loaded  holders  and  bulbs.  Fair  weather  or  foul,  cam- 
eramen have  dashed  into  the  cockpits  of  planes  wearing 
their  ordinary  street  clothes,  hardly  suitable  to  withstand 
the  rain  or  snow  or  the  low  temperatures  of  high  altitudes, 
others  have  recklessly  plunged  into  the  thick  of  a  tear  gas 
attack  in  a  strike  with  no  masks  or  other  protection 
against  the  noxious  effects.  And  it  is  a  common  occur- 
rence for  a  cameraman  to  go  without  food  and  sleep, 
sometimes  for  hours  stretching  into  days,  suffering  these 
privations  until  he  has  definitely  "cleaned  up"  the  story. 

When  Ernest  Sisto,  a  veteran  wizard  of  the  news  lens, 
was  told  to  load  his  case  in  a  hurry  and  grab  the  first  train 
for  Port  Jervis  one  August  day  in  1928,  he  little  knew 
what  troubles  were  in  store  for  him.  He  had  just  returned 
from  an  ordinary  ship  news  assignment,  having  been  up 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  91 

since  five  that  morning.  Thoughts  of  a  hot  dinner  were 
tickling  his  palate  when  the  first  words  hurled  at  him  as 
he  entered  the  workroom  of  the  Wide  World  Photos  in  the 
New  York  Times  Annex  were:  "Merrill's  plane  wreckage 
has  been  found  near  Milford,  Pennsylvania,  right  near  the 
New  York  border.  Get  to  Port  Jervis  quickly  and  go  on 
from  there.  It's  way  up  in  the  mountains." 

The  thoughts  that  he  was  hungry  and  tired,  and  the 
fact  that  he  was  wearing  a  thin  summer  suit  and  ordinary 
street  shoes,  were  not  in  his  mind.  Plenty  of  holders, 
bulbs,  his  camera — destination,  Port  Jervis — time,  half 
hour  to  catch  the  train  on  the  Jersey  side.  Snatching  a 
flimsy,  a  report  of  the  story  which  had  come  over  the  wire, 
he  dashed  into  the  elevator  and  was  off.  Weaving  in  and 
out  of  traffic  in  the  cab  which  he  had  hailed  on  the  corner 
he  had  time  to  glimpse  a  summary  of  the  facts :  The 
wreckage  of  the  plane  in  which  Mazel  (Merry)  Merrill, 
director  of  the  Curtiss  Flying  Service  on  Long  Island, 
and  Edwin  M.  Ronne,  manager  of  the  Buffalo  Airport, 
were  flying  from  New  York  to  Buffalo,  was  sighted  by 
pilots  on  a  mountain  top  near  Milford,  and  a  searching 
party  had  been  organized  to  go  by  foot  to  the  scene  of  the 
crash. 

Reaching  Port  Jervis,  Sisto  learned  that  a  number  of 
news  photographers  had  already  arrived  there  and  gone 
on  ahead  with  the  searching  party.  A  hired  xar  bumped 
him  along  a  narrow,  winding  path  to  the  foot  of  the 
mountain.  Before  him  were  the  dense  woods  stretching 
upward  along  the  mountain  side.  There  was  a  narrow 
path  which  seemingly  led  into  the  heart  of  the  dense 
foliage,  and  he  decided  to  follow  that.  It  was  a  tortuous 
climb.  With  every  step  the  strap  of  the  camera  case  cut 
deeper  into  his  neck  and  shoulders.  The  going  became 
tougher.  Finally  the  path  dwindled  into  hardly  more  than 
a  rail  width  and  then  stopped.  He  hesitated  for  a 
moment.  In  what  direction  should  he  go?  Before  him 


92  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

lay  a  thick  tangle  of  trees  and  brush.  He  studied  the 
ground  carefully  and  found  faint  impressions  of  foot- 
prints. He  went  on  ahead,  but  would  stop  every  now  and 
again  to  look  for  the  telltale  evidence  of  trampled  ground 
and  bent  or  broken  branches.  Finally,  after  what  seemed 
like  days,  he  heard  a  faroff  sound  of  voices.  Gasping  for 
breath,  he  struggled  forward  and  almost  collapsed  as  he 
sighted  the  group  amid  the  wreckage  strewn  over  a  wide 
area. 

The  troopers  and  civilians  were  placing  the  mangled 
remains  of  the  fliers  into  wicker  baskets,  and  the  photo- 
graphers were  training  their  cameras  on  the  twisted 
fuselage  and  broken  motor.  They  turned  to  look  at  him 
in  amazement.  One  of  the  men  came  forward  and  stead- 
ied him.  "How  did  yuh  ever  find  us?",  he  asked.  "Even 
trappers  would  a  had  trouble  gettin'  here.  And  lands 
sakes,  man,  do  yuh  know  these  woods  are  full  o'  snakes 
and  wildcats?"  The  burly  farmhand  looked  down  at  the 
cameraman  in  admiration.  "Well,  I'm  here,"  Sisto  weakly 
replied,  and  went  to  work  opening  his  case  and  getting  his 
camera  and  holders  ready  for  action.  What  mattered  that 
his  clothes  were  torn  in  a  dozen  places  and  that  he  could 
hardly  stand  from  a  pain  that  shot  upward  from  his  soles 
to  his  knees.  There  were  pictures  to  be  taken ! 

The  searchers  were  already  starting  their  return  trip, 
the  wicker  baskets  with  the  grim  remains  swinging  between 
two  long  sticks  held  tightly  in  their  hands,  when  Sisto 
completed  a  half  dozen  shots  of  the  wreckage.  He  thought 
a  shot  of  the  men  holding  the  baskets  would  be  worth- 
while, but  the  sharp  command  of  a  trooper  stopped  him. 
"Nuthin'  doin',  buddy",  he  shouted,  and  he  held  a  pistol 
in  his  hand  to  back  up  his  warning.  Sisto  rejoined  the 
photographers.  "Gee,  that  would  be  a  swell  shot,"  he 
kept  muttering  on  his  way  back,  and  then  an  idea  flashed 
in  his  mind.  "Let's  help  'em  carry  the  baskets  down,  and 
maybe  they'll  soften  a  bit."  So  with  their  camera  cases 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  93 

tugging  at  their  backs,  the  cameramen  took  turns  helping 
the  party.  Sisto,  in  spite  of  a  hundred  aches,  was  one  of 
them.  It  was  his  idea,  so  he  couldn't  reneg.  He  glanced 
at  his  companions.  They  seemed  prepared  for  this  emerg- 
ency. They  had  on  leather  jackets  and  high  heavy  shoes. 
Well,  he  would  know  better  next  time.  He  kept  on  hob- 
bling like  a  wounded  rabbit. 

When  they  reached  the  edge  of  the  woods,  the  troopers 
relented  and  allowed  the  cameramen  to  take  the  pictures 
they  wanted  so  badly.  They  figured  the  fellows  deserved 
at  least  that  much  for  being  so  helpful. 

The  cameramen  reached  Port  Jervis  just  in  time  to 
catch  a  train;  not  a  moment  to  spare  to  stop  for  even  a 
sandwich.  They  were  too  tired  even  to  talk  of  food. 
Sisto  slumped  down  in  his  seat.  Numbed  so  by  fatigue 
he  was  insensible  to  pain,  and  in  a  few  minutes  he  was  fast 
asleep.  One  of  the  fellows  looked  down  and  saw  a  splotch 
of  blood  at  Sisto's  feet.  They  bent  down  and  removed 
his  shoes.  His  ankles  had  been  scraped  through  clean 
to  the  bone.  The  bottoms  of  the  shoes  were  filled  with  a 
half  inch  of  blood.  They  bound  his  feet  with  handker- 
chiefs. Sisto  slept  through  it  all. 

Photographers  who  covered  the  story  of  Floyd  Collins 
trapped  in  Sand  Cave  near  Cave  City,  Kentucky,  in  the 
early  part  of  1925,  suffered  the  privations  of  hunger  and 
lack  of  sleep  for  two  solid  weeks,  but  they  realized  that  it 
was  nothing  in  face  of  the  tortures  the  trapped  man  was 
enduring  in  his  vain  effort  to  escape.  They  only  hoped 
and  prayed  that  he  could  be  brought  out  alive.  The  drama 
of  the  grim  struggle  to  free  the  man  had  gripped  the 
world.  The  tunnel  which  led  to  the  place  where  Collins 
was  locked  in  had  collapsed.  It  necessitated  the  driving 
of  a  shaft  which  took  two  weeks.  The  fight  was  fruitless. 
Collins  was  found  dead.  During  all  that  time  the  photog- 
raphers were  ever  on  the  scene  not  daring  to  leave  for  a 


94  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

moment   lest  the   flash  come   that   the   rescue   party   had 
finally  reached  him. 

William  Eckenberg,  a  Wide  World  photographer,  who 
was  rushed  from  New  York  to  cover  the  story,  relates  that 
in  the  beginning  he  had  taken  a  hotel  room  in  Cave  City 
which  meant  continuous  riding  back  and  forth  over  a  bad 
12-mile  stretch  of  road.  As  the  story  grew,  and  efforts 
were  intensified  to  reach  the  victim,  Eckenberg  realized 
that  he  would  have  to  stay  on  the  scene  every  moment  of 
the  day  and  night.  He  gave  up  his  hotel  room  and  lived 
at  the  cave  site.  He  says  that  for  the  last  four  days  of 
the  story  he  never  got  to  bed,  and  lived  for  the  best  part 
of  the  time  on  greasy  sausages.  He  lost  twenty  pounds 
covering  the  story.  Though  he  was  one  of  the  fortunate 
few  to  escape  having  pneumonia,  he  went  down  with  a 
bad  case  of  influenza  two  days  after  returning  to  New 
York. 

Eckenberg  recalls  an  interesting  experience  during  the 
coverage  of  the  story.  It  reveals  the  unflagging  zeal  of  a 
cameraman  to  cover  all  angles,  not  daring  to  miss  a  single 
shot,  even  though  worn  by  fatigue  and  hunger.  One 
midnight  he  heard  that  an  opposition  photographer  had 
secured  a  copy  of  a  picture  Collins  had  made  ten  days 
before  he  was  trapped.  There  wasn't  a  moment  to  lose. 
The  picture  was  in  a  town  80  miles  away.  Eckenberg 
hopped  into  his  car  and  drove  it  at  full  speed  over  rain- 
lashed,  winding  roads.  He  finally  secured  the  original 
print,  made  flashlight  copies  just  in  time  to  make  a  train 
connection  for  New  York.  The  undeveloped  negative 
reached  his  home  office  in  time  to  give  him  an  even  break 
with  the  opposition. 

Being  caught  between  two  fires  is  not  an  unusual  pre- 
dicament for  the  photographer  when  he  is  covering  a  strike 
riot  or  a  flareup  during  a  demonstration,  but  Jerry 
Frankel,  a  New  York  Journal  cameraman,  never  expected 
to  be  caught  in  that  fashion  when  he  was  told  by  the  city 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  95 

editor  to  go  to  a  house  in  the  upper  'yo's  and  photograph 
a  certain  young  woman. 

At  the  time,  the  police  were  searching  high  and  low 
for  Two-Gun  Crowley,  a  young  desperado.  He  had  taken 
the  life  of  a  policeman  in  Long  Island,  and  he  was  be- 
lieved to  be  involved  in  a  number  of  subsequent  shootings. 
The  city  editor  had  received  an  anonymous  tip  that  the 
young  woman  was  a  friend  of  Crowley's.  This  informa- 
tion was  never  imparted  to  Jerry.  He  left  the  office 
thinking  it  was  just  another  casual  assignment. 

Jerry  arrived  at  the  address,  a  brownstone  house, 
climbed  a  flight  of  stairs  and  knocked  on  the  door.  A 
voice  boomed  from  behind  the  door:  "What  d'ye  want?", 
and  then  the  door  was  thrown  open.  Jerry  was  face  to 
face  with  a  man  whose  eyes  glittered  in  wrath.  Jerry 
asked  for  Miss  .  .  .  .,  and  the  door  slammed  in  his  face. 
"Well,  isn't  he  the  kind  soul,"  he  mused,  and  retreated 
to  the  first  floor  landing.  Just  as  his  hand  rested  on  the 
knob  to  turn  it,  a  crash  of  gunfire  split  the  air.  Then  a 
return  blast  from  the  room  above  him.  A  bullet  tore 
through  the  vestibule  door,  a  scant  few  inches  from  where 
he  stood.  He  flattened  himself  against  the  wall.  Sudden- 
ly, a  lull  in  the  shooting,  and  then  the  door  crashed  in. 
A  half  dozen  policemen  streamed  in,  and  he  found  himself 
looking  into  the  muzzles  of  pistols,  while  he  quakingly  ex- 
plained who  he  was.  They  told  him  they've  got  Two-Gun 
Crowley  cornered  in  the  room  above  them.  Jerry  was  no 
longer  the  quaking  soul.  In  a  few  minutes  he  was  every- 
where around  the  building,  shooting  pictures  of  the  man- 
acled Crowley  and  the  room  in  which  he  had  made  his 
last  stand.  Then  back  to  the  office  with  the  first  pictures 
on  the  story — and  a  grand  beat.  His  eye-witness  story 
went  into  the  first  editions,  and  over  the  wires — and  made 
his  triumph  complete. 

Dodging  bullets  and  tear  gas  bombs  kept  the  camera- 
men on  the  qui  vive  while  shooting  pictures  of  the  steel 


96  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

strike  disorders  in  Pennsylvania,  Ohio,  Michigan,  Indiana 
and  Illinois  during  the  late  Spring  of  1937.  The  news 
photographers  were  right  in  the  thick  of  the  battles  at 
Warren  and  Youngstown  in  Ohio,  at  Monroe,  Michigan, 
at  Johnstown,  Pennsylvania,  and  at  the  fatal  clash  at 
South  Chicago  in  which  eleven  persons  were  killed  and  a 
hundred  injured.  It  was  gruelling  time  for  the  boys.  It 
meant  for  most  of  them  to  be  on  the  job  nearly  24  hours 
of  the  day  for  no  one  could  tell  where  the  next  flareup 
would  occur.  Their  press  passes  meant  little  or  nothing 
to  the  police  and  strikers  locked  in  battle.  Oftimes  they 
became  the  special  targets  for  both  sides. 

There  was  trouble  brewing  in  Monroe  when  Albert 
Haut,  Detroit  manager  of  the  Wide  World  Photos,  was 
advised  by  the  New  York  editor  to  get  there  in  a  hurry. 
The  Republic  Steel  Company  officials  were  determined  to 
reopen  their  plant  on  a  specified  day,  and  the  pickets  were 
just  as  determined  to  prevent  the  reopening. 

Haut  arrived  in  Monroe  a  day  before  the  strikers 
were  to  be  ousted  from  their  picket  line  located  about  a 
half  mile  from  the  plant  on  the  only  accessible  road  which 
they  had  blocked  off.  After  shooting  pictures  of  the 
pickets  halting  cars,  policing  the  road  and  breakfasting  at 
the  commissary  tent,  he  rushed  back  to  photograph  the 
deputies  being  sworn  in  as  part  of  the  vigilante  group 
which  the  mayor  was  gathering.  Then  off  to  the  hired 
darkroom  where  he  developed  his  negatives,  made  prints 
and  proceeded  to  send  wired  photo  transmissions  to  vari- 
ous newspapers  throughout  the  United  States. 

The  real  trouble  was  expected  on  the  morrow.  Haut 
surveyed  the  scene  of  the  possible  riot,  and  decided  that 
the  best  vantage  point  would  be  the  main  road  where  the 
two  forces,  the  vigilantes  and  the  pickets,  would  un- 
doubtedly meet.  On  one  side  was  a  branch  road  and  on 
the  other  a  lake.  Haut  figured  that  a  hired  truck  would 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  97 

be  a  swell  thing  to  give  the  photographers  elevation  and 
ability  to  maneuver  quickly  for  good  position. 

He  talked  it  over  with  the  other  cameramen.  They 
liked  the  idea.  The  truck  was  hired  and  placed  in  what 
they  thought  was  the  best  position.  The  men  were  ready 
for  the  "fireworks."  Some  ground  shots  were  made  as 
the  foes  clashed.  Then  from  somewhere  a  tear  gas  bomb 
was  thrown  among  the  strikers.  A  strike  sympathizer 
pointed  to  the  cameramen  and  insisted  that  one  of  them 
had  thrown  it.  Suddenly,  without  warning,  a  veritable 
barrage  of  tear  gas  bombs  burst  over  and  around  the 
truck.  Some  pickets  dashed  over  and  started  using  the 
truck  as  a  barricade.  That  meant  a  new  deluge  of  tear 
and  nauseating  gas  bombs.  Between  shooting  pictures  and 
ducking  the  bombs,  the  cameramen  had  their  hands  full. 
With  tears  streaming  down  their  faces  and  many  vomiting 
from  the  effects  of  the  nauseating  gas,  the  photographers 
shouted  to  the  vigilantes  to  stop  shooting,  but  of  no 
avail.  The  bombs  fell  thicker. 

The  cameramen  then  decided  to  take  their  truck  down 
the  road,  but  the  pickets  followed  them.  The  fighting  was 
scattered  in  all  directions,  and  their  truck  maneuvered 
back  and  forth  as  the  fighting  progressed  around  them. 
In  spite  of  the  thick  fumes,  Haut  remembered  to  take  two 
precautions  which  kept  him  on  the  job  shooting  his  pictures 
without  a  letup.  One  was  not  to  rub  his  eyes  and  the 
other  to  take  a  deep  breath  when  he  saw  a  nauseating  gas 
bomb  explode  near  him.  He  was  then  able  to  hold  his 
breath  until  most  of  the  fumes  had  evaporated.  He  es- 
caped being  hit  by  the  projectiles  by  a  margin  of  inches  as 
they  swished  over  his  head.  However,  in  spite  of  all  pre- 
cautions, he  managed  to  inhale  some  of  the  gas.  When 
the  fighting  was  ended,  he  staggered  back  to  the  darkroom, 
developed  his  negatives,  made  prints,  sent  messages  to  the 
New  York  office,  and  transmitted  many  of  the  pictures  by 
wire  over  his  portable  set.  He  collapsed  when  the  work 


98  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

was  ended,  and  suffered  vomiting  spells  for  a  week  after- 
ward. 

Haut  was  also  in  the  thick  of  it  when  the  riot  broke 
out  at  the  Ford  automobile  plant  at  Dearborn,  Michigan, 
on  May  26,  following  the  attempt  of  the  United  Auto 
Workers  Union  to  distribute  leaflets  to  the  workers  leaving 
the  plant. 

Union  officials  Frankensteen,  Reuther  and  others,  fol- 
lowed by  newspaper  reporters  and  photographers,  had 
mounted  the  ramp  stairway  leading  to  the  bridge  near  the 
plant.  Some  husky  looking  fellows  sauntered  over  and 
told  the  union  officials  to  get  off  the  bridge.  In  a  trice  the 
men  piled  into  Frankensteen  as  the  photographers  kept 
shooting  the  pictures.  Then  the  fracas  started  on  the 
other  side  of  the  bridge  where  other  officials  were  being 
forced  down  the  opposite  stairway.  The  cameramen  raced 
around  to  that  side  to  make  a  few  pictures  of  the  fighting 
which  continued  for  about  twenty  minutes.  A  Ford  police- 
man dashed  over  and  relieved  Haut  of  most  of  his  holders. 
Undaunted,  Haut  climbed  a  parked  car  to  shoot  pictures 
of  a  girl  union  leader  being  manhandled.  Instantly,  an- 
other Ford  man  was  on  top  of  Haut  and  snatched  his 
holders  from  him  while  another  pointed  to  the  camera 
case.  Hoping  to  save  what  might  be  a  few  good  shots, 
Haut  scrambled  down,  grabbed  his  case  and  ran  with  the 
Ford  man  after  him.  He  escaped.  Some  of  the  other 
photographers  were  pursued  in  cars  outside  the  city  limits. 
One  startling  shot  came  out  intact — and  one  of  the  most 
damaging  to  the  Ford  cause.  It  showed  Frankensteen, 
with  coat  pulled  over  his  head,  being  mauled  unmercifully. 

The  coverage  of  the  Republic  Steel  strike  riot  at 
Youngstown,  Ohio,  on  the  night  of  June  19  nearly  cost 
the  life  of  Edward  Salt,  a  cameraman  on  the  staff  of  the 
Youngstown  Vindicator. 

Salt  had  already  started  on  a  two-weeks  vacation  when 
he  learned  of  the  long  feared  riot  between  police  and 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  99 

pickets  had  broken  out  in  Poland  Avenue,  in  a  foreign  sec- 
tion of  the  city  where  hatred  for  police,  steel  company 
officials  and  newspapermen  had  been  running  high  for 
more  than  two  weeks.  He  dashed  back  to  the  office  and 
reported  for  duty. 

Arriving  at  the  scene  he  found  police  blocking  the 
road  at  two  places.  They  tried  to  turn  him  back,  but, 
after  much  persuasion,  he  was  allowed  to  go  on. 

In  a  gas  filled  pocket  between  a  towering  hill  and  an 
elevated  railroad,  Salt  found  the  pickets  milling  around 
in  the  streets  while  police  tried  to  force  them  back.  The 
fumes  from  exploded  gas  bombs  nearly  choked  him.  His 
first  picture  came  almost  immediately  when  pickets  brought 
out  an  empty  tear  gas  shell.  He  then  pushed  through  the 
police  lines,  down  into  a  "no  man's  land,"  where  police 
and  deputy  sheriffs  hidden  by  trucks,  cars  and  other  pro- 
tection, were  returning  the  fire  of  snipers  from  the  over- 
looking hillside. 

Down  there,  he  learned  a  police  car  had  been  over- 
turned, looted  and  set  afire  by  pickets.  It  was  out  in  the 
middle  of  the  gas-filled  "no  man's  land."  Salt  started  out, 
wanting  that  picture  in  particular  for  the  Sunday  edition. 
A  string  of  automobiles  protected  him  as  he  hunched  along 
the  sidewalk  while  bullets  whizzed  overhead.  When  he 
reached  the  end  of  the  parked  cars,  he  realized  the  danger 
of  attempting  to  take  a  picture.  Away  from  both  police 
and  pickets,  he  would  have  been  the  immediate  target  of 
a  crossfire  as  soon  as  he  flashed  a  bulb.  He  decided  it 
was  too  risky.  He  would  wait  a  while. 

Just  then  a  battle  broke  loose.  Several  hundred  feet 
from  him,  pickets  rushed  police.  Officers  retaliated  with  a 
barrage  of  tear  gas.  Shot  guns  and  tear  gas  rifles  boomed 
all  around.  He  made  some  shots  as  the  crowd  of  men 
and  women  broke  and  ran  in  an  effort  to  escape  the  gas 
which  police  shot  after  them  as  they  ran  up  the  hillside. 

The  battle  died  down   and   Salt   started  back  to  the 


100  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

police  lines.  When  he  reached  the  end  of  parked  cars,  he 
heard  someone  hiding  in  the  shadows  across  the  street 
shout:  "Let  him  have  it  now."  Salt  ducked  behind  a  car, 
held  up  the  camera  which  they  could  see  in  the  bright 
moonlight,  and  waited  a  moment.  Then  he  walked  out. 

He  was  half  way  between  the  car  and  a  telephone 
pole  when  one  of  the  men  yelled  for  him  to  come  across 
the  street.  Salt  couldn't  answer  back  because  of  the  gas 
mask  he  was  wearing.  Anyway  he  wouldn't  take  the 
chance.  Going  there  would  undoubtedly  mean  a  beating 
by  the  pickets,  and  secondly,  water  released  from  fire 
hydrants  by  pickets  to  carry  away  the  tear  gas,  formed 
two  miniature  rivers.  Salt  ducked  behind  the  pole. 

He  heard  one  man  say:  "I  don't  know  how  to  pump 
this  thing,"  and  another  asked  for  the  gun.  A  moment 
later  a  charge  of  shot  hit  Salt  in  both  legs.  Almost  im- 
mediately there  was  a  second  shot,  pellets  tearing  into  his 
arm.  With  the  second  shot,  he  dashed  from  behind  the 
pole  and  ran.  He  headed  for  a  fire  station  where  report- 
ers and  another  photographer  had  taken  refuge  from  a 
menacing  crowd  of  strikers.  While  several  strikers  lurched 
for  him,  Salt  hammered  on  the  barred  door  and  was  ad- 
mitted. Seeing  his  blood  stained  clothing,  they  decided 
immediately  to  take  him  to  a  hospital. 

Firemen  and  reporters  told  him  they  could  never  get 
the  camera  through  the  picket  lines,  so  it  was  left  behind. 
Salt  stuffed  the  exposed  film  in  his  shirt.  They  reached 
the  car  with  little  trouble.  Twice  as  they  were  leaving  the 
zone  they  were  stopped  by  barricades  and  ranks  of  men 
closing  the  street.  But  picket  captains,  advised  he  had 
been  shot,  had  the  men  clear  the  way  so  they  could  get 
through. 

A  few  minutes  after  Salt  reached  the  hospital,  the 
first  fatal  victim  of  the  riot  arrived.  He  had  been  killed 
instantly  by  a  gun  charge,  almost  directly  across  the  street 
from  where  Salt  was  shot.  In  all,  two  men  were  killed, 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  IOI 

and  more  than  two  scores  of  others  wounded  or  burned 
by  tear  gas.  Nineteen  shot  gun  pellets  had  crashed  into 
Salt's  legs  and  arms.  He  was  in  the  hospital  for  some 
time. 

Later,  Salt  revisited  the  scene  of  the  shooting.  The 
pole  behind  which  he  had  taken  refuge  was  pitted  with 
dozens  of  shotgun  pellets. 

The  steel  strike  disorders  everywhere  were  terrifying 
experiences  for  the  news  photographers.  At  Warren, 
Ohio,  three  cameramen,  Charles  Wilk,  Cleveland  manager 
of  Wide  World  Photos,  Mack  Baron,  of  International 
News,  and  Jack  Hines,  Associated  Press  staffer,  were  fired 
upon  and  dropped  into  a  ditch  as  bullets  whizzed  over 
their  heads.  At  the  time,  they  were  taking  pictures  of  a 
food  airplane  landing  in  the  Warren  steel  plant  enclosure. 

Dodging  bullets  in  the  steel  strike  was  just  one  of  the 
many  thrills  experienced  by  Baron  in  his  long  career  as  a 
news  cameraman.  "Buck,"  as  he  is  popularly  known,  has 
oftimes  been  called  the  "ace  flying  photographer,"  and  the 
"fearless  photographer,"  and  has  lived  a  veritable  charmed 
life  amid  the  dangers  of  his  career.  He  has  taken  the 
longest  chances  but  has  always  come  out  on  top.  "It  can't 
be  done,"  are  words  that  are  as  unknown  to  him  as  a 
Tibetan  chant.  Now  the  Morro  Castle  disaster.  .  .  .  Buck 
will  smile  proudly  when  he  recounts  that  experience.  It 
brought  him  his  greatest  fame. 

The  phone  jangled  wildly  in  the  bedroom  of  Baron's 
home  in  Sunnyside,  Long  Island,  one  early  morning  in 
September,  1934.  Buck  stirred  several  times  in  bed,  then 
finally  forced  himself  to  answer  the  phone.  He  switched 
on  the  light,  glanced  at  the  time  (it  was  a  little  after 
three),  then  glued  his  ear  to  the  receiver.  It  was  his 
office  calling:  "The  liner  Morro  Castle's  afire  off  the 
Jersey  coast.  May  be  hundreds  dead.  Get  down  to  North 
Beach  airport  right  away.  We'll  have  a  plane  ready  for 
you  to  hop  off  at  daylight."  Instantly  Buck  was  alert. 


102  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

As  he  fairly  dived  into  his  flying  equipment,  he  took  one 
glance  at  the  window.  Rain  was  slashing  at  the  panes. 
"Flying  weather,  eh?  Well,  maybe.  .  .  ." 

When  he  reached  'the  airport  in  his  car,  everything  was 
ready.  Bill  Gulick,  a  pilot  for  the  O.  J.  Whitney  Flying 
Service,  had  already  warmed  up  his  plane.  They  then 
waited  for  daylight.  Dawn  came  with  hardly  a  break  in 
the  weather.  A  misty  rain  was  falling.  They  stepped 
outside  the  hangar  door  and  could  scarcely  see  an  object 
ahead  of  them.  Both  shook  their  heads.  Bill  was  game 
to  take  a  chance  and  go  out  a  little  distance.  They  started 
and  pretty  soon  were  in  the  thick  of  it.  Baron  could  barely 
see  the  outline  of  the  wing  tip  in  the  heavy  fog  and  rain. 
They  kept  on  going. 

The  pilot  had  secured  the  approximate  position  of 
the  burning  ship  before  he  left  the  hangar.  An  accurate 
judge  of  the  distance  and  familiar  through  years  of  flying 
with  the  lay  of  the  land  below  him,  Gulick  nosed  his 
plane  toward  the  Jersey  shore  and  kept  on  going.  There 
was  no  going  back  so  long  as  the  gas  held  out. 

Buck  sniffed.  There  was  a  strong  smell  of  smoke  in 
the  air.  They  must  be  somewhere  near  the  burning  liner. 
The  pilot  turned  the  plane  in  the  direction  from  where  the 
smoke  was  drifting.  Then  suddenly,  the  mist  lifted,  the 
clouds  rolled  back,  and  the  sun  came  through.  They  had 
a  perfect  visibility  from  an  altitude  of  500  feet.  There, 
not  a  half  mile  away  was  the  ill-fated  ship  spouting  flames 
and  smoke. 

They  circled  the  Morro  Castle,  and  Baron  obtained 
about  twelve  shots  in  less  than  six  minutes.  They  came 
down  to  about  deck  level  of  the  burning  ship  for  a  few 
closeups.  They  could  see  a  handful  of  persons  clustered 
on  the  bow  of  the  ship,  waving  frantically  to  them.  A 
half-filled  lifeboat  was  pulling  away.  They  were  grieved 
that  they  could  not  aid  in  the  rescue,  but  they  realized 
they  were  helpless.  Two  passenger  ships  and  an  oil  tanker 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  103 

nearby  was  a  welcome  sight.  Buck  asked  Gulick  to  nose 
down  so  that  he  could  get  a  fairly  good  closeup.  The  heat 
was  intense  and  the  smoke  nearly  choked  them.  Several 
times  they  almost  went  into  a  spin,  but  Gulick's  able  pilot- 
ing kept  the  plane  going  over  and  round  the  ship  until 
Buck  had  used  all  his  plates.  Then  they  turned  north- 
ward. 

The  return  trip  was  more  dangerous.  The  fog  had 
returned,  and  with  it  a  squall  with  rain.  The  weather 
was  getting  worse  each  minute.  They  figured  the  best 
thing  to.  do  was  to  fly  as  low  as  possible  and  follow  the 
shore.  Many  times  they  fairly  skimmed  the  waves.  A 
crash  seemed  inevitable,  but,  finally,  with  sighs  of  relief, 
they  sighted  the  houses  in  the  vicinity  of  North  Beach  air- 
port. They  came  down  to  a  safe  landing. 

At  the  airport  Baron  learned  that  a  half  dozen  planes 
had  tried  to  take  to  the  air  but  were  forced  to  return.  It 
meant  that  his  pictures  were  exclusive.  An  hour  later  the 
prints  were  rolling  off  the  ferrotyped  machines  to  be  rushed 
to  newspapers  all  over  the  country.  It  was  fully  an  hour 
after  that  before  another  plane  with  photographer  flew 
over  the  ship.  It  was  one  of  the  finest  picture  scoops  in 
history. 

Later,  Baron's  thrilling  pictures  were  introduced  at  the 
inquiry  into  the  disaster.  His  outstanding  shot,  the  one 
showing  flames  and  smoke  rolling  upward  from  bow  to 
stern,  won  him  the  National  Headliners  Award  for  the 
best  news  photograph  of  the  year. 

Any  moment  of  the  day  or  night  may  bring  a  flash  of 
another  story  like  the  Morro  Castle  fire,  the  Argonaut 
mine  disaster,  a  strike  riot,  a  train  wreck,  an  explosion. 
Everywhere  the  men  with  the  cameras  are  prepared  for 
the  dangers,  the  thrills,  the  privations.  They  seek  no 
acclaim,  want  no  special  awards.  They  will  modestly  tell 
you:  "It's  just  part  of  the  day's  work!" 


Chapter  Vll. 
THE   CAMERAMAN   ON  THE  JOB 

The  news  photographer  "writes"  the  story  with  his 
camera,  jotting  down  the  facts  with  the  pressing  of  the  but- 
ton on  his  speed  gun  or  the  release  of  the  shutter.  He 
manipulates  his  "pencil"  of  light  and  shadow  with  the  same 
agility  that  the  reporter  records  the  event,  and  the  moment 
he  lifts  his  film  from  the  fixative,  ready  for  washing  and  dry- 
ing, is  comparable  to  the  moment  the  reporter  affixes  his 
"30",  marking  the  end  of  the  story. 

The  cameraman  must  have  the  "eye  for  news"  as  well 
as  the  "nose  for  news,"  but  the  eye  must  have  the  assistance 
of  the  perfect  equipment.  The  cameras  which  have  been 
found  to  be  the  most  practicable  for  press  work  are  the 
Graflex  and  the  Speed  Graphic. 

Compact  and  sturdily  built,  and  able  to  register  as  high 
as  i/ioooth  of  a  second  with  their  anistigmatic  lenses,  these 
cameras  have  been  found  most  suitable  to  withstand  the 
wear  and  tear  of  frequent  usage,  and  the  ability  to  stop  the 
fastest  speed  of  the  racing  automobile  and  the  plane  in  flight. 

These  cameras  are  equippd  with  adjustable  lens  boards 
for  the  substitution  of  long  and  short  focus  lenses,  and  wire 
finders  to  sight  the  picture.  Flash  speed  guns  perfectly 
synchronized  to  the  shutters  for  a  speed  up  to  i/2OOth  of  a 
second  enable  the  cameramen  to  snap  their  pictures  more 
handily  and  speedily  when  the  use  of  the  flash  bulb  is  re- 
quired. The  Graphic  with  an  £3.5  or  £4.5  lens  is  the 
camera  used  for  the  everyday  assignment.  It  has  a  spring 
back  for  the  insertion  of  the  plateholder  which  eliminates 
the  necessity  of  removing  the  ground  glass  and  enables  the 
photographer  to  change  holders  quickly  without  waste  of 


J 


^)  Acme  Newspictures 

SURGEON  OPERATES  UPON  SELF 

Dr.  Evan  O'Neill  Kane  of  Kane,  Pennsylvania,  is  shown  in  this  unusual 
photograph  as  he  operated  upon  himself  for  inguinal  hernia.  A  local  anaes- 
thetic was  used  and  Dr.  Kane  chatted  and  laughed  throughout  the  operation. 
In  1921  Dr.  Kane  startled  the  medical  world  by  removing  his  own  appendix. 


(P)   Wide   World   Photos 
AN  HISTORIC  BIRTH 

The   first   picture   of  the   quintuplets   born    to   Mrs.    Olivia   Dionne   as   she   lay 

recovering  in  her  backwoods  home  near  Callander,  Ontario,  Canada,  with  the 

tiny  forms,  weighing  together  only  six  pounds,  six  ounces,  by  her  side.     They 

have  grown  into  five  plump,   rosy- cheeked  girls. 


©   Wide   World   Photo 

HE  REACHED  FOR  A  SMOKE  INSTEAD  OF  THE  RIP 

Harold    Parkhurst,    Rosedale,    Long-   Island,    daredevil,    nonchalantly   lights   a 

cigarette  while  falling-  from  an  altitude  of  5000  feet,   from  a  plane  flown  by 

Chick    Soule.      This    thrilling    picture    was    snapped    by    Harry    Knapp    from 

another  plane   flown   by  Alfred   Bragos. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  1 05 

time.  The  Graflex,  an  excellent  reflecting  camera  and  built 
for  speed,  is  used  in  covering  many  sport  events  as  prize 
fights,  football,  baseball  and  hockey  games.  The  Graflex, 
with  a  20  and  28  inch  focal  length  lens,  is  heavier  and  stock- 
ier than  the  Graphic,  and  is  termed  "Big  Bertha"  by  the 
cameraman.  Though  a  bit  cumbersome,  it  is  ideal  for  the 
sports  event. 

Before  the  photographer  goes  out  on  an  assignment,  he 
goes  over  his  camera  to  see  that  everything  is  working  prop- 
erly. There  must  be  no  chance  of  a  breakdown  during  the 
coverage  of  a  story;  the  lens  is  clean  and  tightly  screwed  on, 
the  shutter-adjustments  are  accurate,  the  tension  spring 
works  properly,  and  the  position  of  the  speed  gun  shutter- 
relay  is  correct.  The  news  cameraman  watches  and  guards 
his  equipment  with  the  care  and  attention  of  a  parent  for 
its  child. 

When  the  holders  are  loaded  with  either  film  or  plates, 
the  photographer  dusts  them  so  that  no  particles  of  dirt  will 
cling  to  the  emulsion  causing  pin-hole  marks.  The  speed 
gun  is  tested  frequently  to  see  that  the  synchronization  is 
perfect. 

With  the  camera  in  perfect  condition,  holders  freshly 
loaded  with  either  Orthochromatic  or  Panchromatic  film  or 
plates,  plenty  of  flash  bulbs,  and  the  light  but  sturdy  tripod 
packed  in  his  case,  the  news  photographer  is  ready  for  come 
what  may. 

The  editor  calls  him  over  to  the  desk  and  tells  him  that 
Myrna  Loy  is  arriving  on  the  Twentieth  Century  train. 
Hollywood  actresses  are  always  good  copy.  The  camera- 
man saunters  over  to  the  railroad  station.  The  publicity 
man  from  the  studio  who  employs  Miss  Loy  is  on  hand, 
and  he  informs  the  cameramen  the  name  and  number  of  the 
Pullman  car  in  which  she  is  riding.  Miss  Loy  catches  sight 
of  the  photographers  and  smiles  as  she  stands  on  the  step 
about  to  put  one  pretty  foot  on  the  platform.  The  lighting 


106  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

conditions  are  fairly  poor,  so  the  cameramen  use  their  speed 
guns.  In  a  trice,  the  boys  have  adjusted  their  scales,  and 
shutters,  sighted  her  through  the  view  finders,  and  off  go  the 
flashes.  The  newspaper  reproductions  that  afternoon  will 
show  her  smiling,  framed  by  the  pullman  car  door.  At  one 
glance,  the  readers  will  know  that  she  is  arriving  by  train. 
The  picture  will  have  immediately  told  the  story. 

There  is  a  simple,  but  urgent,  lesson  taught  by  this 
routine  assignment.  The  cameramen  knew  instinctively  that 
they  must  give  their  picture  locale  or  setting.  Part  of  the 
train  had  to  show  in  the  picture.  On  another  occasion, 
similar  to  this,  they  may  vary  the  picture  with  a  pullman 
porter  assisting  her  off  the  train,  and  at  another  time,  they 
may  pose  her  sitting  on  a  trunk  amid  much  baggage.  But 
the  purpose  in  each  case  is  identical.  Miss  Loy  is  arriving 
by  train,  and  by  no  other  conveyance.  It  is  a  salient  point 
in  picture  coverage  to  present  to  the  reader  the  visual  fact 
that  the  scene  or  setting  is  just  as  the  caption  indicates. 

The  news  value  of  the  picture  is  enhanced  three-fold. 

An  American  snapped  in  London  should  be  seen  talking 
to  a  policeman,  or  "bobby"  as  he  is  called  there,  caught 
looking  up  at  Westminster  Abbey,  or  strolling  through  a 
London  street  with  the  background  clearly  indicated  to  show 
that  it  is  London,  and  not  the  main  street  in.  Paducah, 
Kentucky.  In  Paris,  to  be  seen  with  a  gendarme  or  glanc- 
ing at  a  typical  Parisian  kiosk  plastered  with  French  ads  or 
seated  at  a  sidewalk  cafe ;  and  so  on,  with  the  setting  of  the 
country  he  is  visiting  as  the  subject's  background. 

When  the  European  celebrity  visits  this  country,  the 
news  cameraman  aims  for  the  same  type  of  picture.  A 
head  and  shoulder  closeup  of  a  London  notable  visiting 
New  York  is  of  no  value  whatsoever  to  the  editor  of  the 
London  Daily  Mirror,  if  the  picture  has  been  syndicated  to 
England  for  sales  purposes.  The  background  of  New  York 
must  be  shown :  if  he  is  photographed  in  a  hotel,  the  camera- 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  1 07 

man  snaps  him  glancing  outside  the  window  even  though  but 
a  blur  of  skyscraper  is  shown  in  the  distance;  or  if  he  is 
strolling  Fifth  Avenue,  a  passing  bus  materially  aids. 

The  correct  posing  of  an  individual  is  of  extreme  im- 
portance. The  stiff,  straight  look  ahead  deadens  the  picture. 
Even  the  faint  semblance  of  a  smile  will  enliven  it,  and  there 
must  be  a  slight  turn  of  the  head,  a  sort  of  semi-profile  to 
hint  that  the  subject  is  interested  in  other  matters  than  the 
lens  of  the  camera. 

When  there  are  more  than  one  person  to  be  photo- 
graphed, the  subjects  will  be  told  by  the  cameramen  to  en- 
gage in  conversation,  looking  toward  each  other,  or  if  seated 
at  a  desk  or  table,  to  look  slightly  down  at  some  papers  on 
the  desk  or  table  as  if  the  camera  had  caught  them  off  guard 
in  the  midst  of  a  business  conversation.  The  picture  must 
have  the  feeling  of  naturalness. 

In  the  home,  the  man  or  woman  can  be  photographed 
talking  over  the  phone,  listening  to  the  radio,  reading  a 
book  or  reclining  back  on  the  chair  or  sofa  in  a  homey,  re- 
laxed mood,  in  other  words,  snapped  in  a  familiar  and 
natural  pose. 

In  many  cases,  if  the  person  has  not  figured  much  in 
the  news  before,  and  the  photographer  knows  that  there  are 
not  many  good  closeups  of  the  person  in  the  files  of  his  news- 
paper or  syndicate,  he  will  make  an  extra  full-face  view. 
In  case  of  a  future  story  break  involving  that  person,  it 
will  be  perfectly  useable  for  a  one-column  release.  Such 
one-column  cuts  are  being  constantly  used  by  newspapers 
to  illustrate  stories. 

A  picture  can  also  be  taken  of  a  person  who  figures  in 
the  action  of  a  story,  and  the  one  illustration  can  convey 
the  whole  meaning  and  action.  A  young  woman  of  slight 
build  has  knocked  out  a  i9O-pound  masher.  The  photog- 
rapher asks  her  to  crook  her  arm,  with  her  fist  tightly  clench- 


IO8  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

ed,  and  look  down  admiringly  at  her  biceps.  This  was  how 
she  flattened  her  tormentor.  It  tells  the  story  in  a  flash. 

The  photographer  may  also  ask  a  person  to  rehearse  a 
scene  in  order  to  portray  more  graphically  the  incidents  of 
the  story.  A  lad  of  nine,  crossing  a  railroad  track,  discov- 
ered a  broken  rail.  He  heard  a  train  approaching.  He  ran 
down  the  track,  waving  his  handkerchief  frantically.  The 
engineer  saw  him  in  time  and  stopped  the  train.  The  boy 
became  a  national  hero.  The  photographers  arrived  when 
the  boy  had  already  returned  home.  They  brought  him 
back  to  the  track,  and  asked  him  to  run  toward  them,  wav- 
ing his  handkerchief.  It  was  the  best  picture  on  the  story. 

The  contrast  of  size  must  also  be  shown  in  the  picture. 
Robert  Wadlow,  the  world's  tallest  man,  was  brought  from 
his  home  in  Illinois  to  join  the  circus  in  New  York.  A 
diminutive  air  hostess  standing  alongside  him  on  his  arrival 
at  Newark  Airport  emphasized  his  tremendous  height.  If 
the  photographer  had  snapped  him  alone  the  reader  would 
not  have  realized  his  unusual  height,  and  could  just  as  well 
be  five  feet  tall,  so  far  as  the  picture  itself  would  indicate. 
Later  he  was  snapped  walking  in  Central  Park.  Holding 
a  tot  of  eight  by  the  hand  also  emphasized  his  tallness. 

A  New  England  man  possessed  the  smallest  Bible  in  the 
world.  The  photographer  focused  on  the  tiny  book  held 
in  the  palm  of  a  hand.  The  contrast  of  the  Bible  to  the 
size  of  the  normal  hand  indicated  to  the  reader  its  true 
dimensions. 

The  person  snapped  in  action  is  always  the  desirable 
picture.  A  musician  is  photographed  playing  the  instrument, 
the  radio  singer  in  front  of  the  microphone  lifting  his  or  her 
voice  in  song,  the  blacksmith  in  the  act  of  hitting  his  anvil, 
the  housewife  bent  over  her  stove,  the  sea  captain  turning 
the  ship's  wheel,  the  child  skating  or  rolling  a  hoop,  the  col- 
lege youth  bent  over  his  studies,  the  person  on  the  street 
caught  in  a  walking  shot. 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  109 

The  still  object  can  be  enlivened  with  the  placing  of  a 
person  in  the  picture.  The  cameraman  assigned  to  the 
flower  show  asks  a  pretty  girl  to  hold  the  prize  bloom;  a 
woman  studying  a  new  aluminum  pan  at  the  Hardware 
Exhibition  animates  the  picture.  Where  the  object  in  itself 
is  of  unusual  interest,  as  a  prize  winning  painting,  the 
photographer  will  make  a  closeup  with  no  one  showing  in 
the  picture,  unless  he  can  get  the  artist  to  pose  alongside. 

At  times  the  picture  editor  will  instruct  the  cameraman 
to  get  a  series  of  pictures  on  a  particular  subject.  The  one 
wanted  this  time  was  the  manufacture  of  dolls.  The  assign- 
ment was  given  a  month  before  Christmas,  and  the  editor 
was  anxious  to  obtain  an  interesting  series  for  an  advance 
rotogravure  release. 

The  cameraman  covered  the  assignment  thoroughly 
from  the  testing  of  the  raw  materials  to  the  final  shipment 
of  the  dolls.  He  showed  the  chemist  examining  the  mate- 
rials, the  dolls'  heads  molded  and  dipped  in  lacquer,  the 
workmen  setting  the  eyes  in  the  sockets  with  tweezers,  the 
painting  of  the  eyebrows,  lips  and  dimples,  the  attachment 
of  the  heads  to  the  bodies,  a  woman  worker  sewing  a  mohair 
wig  onto  a  buckram  cap,  the  apparel  placed  on  the  nude 
dolls  in  the  assembly  room,  and  then  the  final  packing  and 
shipping. 

A  lone  picture  on  this  subject  would  have  meant  little  or 
nothing;  the  series  of  eight  or  ten  pictures  was  a  complete 
series,  and  told  the  story  in  perfect  sequence. 

At  the  Hairdressing  Show  and  the  Shoe  Manufacturers' 
Convention  the  photographer  will  get  the  layout  of  the 
latest  coiffures  and  the  newest  shoe  models.  Two  or  three 
of  the  most  striking  hair  twists  and  patterned  footgear  will 
suffice  on  a  coverage  of  these  kinds.  Closeups  of  the  girls' 
heads  turned  to  show  the  full  effect  of  the  latest  coiffure  and 
just  a  glimpse  of  the  ankles  with  the  full  showing  of  the 
shoes  are  all  that  are  needed  by  the  photographer. 


HO  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

It  is  a  warm  Spring  day.  The  photographer  has  been 
told  to  get  a  layout  of  Spring  pictures.  The  picture  editor 
may  give  him  some  suggestions,  but  usually  the  cameraman 
will  have  the  pictures  he  wants  fixed  firmly  in  his  mind  the 
minute  he  leaves  the  office.  He  will  turn  to  the  park,  make 
shots  of  the  children  roller-skating  or  sailing  their  boats  on 
the  pond,  snap  a  couple  of  vagrants  on  a  bench  warming 
themselves  in  the  sun,  saunter  into  the  Zoo  and  snap  the 
crane  on  the  green  stretching  her  feathers,  stroll  over  to  the 
poorer  Ninth  Avenue  district  and  photograph  the  kids  play- 
ing ball  in  the  street  and  the  housewives  sitting  on  the  stoops 
for  a  moment  of  fresh  air  and  a  temporary  escape  from  the 
hot,  stuffy  kitchens.  On  his  return  to  the  office,  he  will 
shoot  a  sidewalk  cafe,  a  row  of  bootblacks  polishing  the 
shoes  of  coatless  men,  and  a  bock  beer  sign  on  a  saloon 
window — all  the  signs  of  Spring  that  stir  the  big  city  to  the 
awakening  of  the  season. 

The  news  cameraman  covering  the  ever-colorful  and 
ever-stirring  scenes  of  the  big  city  has  through  years  of  ex- 
perience, and  the  application  of  a  keen  sense  for  the  news 
coupled  with  a  lively  imagination  been  able  to  cover  any 
type  of  assignment.  He  always  strives  for  the  different, 
the  unusual,  shifts  and  varies  his  attacks  in  his  effort  to  es- 
cape from  the  sameness  and  the  stereotyped.  He  is  given  a 
wide  latitude  in  the  semi-news  and  feature  assignments,  and 
he  thrills  as  much  in  getting  an  unusual  feature  picture  as 
he  does  in  obtaining  a  scoop  on  a  big  news  event.  The  artist 
in  him  ever  struggles  for  expression. 

The  news  is  combined  with  the  feature  material  for  the 
cameraman  who  covers  the  arrival  and  departure  of  the 
ocean  liners.  When  the  ships  come  in,  bearing  their 
notables,  Americans  returning  from  vacations  abroad  and 
Europeans  of  note  arriving  for  a  visit,  the  news  cameraman 
is  among  the  first  to  greet  them.  Bearing  a  special  pass 
which  is  non-transferable,  the  photographer  boards  the 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  III 

revenue  cutter  at  the  Battery  in  New  York  and  is  taken  to 
Quarantine.  Up  a  narrow  ladder  he  climbs  to  get  aboard 
the  ship.  On  occasion,  the  line's  publicity  man  will  greet 
the  cameramen  and  assist  them  in  selecting  the  passengers  to 
be  photographed.  With  the  New  York  skyline  as  a  back- 
ground, the  cameramen  will  line  their  subjects  against  the 
top  deck  rail,  some  waving  their  hands,  others  pointing  or 
looking  toward  the  distant  skyscrapers,  and  then  obtain 
the  piquant  shot  of  the  pretty  young  lady  with  the  exposed 
knee. 

The  ship  news  photographer  deals  with  well  known 
names.  Therefore,  he  must  be  considerate,  quietly  persuas- 
ive, and  strictly  the  gentleman.  It  is  not  entirely  the  height 
of  good  style  to  shout:  uHey,  Queenie,  look  this  way!"  as 
a  photographer  did  when  posing  Queen  Marie  of  Rumania 
on  her  arrival  in  this  country  some  years  ago.  The  breaches 
of  good  taste  are  rare  these  days.  As  a  result,  all  celebri- 
ties, with  very  few  exceptions,  will  gladly  accommodate  the 
photographer. 

There  are  many  stories  below  deck,  too.  A  six  year 
old  child  traveling  alone  from  her  home  in  Poland  to  be  met 
by  relatives  in  Pittsburgh,  an  Esthonian  who  is  traveling 
here  to  meet  his  brother  whom  he  has  not  seen  for  50  years, 
a  Dutch  bride  and  groom  in  their  native  costumes,  all  make 
good  copy  for  both  reporter  and  cameraman. 

The  photographer  will  have  learned  from  his  editor 
that  the  ship  had  battled  a  terrific  storm  while  in  midocean 
or  gone  to  the  rescue  of  a  sinking  ship.  Some  liners  will 
carry  their  own  photographers  and  darkrooms,  and  the  news 
man  will  obtain  prints  showing  the  mountainous  waves  bat- 
tering the  liner  or  the  rescue  of  the  crew  in  distress.  At 
other  times,  he  will  press  inquiry  among  the  passengers  who 
may  have  obtained  the  pictures  with  their  personal  cameras, 
and  secure  a  roll  of  unexposed  film  upon  payment.  The 
possibilities  of  good  pictures  on  an  incoming  liner  are  many, 


112  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

and  the  cameraman  is  keenly  alert  from  the  moment  he 
boards  the  ship  at  Quarantine  until  he  leaves  it  upon  dock- 
ing at  its  Manhattan  pier. 

Society  news  occupies  an  important  space  in  the  news- 
paper page,  and  as  a  result  the  editor  is  anxious  to  obtain 
pictures  of  debutante  and  dowager  at  the  lawn  party,  the 
fall  hunt  meet,  the  hotel  luncheon,  the  costume  ball  and 
vacationing  at  Palm  Beach,  Newport  and  Southampton. 
The  society  wedding  will  find  a  battery  of  cameramen  stand- 
ing outside  the  church  doorway  waiting  for  the  appearance 
of  the  bride  and  groom  after  the  ceremony. 

Arrangements  for  the  appearance  of  the  photographer 
at  a  society  event  are  made  a  day  or  more  in  advance.  Per- 
mission is  generally  granted.  The  experienced  society 
photographer  knows  the  leading  matrons  and  debutantes  on 
first  glance,  and  so  he  will  quietly  mingle  among  the  guests 
taking  the  shots  he  wants  as  they  stroll  or  stop  for  a 
moment  of  conversation.  He  takes  full-length  shots.  The 
public  is  interested  in  what  society  is  wearing,  and  the 
cameraman,  by  polite  inquiry,  will  learn  the  material  and 
style  of  the  dress,  suit  and  hat,  and  the  name  of  the  fur 
flung  around  her  shoulders.  The  fashion  description  makes 
the  caption  complete. 

The  field  of  sports  offers  the  cameraman  a  constant  suc- 
cession of  thrills  and  action. 

Some  of  the  most  vivid  and  stirring  pictures  taken  by 
news  cameramen  have  found  their  way  into  the  sports  pages : 
the  knockout  blow  at  the  prize  fight,  the  wrestler's  face 
twisted  in  distortion  as  his  opponent  grips  him  in  a  deadly 
hold,  the  ball  player's  slide  into  home  on  a  steal  from 
third,  the  speed  boat  churning  the  water  into  a  milky  froth, 
the  steeplechaser  taking  a  nasty  spill,  the  neck  to  neck  finish 
in  the  horse  race,  the  save  by  the  goalie  in  the  hockey  game, 
the  mile  runner  breaking  the  tape  for  a  new  world's  record, 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  113 

the  racing  automobile  swerving  at  the  turn  and  crashing 
through  the  fence. 

It  is  a  championship  fight.  From  the  moment  the  gong 
sounds,  the  cameraman  on  the  high  stand  overlooking  the 
lighted  ring,  keeps  his  head  lowered  into  the  hood  of  his 
Graflex,  keeping  his  eyes  glued  on  the  mirror  reflecting 
every  action  of  the  fighters.  Down  goes  the  camera  curtain 
as  the  fighter  gets  a  right  to  the  jaw.  The  blow  has  been 
registered.  Another  good  action,  the  camera  clicks  again. 
The  magazine  has  been  exposed.  Sturdy  twine  is  wrapped 
around  it,  and  down  it  goes  into  the  upraised  hands  of  a 
boy  who  rushes  it  to  the  gate  entrance.  It  is  handed  over 
to  a  waiting  motorcycle  rider  who  is  off  in  a  cloud  of  dust 
rushing  it  back  to  the  office.  Within  a  half  hour  or  less, 
according  to  the  distance  of  the  arena  from  the  office,  the 
plates  are  already  in  the  developer.  Shortly  thereafter, 
plane,  train  and  wire  transmission  will  carry  the  pictures  to 
the  world's  far  corners. 

When  covering  championship  fights,  newspapers  and 
syndicates  use  every  strategy  to  get  the  plates  back  to  the 
office  in  fastest  possible  time.  At  one  time,  an  ambulance 
clanging  its  way  through  the  city  streets  was  actually  convey- 
ing a  darkroom  and  the  "patients"  were  excited  syndicate 
employees  developing  the  plates;  on  another  occasion,  a 
changing  bag  in  a  motorcycle  with  sidecar  was  speeding 
the  developing  of  the  pictures. 

The  photographers  leaving  the  Dempsey-Carpentier 
fight  at  Boyle's  Thirty  Acres  in  Jersey  City  some  years  ago 
were  faced  with  a  dilemma.  Motorcycle  men  stationed  at 
the  entrances  were  awaiting  the  plates,  but  the  cameramen 
could  not  get  through  the  jam.  One  photographer  used 
his  wits  to  score  a  scoop.  He  kicked  through  a  plank  of  the 
arena's  pine  floor,  and  dropped  through  into  a  sea  of  mud. 
Splashing  his  way  through  the  darkness,  he  reached  the 
outer  rim  of  the  arena.  There  he  kicked  through  another 


114  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

panel,  emerging  not  far  from  the  entrance,  and  in  a  jiffy  was 
in  a  speeding  car  enroute  to  his  office,  the  first  news  camera- 
man to  reach  Newspaper  Row  with  the  pictures  of  the 
knockout  blow. 

The  same  excitement  that  attends  a  championship  fight 
is  present  at  a  World  Series  baseball  game.  Several  camera- 
men will  watch  for  the  closeup  action  at  first  and  third  base, 
while  several  more  will  be  in  the  stands  with  their  telephoto 
lenses.  The  action  at  home  plate  is  carefully  watched.  Click 
go  a  score  of  cameras  when  the  player  rounds  home  after 
lifting  a  four-bagger  into  the  stands,  or  the  slide  into  home 
en  another  player's  sacrifice  hit.  From  the  moment  the  first 
ticket  purchaser  lines  up  at  the  window  in  the  wee  hours  of 
the  morning  the  cameraman  is  kept  continually  on  the  go: 
the  players  warming  up,  the  rival  managers,  the  bleacherites, 
the  notables  in  the  stands. 

There  is  one  picture  the  public  has  never  seen:  the 
players  in  the  dressing  room  before  the  game.  The  man- 
agers are  set  against  it  for  there  is  a  belief  that  the  players 
will  meet  defeat  if  they  allow  themselves  to  be  caught  by  the 
cameras  in  the  dressing  rooms.  Managers  of  teams  who  are 
about  to  clinch  a  pennant  will  not  allow  a  group  picture  to 
be  made  until  the  pennant  has  actually  been  won.  Super- 
stition again — but  what  can  you  do  with  fellows  who  believe 
so  thoroughly  in  rabbit  feet,  elephant  charms,  and  other 
talismans. 

The  football  game  offers  a  more  difficult  problem  to  the 
cameraman.  Instead  of  concentrating  on  a  given  spot  as 
first  and  third  bases  in  baseball,  and  the  limited  space  in 
boxing,  he  must  keep  the  ever  moving  mass  formations  con- 
stantly within  range  of  his  camera.  He  must  also  be  con- 
versant with  the  various  plays,  and  shoot  at  the  exact 
moment  as  a  player  is  off  for  an  end  run,  a  plunge  through 
scrimmage,  the  start  and  finish  of  a  forward  pass.  He  is 
faced  with  changing  light  conditions  and  adjusts  his  speeds 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  115 

accordingly.  Poor  weather  does  not  stop  the  game,  and 
the  cameraman  stands  his  ground  on  a  sideline  as  rain  and 
sleet  batter  his  face,  and  driving  snow  almost  blinds  him. 
There  is  no  retreat:  he  sticks  until  the  final  whistle  ends  the 
game  in  the  gathering  dusk  of  a  late  Fall  afternoon.  Many 
a  deciding  play  has  been  made  in  the  last  few  minutes  of  the 
game. 

At  the  track  meet,  the  click  of  the  camera  is  like  the 
staccatic  burst  of  machine  gun  fire.  Event  follows  event  in 
rapid  succession,  and  the  cameraman  is  ever  on  the  move, 
snapping  the  pole  vaulter  going  over,  the  shotputter  in  ac- 
tion, the  loo-yard  dashers  flashing  across  the  tape  in  a  light- 
ning burst  of  speed,  the  milers  swinging  around  the  first 
turn,  the  hurdlers  going  over  the  obstacles  in  a  perfect 
rhythm  and  motion  of  arms  and  legs.  Some  news  camera- 
men have  been  known  to  take  as  many  as  seventy  pictures 
at  one  day's  events  such  as  the  Penn  Relays  in  Franklin 
Field,  Philadelphia. 

In  horse  racing  the  cameraman  tries  for  the  thrilling 
drive  toward  the  finish  line  and  is  ever  on  the  alert  for  the 
spill.  Generally  he  works  from  the  judge's  stand  or  the 
outside  rail.  One  of  the  most  unusual  head-on  shots  was 
taken  by  Charles  Brinkman,  when  he  was  employed  by  the 
Pacific  and  Atlantic  Photos  syndicate.  He  crawled  under 
the  fence,  flung  himself  face  down  in  the  turf,  and  turned  his 
camera  up  toward  the  charging  horses,  drawing  himself 
back  in  time  to  miss  the  flying  hoofs  by  inches.  It  was 
quite  foolhardy,  but  he  got  an  unusual  shot.  The  race  stew- 
ards later  put  a  ban  on  such  attempts.  A  horse  shied,  spill- 
ing its  rider,  when  he  saw  a  cameraman  leaning  from  under 
the  rail.  It  was  too  risky  a  venture  for  cameramen,  jockeys 
and  horses. 

In  every  form  of  sport  the  cameraman  watches  for  the 
crucial  moment  of  play :  at  the  tennis  game  he  strives  for  the 
closeup  of  the  player  connecting  with  the  ball,  and  often  gets 


Il6  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

the  unusual  shot  of  the  ball  in  midair  or  seemingly  glued  to 
the  racquet  at  the  moment  of  contact;  working  from  the 
sidelines  at  the  polo  match  with  his  eleven  inch  lens,  he  gets 
the  charging  rider  with  swinging  mallet,  and  at  the  soccer 
game,  the  player  leaping  into  the  air  as  his  head  bounces  the 
ball  back  into  play.  Every  second  of  play  must  be  watched, 
and  the  photographer  is  a  tense  bundle  of  nerves  and  concen- 
tration from  the  minute  the  referee  or  umpire  signals  the 
start  of  the  game. 

The  same  photographer  who  covered  the  sports  story 
may  be  called  upon  the  same  day  to  cover  the  fire,  the  acci- 
dent, the  crime.  These  big  news  stories  can  be  safely  placed 
in  one  category.  The  cameraman  knows  that  there  are 
certain  shots  to  be  made  to  cover  the  story  fully.  Speed  on 
such  events  is  most  essential,  and  so  he  clips  time  with  his 
split-second  shots  to  rush  back  to  the  office  with  the  essentials. 
He  follows  a  fairly  well-set  procedure  in  big  news  coverage. 

Stepping  carefully  over  twisted  hose,  plunging  through 
pools  of  water,  he  will  train  his  camera  on  the  firemen  pour- 
ing streams  on  the  flames,  get  several  shots  of  the  smoke 
billowing  from  the  roof  and  windows,  then  dash  over  to  get 
a  picture  of  the  fi**e  chief  directing  the  battle.  There  may  be 
a  back  draught  and  firemen  may  be  tumbled  to  the  ground; 
he  will  rush  to  get  his  shots  of  the  injured  being  treated  by 
the  ambulance  surgeon.  To  get  the  general  view  he  will 
climb  atop  the  roof  of  a  neighboring  building.  On  a  four 
or  five  alarm  fire,  a  boy  will  have  accompanied  him,  and  he 
will  send  the  lad  scampering  back  with  the  first  few  shots. 
If  the  fire  starting  from  an  inconsequential  blaze  sweeps  to 
intensity,  and  no  boy  will  have  accompanied  him  to  the 
scene,  he  will  rush  to  the  nearest  taxi  driver  to  give  him  the 
first  plates  for  a  speedy  trip  to  the  office.  When  the  fire  will 
have  died  down,  he  will  focus  his  camera  on  the  smouldering 
ruins,  and,  if  permission  is  granted,  will  accompany  the  fire- 
men into  the  building  to  make  interior  shots. 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  117 

Night  views  of  fires  are  more  difficult,  and  the  spread 
pans  to  give  a  more  intense  light  than  the  flash  bulbs  are 
brought  into  play.  The  pouring  of  the  magnesium  powder 
onto  the  pans  is  a  risky  procedure.  Great  care  should  be 
taken  that  the  powder  bottle  is  securely  corked  after  pour- 
ing as  a  flying  spark  from  the  fire  may  fall  into  it  and  cause 
a  violent  explosion.  Many  news  photographers  have  been 
seriously  injured  by  the  exploding  of  the  powder  in  the 
bottle  or  on  the  pan  before  the  cameraman  was  set  to  release 
the  trigger. 

In  the  early  days  of  news  photography,  before  the  intro- 
duction of  the  spread  pan,  the  cameraman  covering  the  night 
fire  would  follow  a  still  more  dangerous  routine.  He 
would  set  up  his  camera  on  tripod  on  a  neighboring  roof. 
An  assistant  would  pour  the  powder  into  the  rain  gutter 
near  the  edge  of  the  roof,  throw  a  flaming  stick  into  it  from 
a  distance,  and  then  run.  Sometimes  the  force  of  the  ex- 
plosion would  tear  the  edge  of  the  roof  away,  and  both 
cameraman  and  assistant  would  have  to  make  a  hasty  flight 
lest  the  owner  catch  them.  But,  invariably,  the  cameraman 
first  got  his  picture ! 

A  murder  story  breaks.  The  scene  of  the  crime  is  an 
uptown  apartment  house.  The  cameraman  will  start  at 
once  for  the  scene.  He  is  notified  by  the  police  officials  that 
the  husband  of  the  slain  woman  is  on  his  way  from  his 
office.  As  he  steps  from  the  taxi,  a  battery  of  cameramen 
pull  their  flashes.  The  janitor  has  been  questioned,  and  the 
boys  will  be  allowed  to  take  his  picture.  The  routine  covers 
the  questioning  of  other  persons.  Sometimes  the  cameramen 
will  be  forced  to  stay  outside  the  building,  while  on  other 
murder  stories  be  permitted  to  occupy  a  nearby  room  or 
stay  in  an  outer  hallway.  Days  may  pass  before  the  news 
photographers  are  allowed  inside  to  make  pictures  of  the 
room. 

The  cameraman  never  leaves  the  scene  of  the  story  until 


Il8  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

he  is  relieved  by  another  photographer,  and  must  keep  in 
constant  touch  with  the  office  to  advise  or  be  advised  of 
further  developments.  A  break  in  the  story  may  come  at 
any  moment. 

Another  photographer  will  have  been  dispatched  to  the 
nearest  police  station.  He  awaits  there  the  arrival  of  sus- 
pects or  witnesses  held  for  further  questioning,  or  the  distri- 
bution of  pictures  of  the  victim  or  suspects  by  the  police. 

Evidence  is  sent  to  Police  Headquarters,  and  so  another 
cameraman  is  sent  there.  One  of  the  most  important  pic- 
tures in  the  recent  Titterton  murder  case  in  New  York  was 
a  closeup  of  a  strand  of  upholsterer's  twine  found  on  the 
scene  of  the  crime.  This  lone  clue  later  led  to  the  appre- 
hension of  the  murderer. 

The  cameraman  on  a  crime  story  must  not  overlook  any 
possible  picture.  Hours  may  pass  after  a  crime  is  discov- 
ered before  further  witnesses  are  questioned  or  evidence 
revealed,  but  the  photographer  must  be  patient,  and  have 
his  ears  and  eyes  wide  open  for  any  new  turn  or  break  in 
developments. 

On  a  riot  story  the  cameraman  will  have  to  have  the 
agility  of  a  cat  and  the  fleetness  of  a  doe  to  get  the  desired 
shots.  Here  is  a  policeman  battering  a  rioter's  head  with 
his  night  stick;  a  quick  turn  of  the  head,  and  he  sees  a  detec- 
tive in  grips  with  another  civilian;  look  out,  a  mounted 
policeman  is  heading  in  his  direction,  and  the  photographer 
steps  away  in  the  nick  of  time.  Over  there,  the  crowd  is 
breaking  and  running,  and  the  cameraman  trains  his  box  in 
that  direction.  A  yell  of  warning,  he  ducks  his  head  in  time 
to  escape  a  flying  brick.  The  sight  of  the  police  card  stuck 
in  the  band  of  his  hat  may  sometime  mean  nothing  to  the 
enraged  police  and  crowd,  and  he  becomes  involved  in  the 
melee  as  a  target  from  both  sides.  He  must  be  careful  that 
the  surging  crowd  does  not  crush  him  and  his  camera  to  the 
ground.  The  photographer  cares  little  that  he  suffers  a  few 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  119 

bruises  and  cuts,  or  tears  in  his  clothing,  so  long  as  his 
equipment  is  intact.  He  does  not  want  to  miss  a  good  shot 
of  the  battle. 

Photography  from  the  air  has  stirred  the  imagination 
of  the  news  photographer  from  the  earliest  days  of  the 
profession,  and  he  finds  it  a  keen,  exciting  adventure. 

Jimmy  Hare,  soldier  of  fortune  and  photographer,  took 
the  first  air  view  of  Manhattan  from  a  free  balloon  in  1906. 
But  his  success  was  not  crowned  with  easy  effort.  For  a 
week  the  balloonist  and  Hare  rested  on  Staten  Island  wait- 
ing for  a  favorable  wind.  At  last  the  day  came,  and  up 
they  went.  Suddenly  the  breeze  died  down  to  a  mere  fan- 
wave,  and  the  balloon  could  not  rise  further.  Hare's  quick 
wits  found  a  solution.  He  pitched  the  balloonist' s  overcoat 
and  his  own  overboard.  It  helped  a  little,  but  not  much. 
Then  went  Hare's  extra  plates  and  holders  over  the  side. 
The  balloon  lifted  higher,  and  Hare  took  his  picture.  Later, 
he  took  the  first  photograph  from  an  airplane  in  this  country 
on  a  short  flight  from  Fort  Sam  Houston  at  San  Antonio, 
Texas. 

Today,  taking  pictures  from  the  air  is  a  daily  occurrence. 
With  his  hands  firmly  locked  on  the  side  handles  of  the 
aerial  camera,  the  photographer  will  order  the  pilot  to  cut 
and  bank,  while  he  gets  his  desired  shot,  a  forest  fire,  a  burn- 
ing arsenal,  a  ship  in  flames  at  sea  or  breaking  up  on  the 
rocks,  a  dirigible  floating  in  the  distance,  a  formation  of 
Army  planes  zooming  by,  an  airview  of  a  city,  a  shot  of  a 
country  estate  or  plane  wreckage  high  up  on  a  mountainside. 

The  cameraman  may  have  to  fly  through  fog  and  mist 
and  cloud,  rain  and  sleet  and  snow,  to  get  his  picture,  but 
there  is  nary  a  thought  of  danger  or  disaster  in  his  mind 
when  he  boards  the  plane.  He  will  sometimes  wear  inade- 
quate clothing  but  he  would  rather  freeze  than  order  the 
pilot  to  return.  Airsickness  may  make  him  deathly  weak, 
but  he  will  quiet  trembly  hands  and  limbs  to  focus  sharply 


120  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

on  the  scene.  The  coolness,  daring  and  loyalty  of  the  flying 
photographer  is  summed  up  in  the  experience  of  the  camera- 
man who  was  tumbled  out  of  the  plane  when  it  was  forced 
to  land  on  a  rocky  terrain,  turning  over  when  it  nosed  into 
a  stone  wall.  The  photographer's  first  words  on  scrambling 
to  his  feet  were :  "Wonder  if  there's  a  nearby  farmhouse,  so 
I  can  phone  the  office." 


©  Acme  Newspictures 

NABBING  A  TEXAS  OUTLAW  AND  HIS  WIFE 

While  his  wife  struggles  with  officers  at  the  left,  Marvin  Barrow,  member 
of  a  gang-  of  Texas  outlaws,  sinks  to  the  ground,  at  right,  after  being  shot 
in  gun  battle  with  the  posse  near  Dexter,  Iowa.  Other  members  of  the  gang 
escaped  after  the  battle  in  which  machine  guns,  .rifles  and  pistols  blazed. 
The  cameraman  was  just  as  quick  with  his  camera  as  the  police  with  their 
guns  to  make  this  unusual  picture  the  moment  the  posse  closed  in. 


I 


HI 


(r)    International    News   Photos 

FALLING    TO    HIS    DEATH 

A  split-second  shot  of  a  tragedy — the  automobile  turning  over  throwing  out 
Mfss  May  Cuncliffe,  English  auto  racer,  and  her  father,  during  a  100-mile 
race  held  at  Southport  Sands,  England.  An  instant  later  he  was  pinned 

beneath    the    car   and   killed. 


©   Signal   Corps,    U.    S.    Army 
"GOING    OVER    THE    TOP" 

The  zero  hour,  and  the  American  doughboys  clamber  over  the  top  from  their 
front  line  trench  somewhere  in  France  during  the  World  War.  Note  the 
soldier  thumbing  his  nose  at  the  enemy.  The  Signal  Corps  photographers 
were  right  up  at  the  front  to  snap  scenes  such  as  this,  and  many  were  killed 

and   wounded. 


©    Signal   Corps,    U.    S.    Army   from  Wid 

IN    THE   THICK    OF   THE    BATTLE 

The  war  photographer  plunged  ahead  with  the  front  line  troops  to  make  this 
striking  picture  of  American  doughboys,  Third  Infantry  gunners,  firing 
37  mm.  shells  during  an  advance  against  German  entrenched  positions  in 

northern    France. 


Chapter  Fill. 
THE  CAMERAMAN  COVERS  THE  DAILY  EVENT 

EVERY  news  picture  tells  a  story,  and  behind  that,  lies  the 
hand  that  guides  the  camera,  the  eye  that  envisions  the  scene 
and  the  mind  that  grasps  the  news  fundamentals  with  an 
unerring  precision — the  perfect  coordination  that  lifts  the 
news  cameraman  from  the  mere  picture-taker  to  the  expert 
recorder  of  life  on  a  camera  plate. 

The  art  of  news  photography  is  much  more  than  the 
pressing  of  a  cable  release,  the  adjusting  of  scales  and 
shutters  and  the  sighting  of  an  object  through  a  view  finder. 
It  is  the  ability  of  the  news  cameraman  to  go  beyond  the 
mechanics  of  exact  procedure,  and  feel,  sense  and  record 
the  story  with  the  vividness  of  the  news  gatherer. 

Each  story  presents  a  different  problem,  a  different 
attack.  The  news  cameraman  brushes  aside  all  difficulties, 
and  overcomes  all  obstacles.  He  reaches  the  zenith  of  his 
career  after  years  of  tilting  with  the  exciting,  the  thrilling, 
and  even  the  prosaic. 

Not  every  story  is  a  shipwreck,  five-alarm  fire  or  plane 
disaster.  He  follows  life  in  its  true  course,  the  moments 
and  incidents  that  are  drab  and  dull.  His  daily  assign- 
ments follow  the  uninteresting  routine  of  club  meetings 
and  dinners  and  cornerstone  layings.  They  may  be  thank- 
less jobs,  but  he  accepts  them  all  willingly.  It  is  not  for 
him  to  choose,  it  is  for  him  to  do  his  duty  and  do  it  well. 

From  the  moment  he  leaves  the  office  with  his  camera 
case  in  hand,  he  has  one  fact  etched  clearly  in  his  mind. 
He  must  bring  back  the  picture.  There  is  no  such  word 
as  failure.  He  will  have  seen  to  it  that  his  case  is  packed 
with  the  essentials,  his  sturdy,  compact  4x5  Speed  Graphic, 


122  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

a  dozen  holders  loaded  with  fast  emulsion  films,  a  dozen 
flash  bulbs,  a  speed  gun  accurately  synchronized,  a  tripod 
with  a  Crown  head.  His  films  and  holders  will  have  been 
properly  numbered,  his  camera  will  have  been  gone  over 
that  there  is  no  loose  screw  and  part.  The  story  has  been 
given  to  him  by  the  editor.  He  sallies  forth  into  the  un- 
known. 

If  it  is  a  club  meeting  or  the  laying  of  a  cornerstone 
set  for  a  certain  hour,  he  will  take  his  leisurely  time,  pro- 
viding, however,  he  arrives  there  a  few  minutes  ahead  of 
schedule,  so  that  he  can  present  his  proper  credentials, 
make  his  introductions  to  the  right  persons  in  charge,  learn 
who  is  present,  and  with  a  sweep  of  his  eye  take  in  the 
scene  which  he  will  photograph.  He  then  opens  his  case, 
withdraws  and  sets  his  camera,  gets  his  focusing  distance. 
Let  the  meeting  or  the  ceremonies  begin.  He  is  ready! 

If  it  is  an  accident  or  disaster,  he  knows  that  speed 
is  necessary;  every  second  counts.  He  will  hop  into  a 
taxi  and  order  the  driver  to  make  the  fastest  possible  time. 
He  knows  that  his  camera  will  record  only  what  is  before 
it.  He  wants  to  reach  the  scene  before  the  fire  dies  down 
or  the  accident  victim  is  carried  away.  It  may  be  broad 
daylight  or  raining  heavily,  he  knows  what  speed  he  will 
shoot,  what  aperture  opening  he  will  set;  his  camera  is 
ready  in  his  hand  all  set  to  shoot  the  moment  he  arrives 
at  the  scene  of  the  story. 

On  a  story  of  this  type,  his  job  is  a  bit  more  exciting 
than  his  brother  reporter.  The  latter  can  arrive  there  too 
late,  but  it  will  not  make  much  difference.  He  can  get  his 
story  from  the  eyewitnesses  or  police  remaining  on  the 
scene,  or  can  get  the  information  he  desires  from  other 
reporters.  It  makes  no  difference  to  him  that  the  fire  has 
been  extinguished  or  the  injured  persons  have  been  rushed 
to  the  hospital.  He  will  have  been  told  all  the  details  which 
in  a  moment  can  be  phoned  to  a  rewrite  man  at  the  office. 


GET  THAT  PICTURE 

But  not  so  with  the  cameraman.  It  is  necessary  that  his 
camera  record  all  the  details :  the  fire  at  its  height,  firemen 
pouring  water  on  the  blaze,  the  rescue  of  the  victims,  or 
at  the  street  accident,  the  ambulance  surgeon  bending  over 
the  victim  or  lifting  him  onto  a  stretcher  to  be  rushed  to 
the  hospital. 

Many  unusual  photographs  on  such  stories  have  been 
taken  by  the  Johnny-on-the-spot  cameraman,  and  such  pic- 
tures live  in  the  memory  of  the  readers.  Who  will  ever 
forget  the  picture  that  appeared  in  the  New  York  Daily 
News  showing  the  form  of  a  dead  woman  lying  on  the 
pavement  of  a  narrow  Brooklyn  street  awaiting  the  arrival 
of  the  ambulance  to  carry  it  away  as  the  husband  in  the 
foreground  sags  broken-heartedly  against  the  wall  of  a 
building  looking  toward  his  mate,  gone  forever,  the  victim 
of  an  automobile  accident?  Or  that  shot  taken  at  a  tene- 
ment house  fire  showing  two  victims,  clad  in  their  night 
clothes,  rushing  into  the  house  of  a  neighbor,  one  looking 
back  with  horror  on  her  face  at  the  flames  destroying  her 
flat? 

These  are  the  pictures  that  send  a  thrill  through  the 
office,  from  managing  editor  to  copy  boy,  with  cries  of 
exultation:  "It's  a  beaut'!"  "It's  great!"  "Some  pic- 
ture !",  leaping  from  the  throats  of  every  employe  from  the 
moment  the  darkroom  printer  holds  the  plate  up  to  the  red 
light  in  the  developing  room.  It  is  like  the  discovery  of 
gold  in  the  prospector's  pan,  the  uncovering  of  some  an- 
cient ruins  by  the  archaeologist,  the  scaling  of  the  peak  by 
the  mountain  climber,  it  is  the  cry  of  "Eureka!"  on  the 
finding  of  a  treasure!  But  it  is  no  sinecure,  no  chance 
stumbling,  no  Lady  Luck  to  guide  the  way;  it's  by  dint  of 
hard,  conscientious  work,  day  in  and  day  out  that  brings 
a  golden  moment  of  achievement  to  the  news  cameraman. 

The  faculties  of  the  news  photographer  are  ever  alert 
to  the  picture  possibilities.  He  can  sense  the  story,  the  pic- 


124  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

ture,  whatever  or  wherever  it  is.  One  day,  a  photographer 
was  on  his  way  to  an  assignment  in  downtown  New  York. 
Waiting  on  the  corner  for  the  traffic  light  to  shift  from 
red  to  green,  he  saw  a  cat  gripping  a  kitten  in  its  mouth 
start  across  Broadway.  The  traffic  policeman  saw  them, 
too,  and  up  went  his  hand  in  a  flash  to  stop  traffic.  The 
photographer  leaped  into  the  middle  of  the  street,  and 
in  a  few  seconds  had  his  camera  trained  on  the  cat,  the 
traffic  cop  with  arm  upraised,  the  automobiles  brought  to 
a  standstill.  The  result  was  one  of  the  greatest  pictures 
ever  made.  The  syndicate,  which  later  secured  the  nega- 
tive for  its  files,  is  still  selling  hundreds  of  prints,  and 
the  photograph  has  been  reproduced  in  every  part  of  the 
world.  It  took  less  than  a  minute  for  the  cat  to  cross  the 
street.  Had  the  photographer  just  hesitated  for  a  second 
he  would  have  been  too  late,  and  the  golden  chance  would 
have  been  lost  forever. 

On  another  occasion,  the  news  cameraman,  through  in- 
stant action,  recorded  another  epic  of  the  camera.  A  few 
photographers  were  shooting  pictures  of  Columbus  Day 
exercises  at  Columbus  Circle  in  New  York  when  a  distant 
shot  rang  out.  All  but  William  Eckenberg,  a  Wide  World 
cameraman,  thought  it  was  the  backfire  of  an  automobile. 
He  immediately  turned  and  ran  toward  the  direction  of 
the  firing.  It  was  about  a  block  down  the  street.  When 
he  reached  there  a  huge  crowd  had  already  gathered  around 
the  prostrate  form  of  a  thug  who  had  been  shot  down  by 
a  policeman.  Pushing  through  the  crowd,  Eckenberg 
reached  the  open  circle  where  the  man  lay  groaning,  with 
hands  pressed  on  stomach,  and  a  girl  holding  his  head  in 
her  lap.  The  policeman  was  waiting  for  the  ambulance 
to  rush  him  to  the  hospital.  Eckenberg  got  his  pictures, 
and  pushed  his  way  back  to  the  rim  of  the  crowd  just  as 
the  other  photographers  arrived.  But  they  could  not 
squeeze  through,  the  jam  had  become  too  thick  by  this 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  125 

time,  and  they  had  to  be  content  scrambling  up  to  the 
second  floor  of  a  nearby  building  to  get  some  shots  which 
showed  mostly  the  heads  of  the  crowd.  Quick  decision  had 
given  Eckenberg  a  news  triumph  of  the  camera. 

Coolness  in  any  emergency  is  also  another  requisite  of 
the  news  photographer,  and  it  may  take  years  and  years 
of  training  for  the  cameraman  to  keep  his  eyes  and  hands 
and  nerves  steady  at  the  critical  moment.  It  may  not  be 
funk,  but  just  a  bad  case  of  stage  fright,  which  will  place 
the  beginner  in  an  awkward  situation. 

A  youthful  cameraman,  who  had  just  entered  the  em- 
ploy of  a  syndicate  a  few  months  previous,  had  his  camera 
set  on  tripod  making  a  general  view  of  a  building  near 
Broad  and  Wall  Streets  in  New  York  when  a  terrible 
explosion  rocked  the  whole  neighborhood.  With  his  arms 
circled  around  the  camera  and  tripod  the  photographer 
managed  to  save  them  from  falling.  Further  down  the 
street  cries  of  the  injured  filled  the  air.  A  truck  filled  with 
dynamite  had  exploded  directly  in  front  of  the  Morgan 
offices.  Shattered  glass  filled  the  street.  Dozens  of  bodies 
lay  sprawled  on  the  sidewalks.  The  cameraman  moved 
forward  to  take  some  pictures,  but  he  was  trembling  from 
head  to  foot.  Nervously  he  shoved  holders  in  and  out. 
He  was  the  only  cameraman  on  the  scene  and  it  was  fully 
a  half  hour  before  a  score  of  other  news  men  appeared. 
He  then  ran  to  the  drug  store  and  phoned  his  office  de- 
scribing the  scene  and  told  the  excited  editor  that  he  had 
taken  some  pictures.  He  rushed  back.  Out  of  his  dark- 
room came  a  half  dozen  plates,  but  not  an  image  on  a 
single  one.  In  his  nervousness  and  excitement  he  had  for- 
gotten to  do  something,  he  himself  did  not  know.  He 
slumped;  his  chance  of  a  lifetime  had  come  and  gone.  An 
experienced  cameraman  would  have  stood  the  shock  of  the 
catastrophe  and  coolly  gone  about  his  job  of  taking  the 


126  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

pictures.  Those  are  the  moments  when  the  photographer 
is  put  to  the  iron  test. 

Imagine  the  moment  when  Tom  Howard,  Chicago  Tri- 
bune and  New  York  News  photographer,  was  called  upon 
to  shoot  the  picture  of  the  execution  of  Ruth  Snyder  at 
Sing  Sing  prison,  the  first  time  a  picture  was  ever  taken 
there  of  an  electrocution.  It  is  a  test  which  will  even  shatter 
the  nerves  of  the  hardest  of  cameramen.  But  Howard  had 
to  go  through  with  it.  It  was  an  assignment;  it  was  his  job 
to  take  the  picture. 

It  was  all  pre-arranged  for  the  reporter  in  front  to 
move  his  legs  so  that  Howard  could  focus  on  the  chair  with 
his  tiny  camera  strapped  to  his  ankle  and  connected  by  bulb 
resting  in  his  pocket.  It  was  all  guess  focus,  and  Howard 
pressed  his  bulb  four  times,  as  much  as  he  could  possibly 
make  without  exciting  the  suspicions  of  the  guards.  Though 
his  whole  body  quivered  and  shook,  he  remained  outwardly 
calm.  There  could  be  no  misfire,  and  he  steeled  himself 
to  rigidity  the  instant  he  pressed  the  bulb.  The  slightest 
motion  of  his  body  would  have  thrown  the  pictures  entirely 
out  of  focus. 

Only  until  he  reached  the  News  darkroom  and  thrown 
the  films  into  the  developer,  did  he  relax,  though  his  body 
still  shook  like  a  leaf.  But  the  ordeal  still  was  not  over. 
The  first  film  lifted  to  the  front  of  the  red  light  showed 
only  the  feet,  the  second  was  a  blank,  the  third  also  showed 
the  feet  but  more  of  the  body  occupying  a  corner  of  the 
negative,  and  the  fourth  was  the  shot,  slightly  out  of  focus, 
but  retouchable  and  useable.  The  men  in  the  darkroom 
let  out  a  whoop.  The  job  was  done.  The  picture  was, 
and  still  is,  a  sensation  of  the  news  world. 

Whatever  the  ethics  of  the  case  may  be,  it  is  not  for 
the  cameraman  to  question.  The  News  defended  their 
picture;  others  attacked  it.  It  was  not  for  Howard  to 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  127 

argue,  pro  or  con.  He  was  simply  told  to  cover  the  story, 
and  he  did. 

The  public  has  been  too  often  presented  with  the  picture 
of  the  cameraman,  by  medium  of  film  or  story,  as  a  brusque 
individual  who  dashes  into  bedrooms  to  snatch  photographs 
from  bureau  drawers  and  walls,  or  rummage  through  the 
pockets  of  a  victim  for  his  likeness.  There  may  have  been 
a  few  instances  of  the  like  in  the  early  days  of  catch-as- 
catch-can  and  hurly-burly  journalism,  when  cameramen 
sniffed  scornfully  at  the  word  ethics.  Those  were  the  raw, 
rough  days  when  the  tabloids  and  others  of  a  sensational 
tinge  were  jockeying  for  position  in  the  race  for  circulation. 
The  years,  however,  have  chastened  the  editors;  with  cir- 
culation and  security  won,  the  papers  have  settled  down 
into  a  state  of  fair  respectability,  and  the  cameraman  no 
longer  strikes  terror  into  the  hearts  of  his  subjects. 

The  cameraman  today  still  yearns  and  strives  to  get 
the  picture  on  the  story,  but  he  will  not  violate  the  fine 
rules  and  ethics  of  good  journalism  that  hold  in  the  city 
room.  The  public  no  longer  shies  at  his  presence;  the 
majority  of  persons  will  gladly  assist  the  gentlemanly 
cameraman,  and  the  police  have  learned  to  cooperate  as 
they  seldom  did  in  the  past.  A  picture  of  a  criminal  is 
wanted:  the  headquarters  will  kindly  release  a  rogues  gal- 
lery shot;  a  new  picture  is  wanted  after  an  arrest,  the  boys 
will  be  allowed  into  an  anteroom  to  allow  them  to  make 
the  shot  of  the  prisoner  being  questioned  by  the  district 
attorney  or  held  between  detectives  before  he  is  led  back 
to  further  questioning  or  thrown  into  a  cell. 

There  is  no  longer  the  need  to  follow  the  tactics  of  the 
early  Park  Row  photographer  who  was  assigned  to  get 
pictures  of  a  man  accused  of  a  fiendish  crime  on  Long 
Island.  The  keeper  of  the  jail  had  barred  the  photographer 
from  the  building,  saying  the  prisoner  was  very  weak.  Hang- 
ing around  until  after  dark,  the  cameraman  borrowed  a 


128  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

crowbar  from  a  neighboring  blacksmith  shop,  climbed  on 
a  roof  and  attacked  the  barred  window.  He  located  the 
cell  where  the  half-conscious  prisoner  was  stretched  out  on 
a  cot,  broke  in  and  set  off  a  flash  of  the  accused  man.  The 
cameraman  then  made  his  getaway. 

Today  there  is  cooperation  all  along  the  line.  Detec- 
tives on  a  major  crime  story  will  often  gather  in  pictures 
of  the  victim,  and  if  there  are  enough  copies,  will  distribute 
them,  or  if  there  is  only  a  single  shot,  will  allow  the  camera- 
men to  make  copies  then  and  there.  Judges,  too,  at  court 
trials,  will  set  aside  a  special  place  for  the  cameramen,  or 
allow  pictures  of  witnesses  to  be  taken  in  anterooms.  Pic- 
tures may  also  be  allowed  to  be  taken  between  sessions,  say 
at  the  noon  hour  or  after  the  testimony  has  been  finished 
for  the  day. 

In  the  Loeb-Leopold  murder  trial  in  Chicago  in  1924, 
the  presiding  judge  allowed  photographs  to  be  taken  at  the 
noon  session.  At  the  Hall-Mills  murder  trial  in  Somerville, 
N.  J.,  in  1926,  Justice  Cleary  laid  down  a  rule  limiting 
pictures  to  be  taken  from  the  sides  of  the  room,  and  at 
the  trial  of  Bruno  Hauptmann  for  the  kidnaping  and  mur- 
der of  the  Lindbergh  baby,  in  Flemington,  N.  J.,  in  1935, 
two  photographers  were  allowed  in  to  make  pictures  for 
release  to  all  syndicates  and  newspapers. 

In  a  murder  trial  at  Detroit,  when  jurymen  protested 
that  flashlights  had  prevented  them  hearing  the  evidence, 
the  judge  said:  "Please  be  patient.  The  safety  of  the 
administration  of  criminal  law  is  publicity,"  and  the  pho- 
tographers remained  undisturbed. 

Even  in  France  it  is  not  unusual  for  special  lights  to 
be  erected  to  assist  the  cameramen  to  get  the  pictures  of 
the  court  proceedings.  This  was  done  at  the  trial  of  "Blue- 
beard" Landru,  who  went  on  trial  for  the  murder  of  ten 
of  his  numerous  financees,  so  that  pictures  could  be  taken 
of  the  passing  of  the  death  sentence. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  129 

Attacks  on  photographers  are  quickly  settled,  and  con- 
doned. Just  recently  a  prisoner  broke  away  from  his  guard 
and  felled  a  cameraman  about  to  take  his  picture.  The 
guards  pounced  on  the  prisoner,  striking  him  in  the  jaw, 
and  the  cameraman  was  allowed  to  snap  his  shot. 

When  Dr.  Alice  Lindsay  Wynekoop,  defendant  in  a 
murder  trial  in  Chicago,  fainted  during  the  proceedings, 
a  photographer  tried  to  snap  the  picture.  A  defense  at- 
torney hurled  a  three  pound  law  book  at  the  cameraman, 
striking  him  in  the  forehead  in  an  attempt  to  prevent  the 
picture  being  taken.  The  attorney  later  apologized. 

The  photographers  today  will  strictly  abide  by  the 
court's  decision  on  the  privilege  of  taking  pictures.  The 
Federal  Courts  will  allow  no  courtroom  shots;  the  camera- 
men will  make  no  attempt  to  override  the  edict.  In  Wash- 
ington no  pictures  are  allowed  to  be  made  during  a  Supreme 
Court  session. 

Any  other  rules  set  down  against  the  taking  of  news 
photographs  are  closely  observed.  The  Senate  in  Wash- 
ington allows  no  pictures  to  be  taken  during  any  of  its 
sessions;  the  House  of  Representatives  permits  no  photo- 
graphs to  be  made  on  the  floor  when  the  members  are  con- 
vened. The  cameramen  in  the  Capital  will  make  no  move 
to  violate  the  rules.  Their  gentlemanly  conduct  has  re- 
dounded to  their  benefit  because  where  they  are  privileged 
to  make  their  pictures  they  are  treated  with  every  courtesy 
and  consideration. 

However,  a  cameraman  will  feel  that  there  is  no  abuse 
of  privilege  or  conduct  when  he  snaps  a  picture  of  a  person 
who  figures  in  the  news,  even  though*  that  person  may  be 
averse  to  having  his  or  her  picture  taken.  Justifiably,  the 
photographer  feels  that  he  is  recording  a  story  with  his 
camera  and  is  entitled  to  present  his  camera-story  for  pub- 
lication by  the  same  token  a  reporter  is  privileged  to  present 
his  written  material  for  public  perusal.  Just  so  long  as  he 


130  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

does  not  break  the  rule  of  decency  and  fair  play  in  getting 
his  shot.  He  would  not  think  of  taking  a  picture  of  a 
judge  in  an  intoxicated  condition  or  a  young  woman  found 
in  a  promiscuous  situation. 

Once  a  photographer  at  a  night  club  snapped  a  picture 
of  a  young  woman,  well-known  to  the  public,  engaged  in 
conversation  with  a  young  man.  After  the  picture  was 
taken,  the  young  lady  quietly  asked  the  cameraman  not  to 
have  the  picture  circulated.  It  might  embarrass  her;  her 
husband  was  away,  and  the  public  might  give  the  picture 
the  wrong  interpretation.  The  young  man  was  a  good  friend 
— but  there  was  no  further  explaining.  The  cameraman 
pulled  his  slide,  snapped  out  the  plate  and  deliberately 
exposed  it.  The  young  woman  thanked  him  profusely. 
He  had  won  her  friendship  for  life,  and  on  many  occa- 
sions thereafter  she  'phoned  him  to  give  him  tips  on  many 
exclusive  society  pictures.  However,  he  had  learned  his 
lesson,  too.  Thereafter,  he  first  begged  the  kind  permis- 
sion of  persons  at  night  clubs  and  society  events  before 
setting  off  his  flash. 

Men  and  women  who  are  in  the  public  eye  today  are 
generally  not  averse  to  having  their  pictures  taken.  Many 
of  them  have  learned  it  is  far  better  to  face  the  camera 
with  a  pleasant  smile  than  to  duck  and  run  and  witness 
themselves  in  newspaper  reproductions  in  the  most  ludi- 
crous poses. 

At  one  time,  J.  P.  Morgan,  the  mogul  of  finance,  would 
use  every  strategy  to  evade  the  cameraman.  Caught  aboard 
a  ship  returning  from  Europe  one  day  he  ran  toward  the 
photographer  brandishing  his  cane;  on  another  occasion, 
he  was  caught  by  the  flash  of  a  speed-gun  ducking  behind 
some  palms.  They  were  not  in  the  least  flattering.  His 
attitude  suddenly  changed  when  he  appeared  before  the 
Senate  Munitions  Committee  hearing  in  Washington,  and 
allowed  himself  to  be  taken  in  all  sorts  of  poses.  He  even 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  131 

smiled  when  his  photograph  showing  a  midget  on  his  lap  was 
circulated  far  and  wide. 

There  are  still  a  few  persons  who  will  flee  on  the  ap- 
proach of  the  cameraman.  Greta  Garbo  tries  to  elude 
the  news  photographer  on  every  occasion,  and  Katherine 
Hepburn,  the  movie  actress,  follows  suit.  Miss  Hepburn, 
accompanied  by  her  maid,  was  entering  a  New  York  theatre 
one  night,  when  she  spotted  a  photographer  training  his 
camera  on  her.  She  turned  on  her  heels  and  fled.  The 
camera  clicked.  The  following  day  a  newspaper  reproduc- 
tion showed  the  form  of  the  actress  contorted  in  a  flying 
leap.  It  was  far  from  flattering. 

Rudy  Vallee,  the  crooner  of  love  songs,  is  another  celeb- 
rity, who  tries  to  avoid  the  cameraman.  In  Boston,  re- 
cently, a  battery  of  cameramen  were  awaiting  his  appear- 
ance outside  a  court  building.  Sighting  them,  he  turned 
and  fled  inside,  the  photographers  after  him.  Into  an 
elevator  they  went,  but  they  were  so  jammed  together  that 
they  had  no  room  to  work  their  cameras.  On  leaving 
at  an  upper  floor,  Rudy  dashed  into  a  closeby  room  and 
barred  the  door.  In  hushed  tones,  the  cameramen  went 
into  consultation.  A  few  minutes  passed,  and  a  heavy 
hand  knocked  on  the  door.  A  voice  announced  that  he 
was  an  employee  who  must  get  into  the  room  at  once  to 
transact  some  business.  The  door  was  opened,  and  the 
grinning  photographers  entered.  The  cameramen  got 
their  pictures. 

There  are  some  persons  who  feel  unusually  sensitive 
about  their  facial  features  or  expressions.  The  former 
Mayor  John  O'Brien  of  New  York  felt  that  his  pugna- 
cious jaw  did  not  show  to  the  best  advantage  in  news  pic- 
tures, and  for  a  long  time  stormed  at  the  cameramen  who 
tried  to  get  his  picture.  But  he  finally  succumbed,  and  the 
man  with  the  fighting  jaw  became  quite  friendly  to  the 
news  photographers. 


132  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

Sinclair  Lewis,  the  novelist,  left  his  dinner  in  a  New 
York  hotel  one  evening  because  he  did  not  want  to  be 
photographed  while  eating.  "They  always  get  you  like  this 
— I've  seen  so  many  come  out  like  this,"  he  added,  distorting 
his  face  to  illuminate  his  point.  However,  he  needed  only 
to  explain  his  objections  to  be  accommodated.  The  pho- 
tographers caught  him  in  more  favorable  poses. 

The  late  Senator  Huey  Long,  the  Kingfish  of  Louis- 
iana, was  an  enigma  to  the  news  photographer.  In  New 
York,  whenever  he  visited  the  city,  he  was  the  gracious 
soul,  and  the  click  of  the  camera  was  a  familiar  sound  in 
his  hotel  room.  He  even  posed  at  the  bar  one  day  show- 
ing how  he  mixed  his  favorite  drink.  In  his  home  baliwick, 
he  presented  the  reverse,  and  no  cameraman  dared  take 
his  picture  alighting  from  the  train  or  walking  in  the  street 
without  fear  of  being  attacked  by  one  of  his  bodyguards. 
A  blow  to  the  face  and  a  smashed  camera  was  the  reward 
reaped  for  many  such  an  effort. 

The  late  Sir  Basil  Zaharoff,  the  mystery  man  of  mu- 
nitions, did  everything  possible  to  evade  the  cameraman, 
but  the  telephoto  lens  caught  him  on  a  few  occasions  dur- 
ing his  frequent  sojourns  in  the  French  Riviera.  One  cam- 
eraman after  a  long  time  caught  up  with  Robert  Elliot,  New 
York  State  executioner,  the  most  elusive  of  persons,  and  a 
story  on  Elliot  will  always  carry  the  single,  poor,  slightly- 
out-of-focus  profile. 

The  public  must  realize  that  it  is  hard  to  avoid  the 
quick-trigger  cameraman,  and  it  is  far  better  to  succumb 
graciously.  The  brandished  cane  or  stick,  or  threat  of 
punishment  and  reprisal,  will  never  intimidate  the  news 
photographer. 

In  the  sports  field,  it  is  mostly  gracious  acquiescence, 
although  there  are  a  few  individuals  here  and  there  who 
grudgingly  pose  for  the  camera.  Babe  Ruth  would  let 
out  a  few  explosive  remarks  before  doing  his  stuff  for  the 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  133 

photographers;  Big  Bill  Tilden,  the  tennis  star,  would 
nettle  the  cameramen  with  his  temperamental  outbursts, 
but  since  turning  pro  has  become  an  amiable  subject.  Fred 
Perry,  former  world's  tennis  champion,  and  now  a  pro, 
has  always  endeared  himself  to  the  cameraman  with  his 
kindly,  gracious  ways.  Mike  Jacobs,  the  sports  promoter, 
sees  to  it  at  all  times  that  the  photographers  are  given  the 
most  courteous  consideration.  In  his  sports  arena,  he  has 
moved  the  cameramen  into  the  front  row  seats  so  that  they 
can  get  their  ringside  shots.  By  far  and  large,  the  well- 
known  figures  of  the  sports  world  have  shown  themselves 
to  be  true  sportsmen  and  women  in  their  relations  with 
the  men  with  the  cameras. 

The  cameramen  covering  the  White  House  have  always 
found  its  occupants  to  be  very  pleasant  and  agreeable. 
Although  President  Wilson  was  a  bit  cold  and  aloof,  and 
President  Coolidge  somewhat  gruff  and  eager  to  pose 
his  own  shots,  they  never  dissented.  President  Harding 
made  a  hit  with  his  warmth  and  geniality.  The  boys  have 
taken  President  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt  to  their  hearts. 
He  has  been  found  to  be  most  attentive  to  their  wants. 
Only  one  incident  has  marred  their  visits  to  the  White 
House,  although  it  was  not  really  the  fault  of  the  camera- 
men. A  candid  camera  shot  was  circulated  with  the  caption 
that  the  President  was  deeply  worried  about  his  problems. 
It  showed  his  fingers  pressed  to  his  forehead.  In  reality 
it  was  a  reflex  motion  to  shade  his  eyes  from  the  glare  of 
the  flashlights.  Rightfully,  the  President  was  irked. 

The  kindliness  of  the  President  and  Mrs.  Roosevelt 
in  their  relations  with  the  press,  is  illustrated  in  the  follow- 
ing incident. 

George  Alexanderson,  a  Wide  World  photographer, 
was  covering  the  President's  stay  at  his  Hyde  Park  estate, 
and  lived  with  other  news  cameramen  at  a  nearby  Pough- 
keepsie  hotel.  During  a  lull  in  his  assignment,  George 


134  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

decided  to  take  a  cooling  plunge  in  a  public  pool,  and  while 
climbing  a  ladder  for  a  dive,  slipped  and  injured  his  ankle. 
In  terrible  agony,  he  was  assisted  back  to  the  hotel.  But 
he  was  downhearted  for  another  reason.  There  was  to  be 
a  picnic  that  afternoon  arranged  by  the  President  for  the 
cameramen  on  the  lawn  of  his  home,  and  George  decided 
to  go.  A  three-dollar  pair  of  crutches  was  bought  by  the 
boys,  and  he  hobbled  onto  the  lawn.  Suddenly  the  end  of 
the  crutch  struck  a  hole,  and  he  fell.  The  pain  was  excruci- 
ating and  he  could  not  rise.  He  was  carried  into  the 
President's  home,  and  Mrs.  Roosevelt  rubbed  alcohol  on  his 
ankle  until  the  physician  arrived.  Comfortably  tucked 
into  a  car,  he  was  carried  back  to  his  hotel  room.  An 
X-ray  the  following  morning  revealed  he  had  a  broken  leg. 
All  during  his  convalescence,  he  was  the  recipient  of  many 
messages  of  good  cheer  from  the  Roosevelts  who  also  saw 
to  it  that  he  was  well  taken  care  of.  They  sent  him  many 
large  baskets  of  flowers. 

It  was  a  demonstration  of  friendliness  which  the  camera- 
men will  never  forget. 

The  settings  can  either  be  a  White  House  office  or  a 
lumber  camp  in  Wisconsin,  a  dowager's  ballroom  or  an 
East  Side  tenement.  The  Welcome  mat  is  stretched  out 
for  the  photographer's  reception.  Men  will  straighten 
their  ties  and  crease  their  pants,  women  will  curl  the  loose 
ends  of  their  hair  and  look  twice  in  their  mirrors  to  see 
that  they  have  their  lips  and  cheeks  correctly  rouged.  The 
photographer  is  no  longer  taboo.  The  press  and  the  public 
must  be  served! 

Arriving  at  a  private  or  public  function,  a  press  repre- 
sentative or  publicity  man  will  see  to  it  that  the  boys  are 
placed  at  a  special  guest  table,  the  notables  are  picked  out 
and  properly  identified  for  the  captions  and  left-to-right 
positions,  and  ample  time  given  to  make  the  pictures.  There 
may  be  a  slight  inconvenience  to  other  guests  as  the  flashes 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  135 

are  made  or  when  the  cameramen  rush  forward  to  make 
the  close-up  shots.  But  they  are  used  to  that  by  now. 
The  cameramen  make  their  two  or  three  pictures  needed 
to  cover  the  story  and  quietly  retire. 

Covering  a  fire  or  automobile  accident,  the  flash  of 
the  police  card  is  all  that  is  needed  to  give  the  cameramen 
all  the  room  necessary  to  make  their  pictures.  The  police 
and  fire  officials  are  courteous  to  the  photographers  and  it 
is  only  the  rare  occasion  when  a  gruff  voice  of  a  bluecoat 
shuffles  a  cameraman  back  from  the  lines.  In  the  majority 
of  hospitals  the  cameramen  are  allowed  to  take  pictures 
of  injury  and  maternity  cases  providing  the  patient  is  will- 
ing and  is  not  in  too  serious  condition  to  pose. 

In  covering  stories  on  the  property  of  individuals  and 
corporations  it  is  necessary  to  get  the  oral  or  written 
permission  of  the  owners  either  by  direct  contact  with  the 
owners  or  through  the  owners'  secretaries.  However,  there 
are  many  corporations  which  have  made  it  a  practise  to  keep 
photographers  away  from  their  properties,  especially  when 
there  is  serious  property  damage.  When  a  wreck  occurs, 
the  private  subway  and  elevated  lines  in  New  York  im- 
mediately post  guards  to  keep  the  cameramen  away.  The 
same  holds  true  with  many  railroad  companies,  steamship 
lines  and  oil  companies.  But  whether  it  seems  foolish  and 
unreasonable,  the  cameraman  accepts  the  ban  graciously, 
and  stays  away. 

The  proper  cards  of  identification  will  permit  the  cam- 
eraman into  most  places,  and  it  is  very  essential  that  he 
has  them  ready  for  display  before  he  starts  out  on  a  story. 
A  special  park  permit  will  allow  him  to  shoot  his  pictures 
in  Central  Park  and  the  Bronx  Zoological  Gardens  in  New 
York;  a  cutter  pass  will  enable  the  cameraman  to  board 
the  government  tug  which  leaves  the  Battery  daily  to  meet 
the  incoming  ships  at  Quarantine;  Navy,  Army  and  Coast 
Guard  permits  will  allow  the  photographer  to  cover  activi- 


136  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

ties  of  these  branches  of  the  Government's  defense.  In 
some  cases,  the  photographs  of  the  latter  have  to  be  sub- 
mitted to  headquarters  in  Washington  before  they  are  re- 
leased for  publication. 

In  Washington  the  permit  is  the  open  sesame  to  most 
places:  the  photographers  carry  about  ten  special  passes 
which  are  issued  by  the  White  House,  the  Navy,  the  Coast 
Guard,  the  Army,  the  Treasury,  the  Capitol,  House  of 
Representatives  and  several  other  branches  of  the  govern- 
ment. 

The  White  House  Photographers  Association,  organ- 
ized in  1926,  has  a  membership  of  about  70,  and  holds 
its  members  to  strict  accounting  for  any  violation  of  a  gov- 
ernment rule  or  order.  The  association  was  begun  primarily 
to  obtain  for  the  news  photographers  all  the  privileges  and 
courtesies  which  were  being  extended  to  other  representa- 
tives of  the  press. 

The  spirit  of  cooperation  among  the  newspaper  pho- 
tographers is  a  fine  evidence  of  the  spirit  of  fair  play  and 
sportsmanship  that  pervades  their  ranks.  In  New  York 
the  Press  Photographers'  Association,  now  in  existence  for 
many  years,  is  an  organization  devoted  to  the  recognition 
and  development  of  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the  news 
cameraman,  and  with  the  true  fraternal  spirit,  will  assist 
each  other  in  time  of  need.  A  photographer  who  by  chance 
has  arrived  on  a  story  a  few  minutes  late,  or  will  experi- 
ence difficulty  with  his  equipment  can  count  on  the  assist- 
ance of  his  fellow  worker  to  get  the  needed  picture.  How- 
ever, the  photographer  who  has  worked  on  a  story  alone  or 
obtained  an  exclusive  picture  is  not  required  to  share  the 
benefits  of  his  scoop.  The  forces  of  initiative  and  resource- 
fulness are  still  given  wide  play,  and  a  scoop  on  a  story 
is  still  the  desired  thing. 

With  the  fine  cooperative  spirit  in  its  ranks,  the  agree- 
able, gentlemanly  approach  to  their  subjects,  the  kind  re- 


©   1937,    Wide  World  Photos 

CONSOLING  DYING  PANAY  VICTIM 

Lying  amid  the  tall  bamboo  reeds  on  the  Yangtze  River  bank,  Sandro  Sandri 
Italian  journalist,  who  suffered  an  abdominal  wound  during  the  bombing  of 
the  United  States  gunboat  Panay  on  December  12,  1937,  is  being  comforted 
by  Luigi  Barzini,  a  fellow  Italian  newspaperman,  who  was  also  on  the  Panay. 
For  hours  Sandri  lay  there,  suffering  untold  agonies,  until  aid  was  summoned 
and  he  was  carried  with  12  other  wTounded  to  Hohsien,  five  miles  away.  He 
died  the  following  afternoon  in  Hohsien's  town  hospital. 


(T)    International    News    Photo 

THE   SHIP'S   GOING  DOWN! 

A  remarkable  picture  of  the  sinking  of  the  French  transport  Sontay  in  the 
Mediterranean  during  the  World  War  taken  by  Thomas  Grant,  an  official 
photographer  with  the  Allied  forces  in  Salonica.  Grant  was  aboard  the  Sontay 
enroute  to  England  when  the  ship  was  struck  by  a  torpedo  fired  from  a 
German  U-boat.  From  a  lifeboat  into  which  he  had  leaped  in  stockinged  feet 
he  made  this  striking  shot.  Several  minutes  later  the  boat  sank. 


©    1937.    Wide    World    Photos 

THE    PAN  AY'S    GRIM   FAREWELL 

The  murky  waters  of  the  Yangtze  slowly  climb  higher  upon  the  stricken 
United  States  gunboat  Panay  after  she  had  fought  to  the  last'  against  a 
squadron  of  Japanese  bombing  planes  on  December  12,  1937.  Survivors, 
including  many  wounded,  from  amid  tall  reeds  on  the  river  bank,  watched 
the  vessel  slowly  sink,  then  disappear. 


©    1937,    Wide    World    Photos 

BRAVELY    ENDURES    PATN 

Chief  Quartermaster  John  Lang  of  the  United  States  gunboat  Panay,  whose 
jaw  was  split  open  and  suffered  the  loss  of  several  teeth  when  hit  by  a 
shell  fragment  during  the  bombing  of  the  ship  by  Japanese  planes  on 
December  12,  1937,'  tries  to  stop  flow  of  blood  while  resting  on  improvised 
couch  amid  tall  reeds  of  the  Yangtze  River  Bank. 


(Q  Pictures.    Inc. 

A    SOLDIER'S    FAREWELL 

Little  do  they  know  what  the  future  holds  for  them  as  this  Italian  soldier 
bids  his  wife  and  children  good-bye  before  sailing  from  Naples  on  the  Saturnia 
to  join  his  comrades  in  the  war  in  Ethiopia — one  of  the  most  significant 
pictures  taken  by  Joseph  Caneva,  Associated  Press  photographer,  during  his 
coverage  of  the  African  campaign. 


©   Robert   Capa   from  Black   Star 
FALLING    TO    HIS    DEATH 

A  machine  gun  bullet  from  an  Insurgent  trench  on  the  Cordoba  front  in 
Spain  finds  its  mark,  and  the  Loyalist  soldier  tumbles  to  his  death — one  of 
the  most  startling-  pictures  to  come  out  of  the  Spanish  war  area.  It  was  taken 
by  Robert  Capa,  a  photographer  who  had  attached  himself  to  the  Loyalist 
forces.  Capa  and  the  soldier  were  in  an  isolated  trench,  separated  from  the 
main  body  of  troops.  The  soldier  wanted  to  rejoin  them.  He  clambered 
out  of  the  trench.  At  that  instant  the  bullet  struck  him — and  Capa  auto- 
matically snapped  his  camera. 


©  News  of  the  Day  from  International  News  Photos 

THIS   IS   WAR— 1937    STYLE! 

The  Chinese  baby,  bleeding  and  blood-splattered,  cries  for  its  parents,  but 
they  are  dead,  victims  of  t'he  Japanese  bombers  which  neatly  dropped  their 
eggs  on  the  North  Station  at  Shanghai.  Hundreds  of  Chinese  refugees  were 
slaughtered  when  the  planes  circled  the  station  and  unloaded  their  cargoes 
of  heavy  explosives. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  137 

gard  for  the  susceptibilities  and  feelings  of  the  victim  of 
misfortune,  the  newspaper  photographer  has  emerged  from 
the  rough  seed  bed  and  forcing  house  of  the  early  days  of 
picture  work  to  be  a  true  Knight  of  the  Camera. 

From  the  publisher  down  to  the  reporter  and  camera- 
man on  the  street,  a  new  tendency,  a  new  feeling  for  the 
rights  of  the  individual  has  sprung  up  to  earn  the  respect, 
good-will  and  earnest  cooperation  of  the  public. 

A  recent  editorial  in  "Editor  and  Publisher,"  the  weekly 
Newspaper  for  the  Makers  of  Newspapers,  sounded  the 
clarion  call  of  the  new  spirit  of  today's  journalism: 

It  read:  "The  press  will  and  should  defend  its  right 
to  full  pictorial  as  well  as  literary  reporting  of  all  public 
events,  but  it  is  time  to  pull  up  and  reassess  the  value  and 
inherent  justice  of  reporting  and  photography  that  invades 
the  family  circle  and  cater  to  morbid  and  curious  minds. 
Undoubtedly  they  make  circulation,  but  if  they  also  make 
intelligent  readers  distrust  and  even  detest  newspapers,  the 
net  result  cannot  be  profitable." 

The  publisher  is  heeding  the  call,  and  so  is  the  camera- 
man. There  is  no  longer  the  need  to  think  of  the  news 
photographer  as  the  anonymous,  half-shadowy  figure  who 
slinks  and  sleuths.  In  spite  of  fiction,  film  and  fable,  the 
cameraman  today  is  the  brave,  self-reliant,  respectful  person 
of  gentlemanly  habits  and  appearance,  who  sacrifices  health 
and  pleasure  for  one  attainment — service  and  loyalty  to  the 
press  and  the  public. 


Chapter  IX. 
THE  WAR  PHOTOGRAPHER 

In  peacetime,  a  sudden  catastrophe  will  convulse  the 
world  with  its  horror — an  earthquake,  a  flood,  a  fire,  an 
explosion,  a  shipwreck — and  the  report  of  hundreds  of 
lives  lost  will  stir  the  placid  citizens  to  the  realization  that 
peace  has  also  its  dangers,  that  life  amid  peace  is  not 
so  secure,  after  all.  Flaming  newspaper  streamers  an- 
nounce the  event;  accounts  of  the  story  fill  column  after 
column  of  news  print;  photographs  of  the  catastrophe 
are  sought  after  by  the  editors  like  priceless  gems — and 
no  expense  is  spared  to  assign  the  cameraman,  and  trans- 
mit the  photograph  by  the  fastest  possible  means. 

"To  hell  with  the  expense,"  a  correspondent  at 
Managua,  Nicaragua,  was  cabled,  when  the  editor  in  New 
York  was  told  that  it  would  cost  thousands  of  dollars  to 
carry  the  pictures  by  plane  from  the  earthquake-stricken 
area.  The  plane  made  a  non-stop  dash  through  fog  and 
storm  to  land  the  pictures  safely  at  a  New  York  airport. 

Within  several  days,  the  story  is  virtually  forgotten. 
The  good  citizens  go  back  to  their  placid,  routine  ways, 
and  another  period  of  time  elapses  before  the  world  gets 
another  painful  jab.  The  newspapers  fill  up  again  with 
dull,  routine  news,  and  the  editors  bite  nails,  wondering 
where  they  can  dig  up  an  important  enough  story  to 
warrant  a  front-page,  three-column  banner. 

In  wartime,  the  first  stories  and  photographs  of  the 
battles  sicken  and  revolt  the  readers,  and  then,  with  days 
passing,  assume  a  prosaic  form,  so  that  hardened  conscious- 
nesses accept  the  blasting  of  cities  and  the  destruction  of 
life  with  but  an  occasional  "Isn't  it  terrible,"  and  then 
sink  back  to  personal  dimensions,  its  fears  confined  largely 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  139 

to  the  two-cent  rise  in  the  price  of  prime  ribs  of  beef  and 
the  delayed  payment  of  the  gas  bill. 

War  pictures,  at  the  time,  have  little  effect.  In  fact, 
the  reader,  surfeited,  so  he  thinks,  with  war  news  and 
scenes  of  troops  marching,  shells  exploding,  refugees  on 
the  march,  says:  UO,  let  up  a  bit  with  that  stuff!",  and 
turns  the  pages  quickly  to  read  Polly  Prim's  menus  and 
the  baseball  scores. 

Throughout  the  World  War,  though  thousands  of  war 
pictures  were  taken,  distributed,  and  printed,  here,  the 
readers  were  scarcely  impressed  by  the  brutality  of  the 
conflict.  Stern  censors  behind  the  lines  kept  the  revolting 
scenes  safe  from  the  public  gaze.  A  plethora  of  views 
showing  troops  on  the  march,  mothers  and  sisters  prepar- 
ing jams  and  knitting  sweaters  for  the  boys  in  the  trenches, 
British  and  French  and  German  officials  conferring  on  this 
or  that  plan  of  attack,  and  of  course,  the  cleverly  prepared 
propaganda  to  show  the  bestiality  of  the  enemy  to  give 
our  entrance  into  the  war  a  moral  boost,  deluged  the 
press,  but  they  were  monotonous.  Let's  have  more  base- 
ball and  beauty  contest  pictures ! 

It  was  not  until  long  after  the  conflict  was  ended  that 
the  world  was  allowed  to  see  the  uncensored  stuff  the  war 
departments  unhesitatingly  released — and  the  closeups  of 
bayonets  sticking  into  soft  flesh  and  severed  arms  and 
legs  rotting  in  the  sun  gave  the  world  the  true  meaning 
of  war.  Who  made  the  pictures?  Many  were  lost  in 
the  anonomity  of  a  private  or  officer,  and  identification 
largely  remains  unsolved.  Individual  effort  was  merged 
with  the  whole;  the  results  are  the  work  of  hundreds  of 
cameramen,  many  of  whom  died  with  a  bullet  or  shell 
fragment  stopping  them  as  they  plunged  ahead  with  the 
attacking  troops,  the  cameras  still  clutched  tightlv  in  their 
hands. 

Our  own  War  Department  has  copies  of  war  photo- 
graphs for  sale  at  the  Munitions  Building  in  Washington. 


140  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

The  reader  can  obtain  a  6l/>  x  8^  inch  contact  print,  a 
single  weight,  gloss  finish  photograph  for  only  thirty  cents. 
There  are  also  enlargements  from  movies  made  in  the 
region  of  Exermont,  camouflaged  cameras  among  the 
ruins  in  various  battle  areas  and  also  pictures  of  a  number 
of  the  photographers  themselves.  Stories  in  connection 
with  their  exploits?  The  War  Department  replies  they 
have  none !  The  photographer-soldier's  duty  was  done. 
Only  his  unidentified  work  remains,  and  his  heroism  is 
emblazoned  on  the  face  of  every  photograph  that  is  filed 
in  the  records. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  world  war,  newspaper  photog- 
raphers, who  had  hurried  over  from  England  to  get  the 
first  shots  of  the  German  troops  sweeping  down  through 
Belgium  and  those  of  the  refugees  streaming  ahead  of  the 
terror,  recklessly  exposed  themselves  to  danger,  and  there 
are  many  stories  of  London  cameramen,  secreting  small 
cameras  on  their  persons,  sneaking  through  the  German 
lines  in  Belgium,  giving  the  world  its  first  pictorial  evidence 
of  the  invasion  of  that  country.  If  they  had  been  caught — 
well,  no  doubt,  it  would  have  meant  the  firing  squad.  Then 
the  military  stepped  in.  The  photographer  in  mufti  be- 
came the  camera-armed  member  of  the  ranks,  subject  to 
the  sternest  discipline,  and  ordered  what  and  what  not  to 
make.  The  photographer  swung  his  camera  in  and  out  of 
a  maze  of  orders,  regulations,  whizzing  bullets,  bursting 
shells — just  another  soldier  among  the  millions  serving 
God  and  country.  Many  a  potential  Steichen  went  crash- 
ing down  into  a  gas-choked  shell  hole  to  be  stilled  forever 
— only  an  identification  tag  around  his  neck  to  remind  the 
War  Department  to  forward  a  telegram  to  the  nearest  kin. 

Soldiers  clambering  the  trench  tops  at  the  zero  hour, 
the  charge  with  the  bayonet,  the  bodies  littering  the  pitted 
ground  after  the  attack,  the  prisoners  marched  back — 
there  are  hundreds  of  such  pictures  in  the  department's 
files.  There  is  one  among  them,  a  rather  blurry  shot,  of 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  141 

a  shell  explosion  near  Sedan,  France.  The  photographer, 
Lieutenant  Estop,  who  had  automatically  clicked  his  cam- 
era, was  blown  to  bits.  Only  the  camera,  flung  to  one 
side,  was  found  intact.  But  they  are  not  the  only  out- 
standing pictures  to  reveal  the  horrors  of  war. 

One  of  the  most  stirring  pictures  to  be  brought  back  to 
England  for  publication  in  the  early  days  of  the  war 
showed  a  Belgian  woman  refugee  seated  on  the  curbstone 
of  a  small  town  in  Belgium.  She  is  too  tired  to  move 
forward.  Only  a  few  possessions  she  managed  to  save 
from  her  small  farmhouse  near  Liege  are  perched  beside 
her  frail  form  as  she  bows  her  head  in  resignation  to  the 
inevitable.  The  nightmare  of  her  flight  is  etched  in  the 
shadowy  hollows  of  her  sunken  cheekbones  and  the  lack 
of  food  and  sleep  in  the  dark  circles  pinching  her  tired 
eyes.  A  frail,  helpless  thing  caught  in  the  swirl  of  the 
holocaust ! 

Thomas  Grant,  an  official  photographer  for  the  Allied 
forces  in  Salonica,  had  made  hundreds  of  pictures  around 
the  battle  lines,  but  the  best  remembered  of  his  war  shots 
were  those  taken  while  on  his  way  home  to  England  for 
a  furlough — the  torpedoing  of  the  French  transport  Son- 
tay  on  which  he  was  sailing  with  hundreds  of  others,  bound 
for  a  port  of  peace.  Within  four  minutes,  a  deadly  missile 
streaking  through  the  waters  of  the  Mediterranean  from 
a  German  submarine  had  struck  the  vitals  of  the  ship  and 
sent  her  bottomwards. 

Grant  was  asleep  in  his  cabin  when  the  crash  came. 
He  grabbed  a  lifebelt  and  made  for  the  deck  in  his 
stockinged  feet.  Suddenly  remembering  his  camera,  he 
dashed  back  into  his  room  and  flung  the  strap  of  the 
camera  case  around  his  neck.  He  then  made  for  the  life- 
boat to  which  he  was  allotted  in  "abandon  ship"  rehears- 
als, but  it  had  already  been  lowered  and  was  bobbing  up 
and  down  in  the  high  waves,  far  below  him.  He  took 
the  one  chance  left.  The  end  of  a  dangling  rope  was 


142  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

within  a  few  inches  of  the  crowded  boat.  He  slid  down, 
but  by  that  time  the  boat  was  carried  away,  and  he  was 
left  there,  hanging  on  for  dear  life,  his  feet  spinning  in 
the  swirling  sea.  Fortunately,  another  wave  carried  the 
boat  toward  the  side  of  the  sinking  ship,  and  an  out- 
stretched pair  of  arms  grabbed  his  legs  and  pulled  him  in. 

The  ship  was  already  going  down  by  the  bow.  Men 
hanging  on  to  ropes  and  ladders  were  lifted  higher  and 
higher  as  the  vessel  nosed  deeper  into  the  heavy  seas,  and 
as  the  cries  of  the  trapped  victims,  many  of  whom  were 
still  lined  along  the  deck  rails,  rose  in  the  misty  air,  Grant 
trained  his  camera  on  the  terrible  scene.  One  unforget- 
table sight  was  the  brave  captain  waving  his  cap  and 
shouting  "Vive  la  France!",  as  the  ship  plunged  beneath 
the  waves. 

But  Grant's  troubles  were  not  over  yet.  The  gunboat, 
one  of  a  convoy  of  two,  had  gone  after  the  submarine  with 
depth  charges,  while  the  other  was  engaged  in  rescue 
work  on  the  other  side  of  the  stricken  vessel.  So  for 
what  seemed  an  interminable  age,  the  lifeboat  was  hurled 
from  wave  to  wave,  rapidly  filling  with  water.  The  oc- 
cupants worked  frantically  with  cupped  hands  and  head- 
gear bailing  out  the  water,  but  in  spite  of  their  efforts,  the 
boat  was  steadily  filling.  To  protect  his  camera,  Grant 
covered  it  with  his  coat,  as  the  spray  from  the  high 
waves  soaked  him  to  the  skin.  When  hope  of  safety  went 
glimmering,  the  gunboat  returned  and  hove  to.  Drawing 
near,  a  giant  wave  stoved  in  the  boat  against  the  steel 
hull  of  the  rescue  ship,  but  quick  work  on  the  part  of  the 
gunboat's  crew  brought  aboard  every  member  of  the  life- 
boat. A  few  minutes  later  the  lifeboat  disappeared  be- 
neath the  water. 

Drenched  through  and  through,  cramped  tightly  on 
lower  decks,  with  but  little  food  and  an  occasional  sip  of 
coffee  to  assuage  their  thirst  and  hunger,  the  rescued  were 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  143 

landed  at  Malta,  a  full  24  hours  after  the  torpedo  had 
taken  its  toll. 

Another  tragic  chapter  in  the  World  War's  annals  was 
closed.  Forty-nine  lives  were  lost  when  the  Sontay  sank; 
two  others  died  aboard  the  gunboat.  Manw  of  the  badly 
injured  were  rushed  to  Malta's  hospitals.  Grant's  photo- 
graphs, later  reproduced  in  English,  French  and  American 
newspapers,  revealed  in  no  mincing  terms  the  horror  and 
brutality  of  submarine  warfare.  The  few  words :  "French 
transport  Sontay  sunk  in  the  Mediterranean  by  a  U-boat," 
which  was  released  to  the  press,  conveyed  a  vague,  almost 
meaningless  picture,  just  another  incident  in  the  ceaseless 
orgy  of  blood-letting  the  world  was  experiencing.  The 
photographs  left  an  unforgettable  stamp  on  the  minds  of 
readers  everywhere.  The  bloody  depredations  of  the 
submarines  left  a  somersaulting  sensation  in  the  pit  of 
the  stomach. 

The  photographer  assigned  by  a  neutral  newspaper  or 
syndicate  to  cover  a  war  embroiling  other  nations  is  up 
against  almost  insurmountable  odds.  The  red  tape  which 
the  warring  nations  unravel  at  the  time  is  like  iron  fetters 
that  hinder  the  slightest  motion,  and  censorship  bears 
down  like  a  scourge.  Every  bit  of  film  is  scrutinized,  and 
some  of  the  best  stuff  secured  at  times  amid  the  greatest 
dangers  and  risk  of  life  and  limb  is  ruthlessly  scraped. 
We  still  have  to  see  the  actual  battle  scenes,  the  hand-to-hand 
encounters,  in  the  Italo-Ethiopian  war,  the  Spanish  civil 
war,  and  the  present  raging  Sino-Japanese  undeclared  war. 
Though  the  latter,  by  far,  has  been  the  most  revealing. 

This  is  what  confronted  Joseph  Caneva,  a  veteran 
American  news  photographer,  when  he  was  sent  by  the 
Associated  Press  Photos  in  New  York  to  cover  the  Ethi- 
opian conflict.  For  weeks  he  had  to  cool  his  heels  out- 
side the  doors  of  Italian  officials  in  Rome  until  he  could 
get  the  necessary  permit  to  travel  on  to  Ethiopia  and 
join  the  Italian  forces.  And  still  the  best  picture,  in  the 


144  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

estimation  of  many,  is  not  what  he  secured  at  the  fall  of 
Makale,  or  other  points  in  the  Italian  advance,  but  right 
in  Naples  before  he  sailed  on  a  troopship  to  the  scene  of 
the  war.  The  picture  in  reference  shows  an  Italian  soldier 
standing  on  the  quay  bidding  goodbye  to  his  wife  and  two 
children.  Anguish  is  etched  on  the  woman ''s  face  while  she 
holds  her  baby  close  with  the  other  tot  perched  on  his 
shoulders,  wearing  his  father's  tropical  headgear.  The 
husband,  who  looks  like  a  recent  conscript  from  an  Apenine 
village,  grimly  smiles,  so  obviously  a  mask  to  the  emotions 
that  is  tearing  his  vitals  before  he  plunges  into  the  un- 
known adventure.  The  poor,  helpless  victim  of  a  com- 
mand— and  one  suddenly  becomes  repelled  at  the  whole 
sickening  business  of  war.  An  unimaginative  censor  must 
have  let  that  one  slip  by,  because  the  implication  is  so 
•terrible,  but  on  the  face  of  it  so  casual  a  scene  to  the 
unthinking  observer.  It  was  fortunate,  in  this  case,  that 
the  censor  could  not  understand  that  there  are  more  hor- 
rors to  war  than  two  foes  coming  to  grips  in  a  trench.  And 
this  picture  proves  it! 

Caneva  had  plenty  of  good  equipment  with  which  to 
"shoot"  the  war.  He  had  a  4x5  Speed  Graphic  with  a 
Carl  Zeiss  f  4.5,  13.5  cm.  lens,  and  an  extra  seven  inch 
lens  for  long  range  work,  also  a  4x5  Graflex  with  a  17- 
inch  telephoto  lens  for  extra  long  range  shots,  and  a 
plenteous  supply  of  cut  film,  150  dozen  packs  in  all,  with 
special  tin  containers  holding  'two  packs  each.  He  landed 
in  the  troopship  at  Massaua,  and  then  ten  days  later  left 
for  the  Army  base  at  Asmara.  But  he  could  get  little 
assistance  from  the  officials.  He  was  forced  to  set  up  his 
own  darkroom  in  a  sheet  iron  barrack  where  he  shut  out 
the  light  by  hanging  blankets  across  the  windows.  He 
made  a  darkroom  light  with  which  to  scan  his  films  while 
developing  by  cutting  out  the  side  of  a  tin  can,  wrapping 
it  with  red  paper  and  inserting  a  candle.  It  was  a  far 
cry  from  the  modern  darkrooms  in  his  own  syndicate  back 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  145 

home,  but  Caneva  realized  he  was  face  to  face  with  primi- 
tive conditions  in  a  faraway  world,  and  he  did  his  job 
with  the  true  courage  of  a  pioneer.  The  heat  was  terrific 
during  the  day,  so  he  was  forced  to  do  his  developing  at 
night.  His  most  difficult  problem  was  to  secure  cool  water 
to  dissolve  his  chemicals  and  rinse  his  negatives.  He 
finally  located  a  well  outside  the  town  and  carried  the 
water  back  to  his  barrack  room  in  a  discarded  gasoline 
drum.  He  had  to  wash  and  rewash  his  films  because 
scum  clung  to  the  emulsion.  The  plate  holders  and 
cameras  had  to  be  constantly  cleansed  of  the  grit  and  sand 
which  seemed  to  choke  the  air.  It  was  all  backbreaking 
work  amid  enervating  heat,  poor  food,  little  sleep,  op- 
pression of  flies  and  insects — and  still  he  was  far  from  the 
battle  lines ! 

Caneva  was  the  only  American  photographer  with  the 
Italian  forces  on  that  front,  and  some  time  elapsed  before 
he  was  granted  the  permission  to  accompany  the  troops 
on  their  southward  march  into  the  wild,  rugged  stretches 
of  Ethiopia.  He  was  the  first  cameraman  to  enter  Makale, 
the  first  large  Ethiopian  stronghold  to  fall  beneath  the 
relentless  sweep  of  II  Duce's  troops.  The  last  part  of  the 
march  meant  a  two-day  blistering  hike  by  foot  even  though 
natives  carried  the  heavy  equipment.  In  spite  of  a 
wracked  body,  Caneva  was  plagued  by  one  worry.  How 
was  he  to  get  the  negatives  back  to  Asmara  to  make  the 
necessary  connections  to  London,  and  then  to  the  United 
States?  He  realized  that  he  had  less  than  three  days  in 
which  to  return  to  develop  his  negatives,  have  them  cen- 
sored and  then  put  aboard  the  London  plane.  Scarcely 
resting  to  sleep,  and  snatching  a  bite  on  the  run,  he  made 
the  gruelling  return  trip  in  two  and  one-half  days.  Within 
ten  days,  the  first  pictures  of  the  fall  of  Makale  were 
published  in  the  United  States — and  was  one  of  the  great- 
est picture  scoops  in  the  entire  Ethiopian  campaign. 

The    developing    problem    in    Ethiopia,    one    of    the 


146  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

world's  hottest  countries,  was  overcome  in  a  unique  way 
by  Ladislas  Farago,  a  photographer  who  represented  the 
New  York  Times  Wide  World  Photos.  He  cooled  water 
from  100  degrees  to  60  degrees  by  having  his  native  help- 
ers wrap  bottles  in  wet  cloths,  hang  them  from  tree  boughs 
and  swing  them  to  and  fro.  He  always  did  his  developing 
at  midnight,  working  under  a  protective  gauze  tent. 

Covering  the  Civil  (War  in  Spain  has  been  a  most 
hazardous  but  not  very  productive,  job  for  the  news 
photographer.  The  cameramen  working  there  have  been 
hampered  by  the  strictest  regulations  set  down  by  both 
the  Loyalist  and  Insurgent  forces.  As  a  result,  very  few 
pictures  have  portrayed  the  actual  battle  scenes  in  one  of 
the  world's  most  sanguinary  civil  wars  have  found  release 
in  the  press.  Aside  from  the  entry  of  the  Insurgent  forces 
into  Malaga,  Bilbao  and  Santander,  and  a  scattering  of 
scenes  depicting  the  ruins  that  followed  the  aerial  bombard- 
ment of  Madrid,  Valencia  and  Almeria,  there  have  been 
very  few  photographs  to  show  the  wide  extent  of  the 
terrible  destruction  of  lives  and  property  that  has  ravaged 
Spain. 

What  has  been  conceded  to  be  the  most  unusual  photo- 
graph to  come  out  of  the  war-stricken  country,  and  which 
has  been  given  wide  display  in  newspaper  and  magazine, 
shows  a  Loyalist  soldier  falling  at  the  instant  a  bullet 
crashes  into  his  brain.  This  starkly  gripping  picture  was 
taken  by  Robert  Capa  who  had  left  Paris  for  Spain  soon 
after  the  outbreak  of  the  war.  He  and  the  soldier  were 
stranded  on  the  Cordoba  front.  They  had  been  separated 
from  the  main  body  of  Loyalist  troops  by  a  sudden  charge 
of  Insurgent  forces.  The  soldier  was  intent  on  getting 
back  to  his  comrades.  As  he  clambered  out  of  the  trench 
in  which  they  were  isolated,  a  machine  gun  rattled  and  the 
soldier  was  hit.  At  that  instant,  Capa,  who  was  directly 
behind  him,  automatically  snapped  his  camera,  and  then 
fell  back  beside  the  body  of  his  dead  companion.  Several 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  147 

hours  later,  when  it  was  dark,  Capa  crept  across  the 
ground  to  the  Loyalist  lines,  and  safety. 

The  war  in  Spain  indirectly  cost  the  life  of  a  popular 
woman  photographer,  Fraulein  Gerta  Taro.  Affection- 
ately known  as  "La  Poquena  Rubia,"  or  "the  little  red- 
head," by  the  Loyalist  soldiers  who  loved  her,  she  was 
injured  fatally  at  the  front  last  Summer  when  a  truck 
swerved  and  struck  her  as  she  was  standing  on  the  running 
board  of  an  automobile.  Always  clad  in  a  pair  of  blue 
denim  overalls,  the  23-year-old  camerawoman  was  a  famil- 
iar figure  in  the  Government  trenches.  She  was  able  to 
get  passes  to  anywhere  in  or  behind  the  firing  lines,  and 
no  general,  no  matter  how  busy  or  of  how  sullen  a  dis- 
position, would  ever  refuse  her  to  pose.  The  untimely 
death  of  the  girl  who  laughed  at  bullets  and  shells  was  a 
deep  blow  to  the  hundreds  of  Loyalist  soldiers  and  officers 
who  knew  her  and  respected  her  stout  courage. 

The  slaughter  of  hundreds  by  the  aerial  bombs  at  the 
Place  and  Cathay  Hotels  and  the  Wing  On  and  Sincere 
department  stores  in  the  Shanghai  International  Settlement 
have  through  startling  newsreels  and  still  pictures  become 
familiarized  symbols  to  the  world  of  what  is  taking  place 
in  the  Far  East  bath  of  blood.  There  are  no  words  to 
describe  the  gruesome  horror  of  the  scenes — the  mangled 
corpses  outside  the  shattered  hotel  and  store  fronts,  the 
removal  of  the  bodies  into  trucks  like  so  much  litter,  the 
wounded  waiting  for  removal  to  the  hospitals — all  the  sick- 
ening, wenching  sights  of  a  war  come  to  one  of  the 
world's  most  populated  cities.  There  was  no  heavy  hand 
of  censorship  to  halt  the  distribution  of  these  pictures. 
Taken  within  the  Settlement  confines,  no  Chinese  or  Jap- 
anese official  could  discard  them,  and  they  were  shipped 
in  toto  to  the  first  boat  and  Clipper  plane  to  speed  them 
on  the  way  to  the  United  States. 

Because  of  the  seriousness  of  the  conflict,  its  extent, 
and  its  potential  threat  to  the  peace  of  the  rest  of  the 


148  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

world,  newspaper  syndicates  everywhere  are  utilizing  every 
means  to  secure  the  most  telling  pictures. 

On  the  staffs  of  many  of  these  syndicates  serving 
them  in  Shanghai,  Tientsin  and  Peiping,  are  to  be  found 
photographers  of  many  nationalities,  a  veritable  "foreign 
legion"  of  cameramen.  Even  well  known  news  correspon- 
dents as  James  Mills  of  the  Associated  Press,  and  Hallett 
Abend  and  Anthony  J.  Billingham  of  the  New  York 
Times,  who  are  as  adept  with  their  cameras  as  they  are 
with  their  pens,  have  been  "shooting"  pictures  and  rushing 
them  back  to  the  States.  Both  Abend  and  Billingham 
were  wounded  in  the  bombing  of  the  Shanghai  depart- 
ment stores. 

While  accompanying  a  Chinese  officer  to  the  front 
near  the  North  Station  in  Shanghai,  four  photographers, 
Eric  Mayell,  Arthur  Menken,  Rudolfo  Brandt  and  H.  S. 
Wong,  working  for  American  concerns,  were  bombed  and 
machine-gunned  by  Japanese  airplanes.  They  had  a  mirac- 
ulous escape  from  death. 

When  the  first  bomb  dropped,  scarcely  200  yards  from 
them,  they  deserted  their  automobile  and  fled  into  the 
fields.  But  the  planes  followed  them,  dipped  low  and 
loosed  a  volley  from  their  machine  guns.  The  men  ran 
from  the  fields  into  a  nearby  dugout.  Till  this  day  they 
still  wonder  how  they  ever  escaped  being  either  wounded 
or  killed. 

To  expedite  their  material  home,  the  cameramen  in 
the  Shanghai  sector  chartered  planes  to  fly  over  the  battle 
ground  to  Hong  Kong  to  connect  with  the  Pan-American 
Clipper  planes  for  their  regular  flights  over  the  vast 
stretches  of  the  Pacific.  Even  boats  arriving  at  San  Fran- 
cisco and  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  with  refugees  have 
been  contacted  for  the  ordinary  tourist's  kodak  shots. 

The  Japanese  official  photographs,  most  of  which  have 
been  showing  their  soldiers  on  the  march  in  Peiping, 
Tientsin  and  the  far-flung  North  China  area  of  operations, 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  149 

have  been  coming  into  this  country  by  the  scores.  Every 
airmail  from  the  Orient  brings  in  a  fresh  shipment — but, 
of  course,  they  tend  to  show  but  fragmentary  details  of 
what  is  actually  taking  place  there,  and  then  only  to  reveal 
the  Japanese  in  the  most  favorable  light.  The  Chinese 
propaganda  machine  creaks  along  far  behind  that  of  their 
enemy's,  and  few,  if  any,  pictures  have  been  seen  here 
stamped  with  their  official  release. 

An  incident  showing  how  the  Japanese  resent  any  out- 
sider's attempt  to  picturise  their  movements,  took  place 
in  Peiping  shortly  after  the  start  of  the  undeclared  war. 
Sheridan  Fahnestock,  a  young  American  on  a  round-the- 
world  cruise,  was  beaten  over  the  head  by  Japanese  soldiers 
when  he  attempted  to  take  pictures  of  a  cheering  crowd 
of  Japanese  civilians  and  soldiers  outside  the  Italian  Em- 
bassy. On  the  same  day,  Bonny  Powell,  an  American  news- 
reel  photographer,  was  shoved  around  and  threatened  with 
bodily  harm  when  he  focused  his  camera  on  a  motorized 
column  of  Japanese  troops. 

An  amusing  sidelight  of  Japanese  hostility  took  place 
a  few  days  later  also  at  Peiping  when  a  dozen  United 
States  Marines  on  the  boundary  of  the  Marine  Corps  Com- 
pound started  firing  away  with  their  cameras  at  a  column 
of  Japanese  infantry  marching  past.  A  Nippon  officer 
stopped  his  car  and  demanded  that  the  Marines  stop  taking 
pictures,  but  they  kept  right  on  clicking  their  shutters.  The 
Japanese  officer  fumed.  Finally  realizing  that  he  could  do 
nothing  then  (except,  perhaps,  start  another  international 
complication),  he  stalked  back  to  his  car,  summoned  staff 
photographers  attached  to  his  own  army,  and  ordered  them 
to  remain  taking  pictures  of  the  Marines.  Let's  hope  the 
Japanese  War  Office  doesn't  dig  up  that  picture  of  the 
"shooting"  Marines  as  a  casus  belli! 

The  world  has  now  seen  the  full  horror  of  a  civilian 
population  mercilessly  shattered  and  torn  by  the  implements 
of  modern  warfare.  In,  Shanghai,  Nanking,  Dessye,  Al- 


150  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

meria  and  Madrid,  the  ravages  of  long  range  guns  and 
bombing  planes  have  taken  their  toll  of  innocent  men,  wo- 
men and  children.  Photographs,  more  than  words,  have 
brought  home  the  lesson,  and  all  the  implications,  of  what 
modern  warfare  means.  Risking  death  amid  the  shambles 
of  destruction,  the  war  photographer  is  delivering  a  power- 
ful message  of  truth — a  horrifying  one,  nevertheless — but 
one  that  should  rout  the  glorifiers  of  war.  His  camera  is 
a  magnificent  weapon  for  peace ! 


Chapter  X. 
THE  WOMAN  NEWS  PHOTOGRAPHER 

There  was  a  day  when  the  male  news  photographer 
sniffed  scornfully  when  told  that  it  was  possible  that  the 
woman  with  the  camera  would  match  wits — and  plate  for 
plate,  picture  for  picture — with  the  man  firmly  entrenched 
in  the  profession.  Humph!  Woman?  Impossible!  The  job 
was  too  risky,  too  dangerous.  Reporters  once  made 
kindred  statements.  They  were  mistaken,  too.  Women 
photographers  are  edging  in,  overcoming  all  objections, 
belieing  the  popular  illusion  as  to  their  frailty,  lack  of 
nimbleness  in  covering  a  spot  news  assignment,  inability 
to  handle  weighty  equipment. 

Slender  Margaret  Bourke-White,  photographer-extra- 
ordinary, has  climbed  narrow  steel  girders  hundreds  of 
feet  above  the  street  pavement,  plunged  into  the  gaseous 
bowels  of  coal  mines,  leaped  from  log  to  log  in  swirling 
currents  to  snap  hardy  Canadian  woodsmen;  1 8-year-old 
Harriet  Platnick,  of  Hempstead,  Long  Island,  crashes 
through  police  and  fire  lines,  scales  walls  and  fords 
streams,  to  get  news  pictures  of  crimes,  accidents,  forest 
fires,  train  wrecks;  a  23-year-old  wisp  of  a  girl,  with  a 
thick  mass  of  tousled  brown  hair  and  dancing  blue  eyes, 
Miss  Mary  Louise  Morris  is  a  member  of  the  Associated 
Press  Features  staff,  and  daily  fares  forth  with  camera 
slung  over  her  shoulder  to  cover  every  variety  of  news 
and  feature  story.  There  are  scores  of  girl  photographers 
scattered  throughout  the  country  whose  news  pictures  have 
been  accepted  readily  by  newspapers  and  syndicates.  Frail? 
Well,  they  may  be  slender,  but  they've  got  the  wiry  firm- 
ness of  fine  steel  to  withstand  any  sort  of  rigor  and  trial. 
Lack  of  nimbleness?  One  look  at  Miss  Bourke-White  on 


152  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

the  job,  and  you  have  the  apotheosis  of  the  fastest  action 
this  side  of  Glenn  Cunningham's  burst  of  speed  across 
the  finish  line.  Inability  to  handle  equipment?  A  glance 
at  Miss  Platnick  firing  away  plate  after  plate,  at  a  crime 
or  fire  scene,  and  you  will  reappraise  your  woman  photog- 
rapher with  a  new  value  and  consideration  of  her  merits. 
The  woman  with  the  camera  has  really  come  to  stay! 

It  was  a  case  of  dogged  perseverance,  determination, 
and  a  virtue  of  completing  a  job  once  she  started  it,  that 
brought  Margaret  Bourke-White  the  remarkable  success 
she  has  attained  as  a  photographer. 

Her  early  years  were  spent  studying  and  playing  with 
strange  pets :  turtles,  caterpillars  and  reptiles,  including 
a  baby  boa  constrictor.  Her  father  was  a  naturalist,  and 
the  fondness  for  the  wonders  of  the  universe  was  her 
heritage.  She  studied  Natural  History  in  high  school. 
Her  first  interest  in  the  camera  started  at  Columbia  Uni- 
versity when  she  took  an  amateurish  course  in  photogra- 
phy, chiefly  for  credits.  Then  followed  several  years  at 
the  University  of  Michigan  where  she  studied  biology 
and  herpetology,  a  branch  of  zoology  that  treats  of 
reptiles  and  amphibians.  Lack  of  finances  forced  her  to 
seek  a  position  at  the  end  of  two  years.  A  job  at  the 
Natural  History  Museum  in  Cleveland  for  a  year  enabled 
her  to  save  enough  money  to  go  back  to  college,  this  time, 
to  Cornell  University,  where  she  entered  the  senior  class. 
She  was  determined  to  finish  her  college  education.  But 
she  again  needed  more  money  to  finish  her  course.  So  she 
turned  to  photography  as  a  means  to  pay  her  way  through. 
She  took  pictures  of  the  students  and  campus  life,  and  sold 
many  of  them.  She  employed  student  salesmen,  and  her 
photographs  gained  instant  popularity. 

During  her  Spring  vacation,  she  stuffed  a  number  of  her 
outstanding  pictures  into  a  portfolio,  and  came  to  New 
York.  She  visited  the  office  of  a  well-known  architect. 
Among  the  pictures  she  carried  were  a  number  showing 


©   Acme   Newspapers 
BEATEN    TO   DEATH 

A   horrible    moment    snapped    by    the    ever-vigilant    cameraman    as    a    striker 
armed  with  baseball  bat  attacks  a  prostrate  business  man  during-  the  truck- 
men's strike  in  Minneapolis,   Minn.,   in  1934.     The  victim  later  died  from  the 
effects  of  the  blows. 


©  Acme  Newspapers 

"NOT   IN   THE   LINE   OF   DUTY" 

But  one  of  New  York's  finest  believes  it's  all  in  the  day's  work  to  fill  a  cup 
with  water  and   fed  a   helpless  sparrow   perched   on   a  building1  ledgre. 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  153 

campus  buildings.  She  was  keenly  interested  in  photograph- 
ing structures.  The  attraction  of  steel  girders  and  masonry 
was  to  prove  a  valuable  asset  for  her  in  the  coming  years. 

The  architect  was  in  a  hurry  to  catch  a  train.  Sorry,  but 
he  could  not  see  Miss  Bourke- White.  The  persistent  young 
lady  tagged  him  as  he  was  leaving.  He  simply  must  take 
one  look  at  them.  The  architect  capitulated.  All  right, 
just  one  minute,  then.  He  took  one  glance  at  the  photo- 
graphs and  then  called  the  young  lady  into  his  office.  Mem- 
bers of  his  staff  were  summoned.  It  was  the  turning  point 
in  her  life.  She  knew  then  and  there  that  photography  was 
to  be  her  life  work. 

After  graduation,  she  returned  to  Cleveland,  and  estab- 
lished herself  in  a  small  apartment,  converting  it  into  de- 
veloping, printing  and  reception  rooms.  In  the  beginning 
it  was  a  struggle,  but  her  fine  work  soon  attracted  attention. 
Architects  handed  her  plenty  of  assignments.  One  fine  in- 
terior of  a  bank  building  won  her  an  introduction  to  a  presi- 
dent of  a  steel  company.  It  was  the  opportunity  she  was 
long  waiting  for.  She  had  her  heart  set  on  making  an 
interior  of  a  steel  mill :  the  huge  cranes,  ladles,  the  dazzl- 
ing splutter  of  molten  steel,  the  iron-muscled,  broad-chested 
workers,  stripped  to  the  waist,  facing  the  open  furnace 
doors,  handling  the  ingots  and  bars,  blinding  with  their 
white-heat,  with  the  ease  of  a  child  playing  with  a  ball. 
She  asked  the  executive's  permission  to  make  the  photo- 
graphs. He  complied,  and  off  to  Europe  he  went,  while 
the  slim  girl  day  after  day,  and  night  after  night,  faced  the 
terrific  heat  and  clatter  to  make  dozens  of  shots.  Many 
she  threw  into  the  wastebasket.  She  was  not  satisfied  until 
she  had  made  what  she  thought  was  the  perfect  set  of 
pictures.  When  the  steel  president  returned,  he  took  but 
one  glance  at  the  photographs,  shouted  a  cry  of  delight, 
and  ordered  a  dozen  at  $100  apiece  for  a  privately  print- 
ed book. 

It  marked  the  beginning  of  an  active  and  highly  sue- 


154  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

cessful  career.  She  was  given  the  highest  recommenda- 
tions; industry  in  all  parts  of  the  country  sought  her  ser- 
vices. Then  in  1929  came  an  offer  from  Fortune  maga- 
zine to  join  its  staff.  She  accepted,  and  came  to  New 
York,  where  she  also  opened  a  studio  to  do  commercial 
work. 

Her  position  with  the  magazine  embarked  her  on  ex- 
citing and  colorful  career;  every  moment  was  charged 
with  thrill  and  action.  She  covered  industrial  news  sub- 
jects with  the  fidelity  of  a  newsman  "shooting"  a  fire  or 
accident.  In  the  summer  of  1930  she  was  sent  to  Germany 
to  make  a  series  of  photographs  of  the  country's  immense 
industries,  starting  with  the  shipping  docks  at  Hamburg 
and  continuing  on  through  the  network  of  plants  closely 
grouped  in  the  Ruhr  Valley.  But  her  heart  was  set  on 
going  to  Russia.  The  great  social  experiment  going  on 
there  intrigued  her.  After  waiting  a  while  for  her  visa, 
she  departed  for  Moscow,  and  within  several  days,  found 
herself  a  welcomed  guest  of  the  Soviet  government,  at  will 
to  travel  the  breadth  and  length  of  the  country.  She 
brought  back  a  wealth  of  photographs,  many  of  which 
were  reproduced  in  her  splendid  book,  uEyes  on  Russia," 
and  others  in  the  newspaper  rotogravure  sections.  Her 
name  immediately  leaped  into  front-page  fame.  It  was 
startling,  fantastic  I  A  woman  had  dared  invade  that 
strange,  mysterious  land,  where  untold  dangers  threatened, 
and  came  back  with  a  set  of  photographs  which  were  so 
bold,  so  revelatory  of  the  new  state  in  a  process  of  recon- 
struction. It  was  NEWS,  big  NEWS! 

But  Miss  Bourke-White  was  not  content  to  sit  back 
and  rest  with  the  adulations  of  an  admiring  public  and 
press  pouring  in.  She  yearned  for  new  adventures.  She 
packed  her  cameras,  and  off  she  went  on  an  assignment  to 
cover  the  drought  areas.  From  Nebraska  she  flew  to 
Texas,  and  back.  She  would  arise  at  four  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  work  for  seven  or  eight  hours,  pack  her  equip- 


G£T  THAT   PICTURE  1 55 

ment,  and  off  again  she  would  go  by  plane  to  a  new  loca- 
tion. She  realized  it  was  a  news  assignment,  so  she  would 
hurry  through  her  job,  and  fly  back  to  New  York  with  her 
negatives  in  order  to  make  the  magazine's  deadline. 

Hardly  a  breathing  spell,  and  she  was  off  again,  this 
time  to  cover  the  yacht  races  for  the  America's  Cup  off 
Newport,  Rhode  Island. 

It  was  while  covering  this  assignment  that  she  had  a 
narrow  escape  from  drowning.  She  had  hired  a  motor- 
boat  to  get  some  unusual  angle  of  the  Vanderbilt  craft. 
While  making  a  sharp  turn,  Miss  Bourke-White,  who  had 
run  forward  to  get  a  shot  she  wanted,  tripped  and  fell  into 
the  water,  still  clutching  the  camera.  While  she  flounder- 
ed about,  never  letting  go  of  the  camera,  her  own  skipper 
and  the  crew  of  the  Vanderbilt  yacht  headed  for  her  and 
fished  her  out.  She  never  even  thought  of  how  near  death 
she  was;  her  only  regrets  were  that  the  camera  was  soaked 
and  ruined,  and  immediately  returned  to  Newport  to  get 
another  camera  to  resume  her  work.  The  job  must  go  on  I 

The  incident  is  typical  of  this  young  woman,  who  never 
gives  a  thought  to  self,  but  doggedly  carries  on,  never  tir- 
ing, never  flagging  in  spirits,  with  but  one  desire  upper- 
most in  her  mind,  and  that  is  to  get  only  the  best  possible 
pictures. 

She  made  two  more  trips  to  the  Soviet  Union,  and 
brought  back  more  unusual  photographs  and  two  movie 
travelogues. 

Nothing  apparently  has  deterred  this  amazing  woman 
photographer  from  seeking  and  finding  the  most  unusual 
and  out-of-the-way  places  with  which  to  add  to  her  pic- 
torial masterpieces.  She  has  gone  a  thousand  feet  down 
into  the  bowels  of  the  earth  to  make  a  series  on  coal  min- 
ing, where  she  walked  and  crawled  through  muck  and  dirt 
and  pools  of  water  to  get  her  pictures,  and  came  stagger- 
ing out  into  the  sunlight,  her  face  scratched,  her  clothes 
torn,  and  her  hands  and  face  as  black  as  that  of  any  coal 


156  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

miner's.  Her  only  concern  was  that  her  camera  and 
plates  were  intact.  Again  she  has  gone  along  skeleton 
girders  a  thousand  feet  above  the  city  pavements  to  make 
some  unusual  angles  of  a  skyscraper.  And  traveled  a 
thousand  and  more  miles  into  the  Canadian  wilds  to  get  a 
breaking  up  of  a  log  jam  in  the  Spring.  In  the  early  part 
of  1936  she  flew  to  South  America  and  made  a  series  of 
photographs  of  coffee  growing  in  the  interior  of  Brazil. 

But  more  and  more,  as  evidenced  by  the  work  she 
has  done,  her  interest  turned  from  the  early  years  of 
"staged"  photographs  of  commercial  work  to  pictures  close 
to  life.  She  felt  drama  pulsating  in  the  things  happening 
throughout  the  world.  She  felt  that  she  could  not  afford 
to  miss  any  of  it  with  her  camera.  So  she  has  gone  on 
recording  more  and  more  of  the  things  which  can  be  con- 
sidered news.  And  withal,  she  deemed  it  her  purpose  and 
goal  to  interpret  these  stirring  things  of  life  with  a  fresh 
meaning  and  outlook.  She  sees  a  meaning  and  a  purpose 
— and  a  story — in  the  most  humble  person  and  object. 
Because  of  this  increasing  interest  in  the  factual  world,  she 
came  in  the  fall  of  1936  as  an  "editorial  photographer" 
to  Life  magazine.  She  has  been  on  their  staff  ever  since, 
where  her  indefatigable  efforts  have  been  crowned  with 
new  successes.  She  is  establishing  herself  as  a  news 
photographer-extraordinary. 

It  may  be  of  interest  to  note  the  fine  photographic 
equipment  Miss  Bourke-White  has  available  for  covering 
her  assignments.  She  has  the  following  cameras:  a  3^4 
X4^4  Linhof,  with  which  she  uses  two  Tessar  lenses,  one 
an  f4-5  with  a  13.5  cm.  focus,  and  the  other  also  an  f*4.5 
with  a  15  cm.  focus,  an  Angulon  f6.8,  9  cm.  lens,  a  Tele- 
xenar  f5.5,  27  cm.  lens,  and  a  Tessar  f6.3,  18  cm.  lens; 
a  3x4  R.  B.  Auto  Graft  ex  with  an  £"4.5  Kodak  Anastigmat 
lens,  of  7  inch  focus;  a  Soho  Reflex,  Tropical  Model, 
camera,  with  which  she  uses  a  Zeiss  Tessar  f3.5,  13.5  cm. 
lens  and  a  Cook,  Series  X,  162  mm.  lens;  a  Fairchild 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  157 

Aero  Camera,  Model  F8,  with  a  Schneider  Xenar  £4.5, 
24  cm.  lens,  and  a  Super  Ikonta  A  camera.  She  also  uses 
a  Contax  for  candid  camera  studies  and  a  5x7  View  Cam- 
era for  special  studies,  particularly  with  photomural  work 
in  mind. 

Crack  photographer,  picture  editor  and  art  director — 
all  three — each  a  man's  job  in  itself — are  embodied  in  the 
slim,  dashing  form  of  3O-year-old  Miss  Jackie  Martin,  of 
the  Washington,  D.  C.,  Herald,  said  to  be  the  only  woman 
picture  editor  of  a  metropolitan  daily  in  the  United  States. 

Any  day  of  the  week  will  find  this  tireless,  vivacious 
woman  buried  deep  in  a  stack  of  pictures,  selecting  for 
the  daily  and  Sunday  pages,  turning  now  and  again  to 
hand  out  an  assignment  to  one  of  her  staff  of  able  news 
cameramen.  Pausing  for  a  few  moments,  she  will  toy 
with  a  brilliant  idea  that  has  suddenly  entered  her  mind,  and 
off  she  will  go  with  miniature  camera  to  the  Capitol 
building  to  make  an  unusual  series  of  news  photographs. 
On  her  return  she  will  fling  herself  once  more  into  the 
tornadic-speed  of  selecting,  making  up  the  picture  page, 
and  assigning,  only  interrupting  her  work  to  hurry  into 
the  darkroom  to  supervise  the  printing  of  the  pictures  or 
make  suggestions  regarding  the  cropping  and  enlarging 
of  the  prints.  The  day  over  does  not  mean  that  her  work 
is  done — for  she  will  hie  to  a  night  society  function  to  get 
an  exclusive  layout  of  pictures.  Her  ambition  is  to  fill  the 
Herald  with  the  most  distinctive  news  and  feature  pictures, 
and  she  is  succeeding. 

A  very  determined  young  woman  is  Miss  Martin.  And 
always  has  been.  Ever  since  she  left  Eastern  High  School 
in  Washington,  her  life  has  been  a  succession  of  swift,  col- 
orful experiences. 

At  Syracuse  University  where  she  entered  on  a  schol- 
arship, she  covered  her  expenses  by  shining  shoes  and 
waiting  on  tables.  But  the  financial  struggle  was  a  bit 
too  keen  for  her,  and  she  was  forced  to  leave  at  the  end 


158  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

of  the  freshman  year.  The  temporary  halt  in  an  ambition 
only  spurred  her  on  to  attain  greater  ends  in  the  outside 
world.  She  secured  a  position  as  a  woman's  sports  editor 
of  the  Washington  Times,  then  later  went  over  to  the 
Underwood  and  Underwood  news  service  as  society  editor. 
While  there,  photography  became  an  obsession.  She 
studied  day  and  night,  asked  a  hundred  and  one  questions 
of  the  news  cameramen  she  trailed  here  and  there,  and 
finally  became  so  experienced  in  handling  the  camera  that 
she  asked  for,  and  received,  a  job  as  news  photographer 
with  the,  then,  Washington  Times  Herald.  She  covered 
the  fire,  crime,  accident  and  other  news  stories  as  ably 
as  any  of  the  male  photographers  on  the  paper. 

While  on  the  Times  Herald  she  accepted  an  offer  to 
become  publicity  director  and  auditorium  manager  of  the 
Arcadia,  Washington's  "Madison  Square  Garden."  Then 
the  newspaper  world  lured  her  back  once  more,  and  she 
joined  the  Herald  as  assistant  society  editor.  A  short 
period  in  that  position,  and  then  over  to  the  Washington 
News  as  feature  writer,  followed  by  &  return  to  the 
Herald  where  within  six  weeks  she  became  its  picture 
editor. 

From  the  outset  she  was  determined  to  make  its  photo- 
graphic staff  one  of  the  best  in  the  country,  and  sought 
the  latest  improvements  in  darkroom  technique.  It  meant 
many  a  stiff  battle  with  the  business  department,  but  she 
won  out.  Today  the  Herald  has  few  rivals  in  the  com- 
plete modernization  of  its  photographic  layout.  On  her 
staff  are  two  assistants,  eight  photographers,  six  artists 
and  several  darkroom  men. 

During  her  seven  years  tenure  with  the  Herald  as 
picture  editor  and  art  director,  she  has  gone  out  constantly 
with  her  camera  to  bring  in  many  notable  picture  scoops, 
and  even  found  time  to  make  a  trip  to  Europe  to  study 
newspaper  pohtographic  methods  in  Copenhagen,  Paris 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  159 

and  London,  bringing  back  with  her  many  ideas  which 
she  incorporated  into  her  work  here. 

While  in  England  a  member  of  the  Royal  Photo- 
graphic Society  was  so  impressed  with  her  work  that  she 
was  proposed  for  membership.  In  1936,  shortly  after 
she  became  an  Associate,  two  of  her  photographs  were 
selected  for  display  at  the  Society's  annual  exhibition,  an 
honor  few  women  have  achieved. 

Miss  Martin  has  the  daring  and  fearlessness  of  the 
male  news  photographer.  During  the  funeral  services 
held  for  the  late  Speaker  Byrns  in  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives when  no  cameramen  were  allowed  in,  she  man- 
aged to  get  in  and  obtain  an  exclusive  shot  which  appeared 
in  the  Herald  the  following  day  for  an  eight-column 
spread. 

Two  years  ago,  at  the  opening  of  Congress,  she  made 
the  only  picture  of  the  Cabinet  members  listening  to  the 
President's  address,  taken  with  her  Contax  from  the  press 
box  where  the  camera  boys  were  barred.  A  year  later, 
when  the  President  appeared  again  to  make  his  address, 
Miss  Martin  attempted  to  duplicate  her  feat,  but  she  was 
discovered  and  ejected.  But  a  few  minutes  later  she  was 
back  in  a  lower  tier  after  scaling  a  rail,  and  startled  the 
rival  picture  editors  the  following  day  with  another 
Herald  reproduction  of  the  similar  scene. 

All  during  the  Democratic  Convention  sessions  in 
Philadelphia  in  1936  her  remarkable  pictures  of  the  lead- 
ers and  delegates  filled  page  after  page  in  her  paper.  A 
never-to-be-forgotten  scene  took  place  at  the  social  dinner 
given  by  Governor  Earle  of  Pennsylvania,  preceding  the 
formal  opening  of  the  Convention.  Delegates  looked  on 
with  amazement  as  Miss  Martin,  smartly  gowned  in  a 
latest  Paris  creation,  swept  through  the  ballroom,  follow- 
ed by  a  tall  State  Trooper,  carrying  her  camera  case.  She 
literally  "stole  the  show."  While  all  eyes  were  focused 
on  this  stunningly  attired  woman,  she,  unconcernedly, 


l6o  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

shot  picture  after  picture  of  the  party  leaders  assembled 
there,  obtaining  an  exclusive  layout. 

Miss  Martin  does  most  of  her  work — when  she  breaks 
away  from  her  desk — with  Leica,  Contax  and  Speed 
Graphic.  The  largest  part  of  her  work  during  the  past 
four  years  has  been  with  a  Contax  with  a  Sonnar  f  11.5 
lens,  but  recently  bought  a  Leica,  also  with  an  f  11.5  lens, 
and  she  is  getting  splendid  results  with  that  camera  as  well. 

Just  recently,  News  Week  magazine  carried  a  page  of 
pictures  she  took  of  Supreme  Court  Justice  Van  Devanter, 
who  had  resigned,  and  Town  and  Country,  a  popular 
sophisticated  monthly,  had  a  three  page  layout  of  hers  on 
a  party  given  in  Washington  for  Doris  Duke,  the  nation's 
wealthiest  heiress. 

Though  her  enthusiasm  lies  in  the  miniature  camera 
field,  her  uboys"  on  the  staff  prefer  the  Speed  Graphic. 
But  Miss  Martin  does  not  split  hairs  with  their  judgment. 
She  firmly  believes  that  both  types  of  cameras  have  their 
essential  uses  on  a  metropolitan  daily.  The  invaluable 
combination  of  candid  camera  (the  Herald  has  five  of 
them),  and  the  Speed  Graphic  are  bringing  in  results — 
and  that  is  Miss  Martin's  sole  desideratum. 

At  the  present  time  Miss  Martin  is  building  a  model, 
air-conditioned  candid-camera  darkroom  in  the  Herald 
building,  which,  when  finished,  will  be  dedicated  by  Mrs. 
Roosevelt.  She  already  has  built  one  in  her  own  home. 

This  amazing  young  woman  is  setting  a  pace  in  picture 
editing  and  news  photography  which  is  fast  outstripping 
many  a  male  competitor. 

Only  23  years  of  age,  Miss  Mary  Louise  Morris  is 
already  making  quite  a  name  for  herself  as  a  news  photog- 
rapher. In  a  little  more  than  a  year  on  the  staff  of  the 
Associated  Press  Feature  Service  in  New  York,  she  has 
accumulated  several  nice  scoops,  and  many  interesting  ex- 
periences. She  largely  goes  after  the  news  feature  sub- 
jects, and  frequently  makes  a  series  of  photographs  for 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  l6l 

the  picture  page  which  the  syndicate  produces  each  week. 

In  the  beginning  she  was  quite  taken  aback  as  the  recur- 
rent question  popped  at  her:  "Are  you  REALLY  a  news 
photographer?"  It  seemed  incredible  that  the  short,  slim 
lass — and  so  pretty — could  really  be  one  of  the  army  of 
camera  bearers  so  long  known  to  the  public  as  seasoned, 
hardy  fellows,  most  of  them  in  the  late  twenties  or  early 
thirties.  The  persons  she  was  about  to  "shoot"  often 
twitted  her  as  she  asked  them  to  pose.  "Now,  really, 
stop  spoofing,"  they  would  say.  "That  fellow  there 
(they  pointed  to  the  male  reporter  who  accompanied  her 
to  get  the  story),  must  be  the  cameraman,  not  you.  Now 
start  your  questions."  And  it  took  a  lot  of  convincing  to 
make  her  subjects  realize  that  she  was  all  in  earnest. 

However,  Miss  Morris  is  now  quite  a  veteran  at  press- 
ing the  Button  and  pulling  the  flashes.  She  is  no  longer 
nervous  or  abashed,  and  before  anyone  she  is  photograph- 
ing has  a  chance  to  fling  a  challenge,  she  has  already  made 
her  picture. 

Long  before  she  had  graduated  from  Sarah  Lawrence 
College  in  Bronxville,  New  York,  Miss  Morris  had  tink- 
ered with  a  camera.  At  the  age  of  eight  she  handled  a 
Brownie  with  proficiency,  and  later  in  her  'teens  bought  a 
simple  Eastman  and  went  off  to  England  to  make  a  very 
interesting  set  of  photographs.  She  knew  then  and  there 
that  photography  was  her  forte,  and  set  about  to  learn 
more  of  the  technical  knowledge  required  in  handling  one 
of  the  more  intricate  machines.  At  first  she  wanted  to 
take  up  reporting,  but  then  decided  that  her  camera  would 
enable  her  to  cover  the  news  she  was  after  with  greater 
facility.  She  was  unusually  picture-minded.  She  was 
especially  interested  in  the  workaday  world,  in  people 
around  her,  in  the  expressions  on  their  faces,  and  the 
movements  of  their  hands  and  bodies. 

It  was  with  a  bit  of  trepidation  that  she  sought  a  job 
on  the  Associated  Press  Feature  service — but  one  look  at 


1 62  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

the  work  she  offered,  and  the  editor  said  the  position  was 
hers.  But  it  was  no  easy  sailing.  Plenty  of  hard  work, 
sufferance  of  sly  jibes  from  her  fellow  workers — but  she 
tightened  her  lips,  and  went  on,  with  success  from  the 
start. 

Since  her  work  is  more  on  the  feature  side  of  news, 
she  has  more  time  to  think  and  plan,  and  carefully  figures 
out  what  she  is  going  to  ushoot."  She  has  plenty  of  time 
to  plan  her  attack,  for  she  makes  appointments  in  advance 
with  the  persons  she  is  to  photograph. 

"This  sort  of  thinking  must  be  done,"  she  says,  "if 
photographs  are  to  have  more  meaning  and  sincerity  than 
the  wholly  "gotten  up,"  "knock  your  eye  out"  stunt  pic- 
tures which  so  many  people  are  going  after  these  days." 

She  never  resorts  to  feminine  wiles  to  induce  help  from 
her  fellow-photographers.  She  makes  them  feel  that  she 
is  just  another  one  of  the  "boys",  and  in  this  way,  has 
earned  their  camaraderie  and  respect.  She  proved  to  be 
a  darn  good  scout  when  she  was  assigned  to  get  a  series 
of  intimate  studies  of  John  L.  Lewis,  the  labor  leader, 
when  he  was  taking  part  in  a  bituminous  coal  conference 
to  regulate  hours  and  wages  in  the  industry  held  at  the 
Hotel  Biltmore  in  New  York  the  winter  of  1937. 

The  only  pictures  she  could  get  in  the  beginning — or 
anyone  else,  for  that  matter — were  the  routine  shots  of 
him  entering  and  leaving  the  lobby  elevator.  Nothing 
doing  on  any  other  pictures,  the  photographers  were  told. 
No  pictures  during  the  conference,  and  no  pictures,  before 
or  after.  And  the  reporters  were  given  the  same  cold 
shoulder  in  regard  to  news. 

Several  of  the  reporters  thought  of  a  swell  stunt. 
There  was  a  tiny  anteroom  leading  off  the  main  meeting 
room.  They  wanted  to  hide  there  and  overhear  the  con- 
ference talk.  But — and  there  was  the  rub — the  door  lead- 
ing into  the  room  was  always  kept  open.  Now  if  Miss 
Morris  could  just  with  some  excuse  get  into  the  main 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  163 

room,  edge  near  the  door,  and  close  it — why,  that  would 
be  great!  Miss  Morris  quickly  thought  of  a  plan.  Easy! 
She  would  enter  the  room  just  as  the  conferees  sat  down 
and  start  searching  around  as  if  she  lost  something.  The 
plan  worked.  The  "lost  something"  was  a  flash  bulb,  and 
she  kept  nearing  the  door,  the  meanwhile  searching  here 
and  there  for  the  "lost  bulb."  The  delegates  promptly 
offered  their  services  in  the  search,  and  they  were  soon 
down  on  hands  and  knees  looking  under  tables  and  chairs. 
Pretending  that  it  might  be  behind  the  door,  Miss  Morris 
innocently  closed  it.  And  then  turned  around:  "Sorry, 
gentlemen,  I  must  have  lost  it  elsewhere."  Her  tone 
was  a  sorrowful  one.  The  delightful  interlude  of  trying 
to  help  a  damsel  in  distress  must  have  so  bewildered  them 
that  no  one  even  thought  of  the  closed  door.  And  the 
conference  went  on,  with  two  pairs  of  ears  glued  to  the 
other  side  of  the  door,  taking  in  all  that  they  said. 

The  grand  favor  was  to  be  reciprocated  the  following 
day  when  Mr.  Lewis  startlingly  announced  to  a  group  of 
reporters  begging  him  for  a  statement  that  he  would  only 
be  interviewed  by  one  man — one  to  whom  he  had  made  a 
promise  some  time  back.  It  proved  to  be  one  of  the  two 
men  who  were  in  the  anteroom  the  preceding  day. 

Miss  Morris  saw  her  chance.  "Say,  old  pal,"  she 
nudged  the  lucky  reporter,  "remember  that  stunt  yester- 
day." But  she  did  not  even  have  to  ask.  The  reporter 
dragged  her  into  the  room  where  Mr.  Lewis  lounged,  and 
introduced  the  girl  photographer  to  the  gruff,  affable  labor 
leader.  Sure,  Miss  Morris  could  have  all  the  pictures  she 
wanted.  They  were  the  only  layout  of  intimate  studies 
made  during  Mr.  Lewis's  stay  in  the  city. 

Miss  Morris  uses  a  Rolleiflex  camera  a  large  part  of 
the  time,  usually  with  one  or  more  flashbulbs  placed  in 
standing  reflectors,  and  synchronized  with  a  Mendelsohn 
flashgun.  She  also  has  a  Contax  and  a  Soho  reflex  camera 
which  she  uses  occasionally. 


164  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

Ever  since  she  was  a  babe  in  arms,  Miss  Harriet  Plat- 
nick,  1 8-year-old  news  photographer  of  Hempstead,  Long 
Island,  has  heard  the  parlance  of  cameras,  plates,  bulbs, 
speed  guns  and  all  the  "shop  talk"  daily  expressed  by 
news  cameramen.  Her  father,  Samuel  Platnick,  a  veteran 
news  gatherer  with  the  camera,  has  operated  a  studio  in 
their  home  town  for  more  than  fifteen  years.  Her  brother 
is  also  an  experienced  news  photographer.  Therefore  she 
got  used  to  handling  cameras  ever  since  she  has  learned 
to  walk. 

At  ten,  she  owned  her  own  Brownie  camera  and  was 
successful  in  developing  and  printing  her  own  work.  At 
fifteen,  armed  with  a  4x5  Speed  Graphic,  equipped  with  a 
Carl  Zeiss  Tessar  f*4.5  lens  and  a  Mendelsohn  speedgun, 
which  was  in  a  sad  condition  after  being  passed  down  from 
her  father  to  her  brother  to  herself,  she  took  her  first 
news  pictures.  It  was  an  auto  accident  in  which  two  were 
killed  and  others  dying.  Pretty  bloody.  She  nearly  quit, 
but  thought  it  over,  gritted  her  teeth  and  decided  if  she 
was  to  maintain  her  livelihood  with  a  camera,  she  had  to 
take  the  bad  with  the  good,  the  pretty  with  the  pretty 
horrible. 

Her  contacts  with  New  York  newspapers  began 
through  her  father.  He  had  wide  acquaintances  among 
picture  editors,  and  at  first  when  the  assignments  came  in, 
he  would  send  her  out  to  cover  the  story,  providing  there 
was  to  be  no  rush  and  excitement. 

She  would  cover  the  assignments  and  her  plates  would 
go  in  to  her  father's  outfits  under  his  name.  Of  course, 
this  was  only  after  many  months  of  careful  schooling  under 
the  watchful  eyes  of  both  her  father  and  brother.  With 
them  she  would  work  shoulder  to  shoulder  making  plate 
after  plate,  and  by  comparing  results,  she  was  able  to 
improve  her  work.  Finally,  word  leaked  out  that  Mr. 
Platnick  had  a  daughter  who  was  responsible  for  many  of 
the  shots  coming  in  from  Long  Island. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  165 

Some  of  the  editors  resented  that  fact.  The  idea  of 
a  girl  taking  straight  news  photographs,  did  not  somehow, 
fit  into  the  scheme  of  their  daily  lives.  Now  they  are, 
or  almost  are,  over  it. 

Like  the  girl  photographer  of  the  Associated  Press, 
Miss  Platnick  has  become  quite  used  to  hearing  people 
say:  "Look,  that's  a  girl  taking  those  pictures,"  with  an 
incredulous  tone  of  voice  that  seems  to  indicate  that  a  lens 
could  not  possibly  work  in  conjunction  with  skirts  and  a 
pair  of  silk  stockings. 

Miss  Platnick  also  believes  in  never  asking  for,  nor 
taking  for  granted  an  special  favor  because  of  her  sex. 
She  has  never  asked  for  easy  assignments.  If  the  job  calls 
for  scaling  the  side  of  a  building  for  an  altitude  shot, 
then  up  she  goes.  If  she  has  to  row  half  way  across  Long 
Island  Sound  and  argue  her  way  on  board  a  yacht  and 
forcible  ducking  at  the  hands  of  an  irate  crew  to  get  a  shot 
of  a  Europe-bound  millionaire,  then  she  hires  a  boat  and 
shoves  off. 

There  was  that  incident  in  1936  when  the  Baroness 
Eza  von  Blixen  Finecke,  who  planned  to  fly  the  Atlantic, 
was  left  behind  by  her  pilot.  The  Baroness  went  into  deep 
seclusion.  The  papers  wanted  pictures,  but  the  Baroness 
said  no  in  her  exclusive  retreat  at  the  Hickville  Aviation 
Country  Club.  There  was  a  ring  of  cameramen  at  the 
gate,  so  Miss  Platnick  left  her  camera  in  her  car,  and 
strolled  past  the  gate  and  tried  to  put  on  that  "swanky" 
look.  She  insisted  to  the  doorman  that  she  had  an  ap- 
pointment with  the  Baroness  and  that  if  he  would  take 
her  card  in  the  Baroness  would  see  her.  This  he  did. 
The  Baroness  appeared  but  said  that  she  didn't  recall  ever 
having  an  appointment.  Finally,  the  Baroness  consented 
to  pose  for  a  picture.  Miss  Platnick  "just-one-more'd"  her 
into  a  complete  layout. 

There  was  another  time  up  in  Lettingtown,  Long 
Island.  J.  P.  Morgan  was  sailing  in  a  few  days  for 


1 66  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

Europe.  The  Sunday  previous,  he  attended  church  at 
St.  John's,  and  it  was  a  pretty  general  assignment.  As 
J.  P.  entered  church,  he  covered  up  with  a  big  top  hat. 
On  the  way  out,  Miss  Platnick  was  waiting,  and  she  made 
a  six-foot  closeup  shot  of  him  in  a  crowd  which  prevented 
him  from  escaping.  As  they  reached  the  end  of  the 
walk,  the  financier  began  to  swing  his  cane  perilously  close 
over  the  heads  of  a  few  photographers  and  quite  close 
to  her,  but  she  got  the  picture.  Miss  Platnick  honestly 
believes  that  the  grand  mogul  of  finance  actually  smiled 
when  he  saw  her  there. 

Daily,  Miss  Platnick  receives  the  so-called  "tips"  from 
State  Troopers,  police  and  other  individuals  from  all  over 
the  island. 

Remember  those  first  pictures  of  Dick  Merrill  and 
Jack  Lambie  tuning  up  their  plane  just  before  hopping  to 
London  and  back?  The  girl  photographer  had  the  good 
fortune  to  get  a  good  break  on  that  story  from  a  State 
Trooper  who  happened  by  the  Farmingdale  Airport,  and 
noticing  the  work  going  on,  phoned  her.  Dick  and  Jack 
were  more  than  surprised  when  she  asked  them  to  pose 
for  a  layout  of  pictures. 

At  another  time,  Jack  Dempsey,  the  fighter  carried  her 
camera  case  all  over  the  beach  while  she  was  taking  pic- 
tures of  orphans  at  the  beach. 

The  Hempstead  miss  contacts  the  newspaper  offices 
in  the  usual  manner.  A  phone  call  to  the  picture  or  city 
desk,  a  description  of  the  picture,  a  dash  to  the  darkroom 
to  take  the  films  from  the  holders  and  wrap  them  in  light- 
proof  paper  and  insert  in  an  empty  4x5  box;  then  into  her 
car  she  goes  to  the  nearest  station,  finds  a  trainman  to 
take  the  package  to  New  York,  gives  him  a  few  hurried 
instructions,  and  then  on  another  phone  calls  the  newspaper 
or  syndicate  desk  advising  the  time  of  arrival,  and  they 
have  a  messenger  pick  up  the  package. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  167 

For  her  equipment,  Miss  Platnick  still  carries  a  Speed 
Graphic,  but  this  time  a  new  one.  She  also  uses  a  candid 
camera,  a  Zeiss  Ikonta,  with  a  Kalart  Speedgun.  She 
has  her  own  car,  which  is  equipped  with  a  case  of  bulbs, 
tripod,  changing  bag,  panchromatic  films,  rubber  boots 
for  wet  assignments,  dry  clothes  in  case  of  a  spill,  and 
other  odds  and  ends  which  go  to  make  up  a  complete 
outfit. 

At  nights  the  wisp  of  a  lass  listens  closely  in  on  the 
local  police  radio  station  WPGS.  It  frequently  happens 
that  a  number  of  signal  ID'S  will  follow  each  other  in 
quick  succession  (they  are  accident  code  calls),  and  Miss 
Platnick  will  dash  to  each  scene,  covering  each  one  rapidly 
and  thoroughly,  so  as  not  to  be  beaten  by  rivals. 

That's  the  life  of  a  girl  photographer — only  eighteen 
years  of  age! 

Now  who  can  say,  in  all  fairness,  that  the  girl  photog- 
rapher cannot  cover  the  news? 


Chapter  XL 

THE  AERIAL  PHOTOGRAPHER  GETS  THE 
PICTURE! 

By  CHARLES  H.  MCLAUGHLIN 
(McLaughlin  Aerial  Surveys,  Inc.) 

News-Photography-from-the-Air  can  hardly  be  called 
a  definite  profession.  It  is  just  one  of  many  branches  of 
aerial  photography,  but  wjien  there  is  something  sensa- 
tional to  be  covered  it  can  be  very  exciting. 

We  might  divide  it  into  two  general  classes:  spread 
news  and  spot  news.  For  the  former,  the  pictures  must 
be  outstanding  and  of  more  than  ordinarily  good  quality; 
they  should  be  unusual  pictures  of  subjects  that  have  a 
lasting  interest  with  the  general  public.  As  these  pictures 
can  be  used  at  anytime,  they  are  for  the  most  part  carried 
in  either  the  rotogravure  or  second  news  sections.  The 
latter,  i.e.,  spot  news,  covers  events  of  immediate  and 
unusual  interest,  the  forest  fire,  flood,  explosion,  the  sport 
event,  etcetra.  As  it  is  difficult  in  many  instances  to  get 
very  close  to  the  scene  for  some  of  these  pictures  because 
of  conditions  presenting  themselves,  the  pictures  must  be 
shot  as  well  as  possible  under  the  circumstances  and  then 
rushed  to  the  paper  which  is  usually  holding  up  an  edition 
for  them. 

Sometimes,  as  in  the  case  of  the  arrival  of  the  liner 
Normandie  after  her  maiden  voyage,  the  work  is  a  com- 
bination of  both  these  classes. 

Therefore,  when  we  received  an  assignment  to  cover 
the  Normandie's  arrival  we  had  to  plan  our  flight  in  order 
to  get  exceptional  views  and  at  the  same  time  make  certain 


©    McLaughlin    Aerial    Surveys,    Inc. 

A  SEA  QUEEN  AND  HER  PAGE-BOYS! 

Escorting  the  majestic  liner  Normandie  up  the  North  River  to  her  royal 
berth,  the  tiny  tugs  skim  the  water  in  white- foamed  excitement — an  inter- 
esting spectacle  tavten  by  the  aerial  photographer  who  waited  for  the  exact 
moment  when  the  wind  died  down  allowing  the  Normandie's  smoke  to  plume 
straight  upward  instead  of  across  her  bows.  It  was  a  long  wait  from  the 
time  she  left  Quarantine — but  the  picture  was  worth  it! 


©    McLaughlin    Aerial    Surveys,    Inc. 

CLOUDS    OVER    MANHATTAN 

The  aerial  photographer  on  the  way  home  from  a  Connecticut  assignment 
glimpsed  the  skyscrapers  of  Manhattan  through  a  rift'  in  the  sea  of  clouds, 
12,000  feet  up,  and  snapped  this  interesting  shot  of  cumulus  and  tiny  blocks 

of  steel  and  stone. 


By    Thomas    McAvoy,    courtesy    TIME,    Inc. 
'Now   let   me   look   this   over — — " 


THE  CANDID  CAMERA  INVADES  THE  WHITE  HOUSE 
When  Thomas  Dowell  McAvoy  was  assigned  to  get  pictures  of  the  signing 
of  the  Brazilian  Trade  Agreement  at  the  White  House  in  1935  he  resolved 
to  get  something  different  than  the  other  cameramen.  Unobserved,  he  quietly 
pressed  the  button  of  his  miniature  camera  twenty  times — and  here  are  some 
of  his  results.  It  was  the  first'  complete  candid  camera  study  of  the  President 
in  an  official  capacity. 


By  Thomas  McAvoy,  courtesy  TIME,  Inc. 
"How's    Brazil?" 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  169 

that  they  were  received  by  the  newspaper  in  the  shortest 
possible  time. 

Rather  than  use  our  regular  plane,  we  chose  an  auto- 
gyro for  the  reason  that  when  a  well-heralded  event  takes 
place  such  as  this  one,  there  are  many  planes  in  the  air 
and  all  of  them  circling  the  subject  at  the  same  time.  The 
procedure  followed  is  that  everyone  flies  in  a  right  circle 
and  as  they  come  around  into  position  they  shoot  a  picture 
and  circle  for  another,  but  each  photographer  must  wait 
his  turn.  This  results  often  in  the  best  view  being  avail- 
able only  to  the  ones  fortunate  enough  to  be  in  position 
when  the  subject  presents  itself  for  a  good  picture. 

With  the  autogyro  we  were  not  obliged  to  fly  the 
circle.  We  pulled  the  nose  up  and  throttled  the  motor 
to  a  speed  about  equal  to  the  Normandie's  and  hugged 
her  close  while  waiting  for  the  view  we  wanted.  The  day 
was  a  bit  windy  and  there  was  a  downdraft  on  occasions 
which  carried  the  smoke  from  the  Normandie's  stacks 
down  across  the  forward  decks  frequently  obscuring  the 
bow  completely.  Still  we  didn't  shoot.  Competition  in 
the  air  was  keen,  and  we  realized  we  would  have  to  get 
the  one  outstanding  shot  to  have  it  published. 

We  therefore  bided  our  time.  The  big  ship  had  al- 
ready passed  the  Statue  of  Liberty  and  was  getting  on 
past  the  tip  of  Manhattan.  There  was  the  picture — the 
ship  and  the  cluster  of  skyscrapers — but  to  our  dismay, 
the  smoke  was  still  being  blown  downward  or  forward. 
Suddenly  about  the  time  she  was  passing  the  Holland 
Tunnel  the  wind  subsided  and  the  smoke  plumed  directly 
up  for  some  hundreds  of  feet.  Two  quick  shots !  We  had 
what  we  wanted  and  again  the  smoke  came  down. 

It  takes  a  new  liner  coming  into  New  York  more  time 
than  usual  because  of  a  two  or  three  hour  wait  at  Quaran- 
tine and  its  slow  progress  up  the  Hudson  River.  There- 
fore, instead  of  waiting  until  the  ship  was  finally  berthed 
at  her  pier,  we  landed  at  Miller  Field  on  Staten  Island 


I7O  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

and  met  a  motorcycle  messenger  from  a  picture  syndicate 
who  took  the  films  we  had  exposed  in  the  lower  bay  and 
at  Quarantine.  He  rushed  these  back  to  his  office. 

Off  we  were  again  on  our  flight  and  we  returned  to 
make  some  more  shots  of  the  liner  slowly  churning  the 
river.  After  getting  what  we  wanted  of  these  and  the 
skyscrapers  of  New  York  as  a  background  we  made  a 
quick  flight  to  Jersey  City  Airport,  delivered  the  plates  to 
a  second  messenger,  and  then  rushed  back  in  time  to  catch 
the  liner  docking.  We  then  landed  at  North  Beach  on 
Long  Island  and  sent  a  third  batch  of  film  on  its  way. 
We  then  returned  to  Roosevelt  Field  where  the  autogyro 
was  stored.  What  a  thrill  on  returning  to  the  city  to 
find  the  front  pages  displaying  pictures  carrying  our  credit 
line! 

Spot  news  work  comes  up  suddenly.  It  is  seldom  that 
we  get  an  opportunity  to  make  any  plans.  An  early 
morning  call! — the  Akron  crashes;  the  Morro  Castle 
burns;  the  Lindbergh  baby  is  kidnapped;  a  big  flood — get 
pictures!  Get  anything,  but  get  it  quick!  Frequently 
there  is  fog,  rain,  snow  or  it  is  not  yet  daylight.  But  we 
take  off  if  we  have  a  fifty-fifty  chance! 

We  have  our  bad  breaks,  too.  When  the  big  floods 
swept  Johnstown  and  Pittsburgh  in  1936  we  couldn't  get 
through  until  the  flood  was  old  news. 

During  the  big  flood  at  Hartford,  Connecticut,  a  few 
years  ago  we  were  more  fortunate  in  getting  pictures 
promptly  and  making  all  editions  for  the  newspaper  who 
had  chartered  us. 

When  the  Lindbergh  kidnapping  story  broke,  we  could 
do  nothing  but  get  views  of  the  house,  the  police  cars,  or 
the  crowds  nearby.  Every  ground  photographer  was 
getting  them  too,  so  we  tried  something  different.  At  the 
time  there  was  talk  of  the  baby  still  being  in  the  neighbor- 
hood. We  therefore  climbed  up  to  12,000  feet  and  shot 
comprehensive  photographs  of  that  whole  section  of  New 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  171 

Jersey.  We  submitted  the  group  to  the  papers  and  they 
all  used  them.  Their  artists  put  a  white  ring  around  the 
house  and  suggested  possible  routes  for  searching  parties 
to  take  through  the  Sourland  Range  of  mountains.  Not 
many  hours  after  the  pictures  were  published  we  received 
calls  from  the  police  requesting  prints  for  studying  the 
topography  and  guiding  the  searching  parties. 

Very  often  when  we  are  up  on  a  commercial  job  and 
there  is  no  news  work  to  be  done  we  either  look  for  or 
create  news.  By  making  news  I  do  not  mean  that  we 
distort  or  falsify.  It  is  simply  finding  something  there 
that  on  first  glance  did  not  exist. 

For  instance,  one  day  while  taking  pictures  over  Con- 
necticut so  many  clouds  blew  in  that  I  could  not  complete 
my  work  and  had  to  return.  When  such  a  thing  happens 
one  naturally  loses  a  certain  amount  of  money  for  cross- 
country flying  and  we  had  already  been  on  that  same  job 
twice  before.  It  was  disheartening.  I  was  anxious  to 
retrieve  some  of  the  losses,  so  we  climbed  up  through  the 
clouds  and  watched  for  an  interesting  opening.  In  flying 
south  over  Manhattan  Island,  we  managed  to  get  eight  or 
ten  beautiful  shots  of  the  city  through  the  clouds.  We 
developed  them  and  took  them  to  the  papers  and  the 
rotogravure  sections  grabbed  them  right  up.  So  did  a 
number  of  magazine  editors  and  to  our  delight  we  did  a 
lot  better  than  break  even  on  the  day's  work. 

Very  often  when  flying  cross  country  under  more  fav- 
orable conditions  many  interesting  subjects  present  them- 
selves, and  always  with  rotogravure  in  mind  we  try  to 
get  several  views  that  are  both  interesting  and  beautiful. 

There  is  more  than  just  an  airplane  and  camera  re- 
quired in  the  making  of  aerial  photographs.  Different 
types  of  work  call  for  changes  in  cameras,  wearing  apparel 
and  grades  of  film. 

During  the  summer  one  can  wear  most  anything  in  a 
cabin  plane,  and  if  flying  an  open  job  a  helmet  and  goggles 


172  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

are  necessary  accessories.  During  the  winter  months  and 
especially  on  clear,  cold  days  there  is  no  clothing  too  warm. 
Sheepskin-lined  flying  suit,  helmet  and  mocassins,  and  a 
pair  of  leather  mittens  with  wool  or  fur  lining  are  standard 
equipment.  Putting  them  on  in  a  warm  place  adds  to  one's 
comfort  when  aloft  as  no  cold  air  gets  in  once  they  are 
fastened. 

There  are  two  types  of  aerial  cameras  for  news  work. 
One  is  adapted  to  roll  film  and  the  other  to  cut  film  or 
plates.  The  former  is  preferable  when  many  pictures 
must  be  taken  in  rapid  succession.  Its  drawback  is  the 
length  of  time  required  for  developing  and  drying  the 
film.  In  news  work  this  is  often  a  distinct  handicap. 
However,  there  are  many  features  in  its  favor  as  being 
able  to  carry  enough  film  for  several  hundreds  of  shots 
and  only  having  to  load  the  camera  after  each  hundred 
exposures.  Until  very  recently  the  roll  film  has  been  faster 
and  of  better  quality  than  cut  film  or  plates. 

The  smaller  cameras  are  usually  equipped  with  maga- 
zines for  either  plates  or  cut  film,  and  while  they  do  not 
usually  compare  with  the  roll  film  in  quality,  they  can  be 
handled  very  much  faster.  A  motorcycle  can  rush  a  maga- 
zine from  the  airport  to  the  newspaper  or  syndicate  and 
in  little  time  the  films  are  developed  and  printed,  while  if 
only  a  few  shots  are  made  on  a  roll  the  camera  must  be 
taken  to  the  darkroom  so  the  exposed  film  can  be  cut  from 
the  roll  sealed  in  a  container  and  then  sent  to  the  labora- 
tory for  developing.  This  greatly  delays  the  dispatching 
of  the  prints  to  the  newspaper  or  syndicate. 

In  aerial  work  filters  are  extremely  important.  One 
chief  reason  for  this  is  that  as  soon  as  you  are  more  than 
three  or  four  hundred  feet  above  the  earth  you  encounter 
blue  haze,  and  the  higher  you  go  the  denser  the  haze, 
so  naturally  a  denser  filter  is  required  to  cut  it.  For  low 
flying  I  recommend  an  "Aero  i"  filter  which  cuts  a 
certain  amount  of  blue  haze  but  also  softens  white  objects 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  173 

which  on  a  bright  day  have  a  tendency  to  helate.  For 
intermediate  flying,  i.e.,  one  to  six  thousand  feet  up,  an 
"Aero  2"  filter  is  required,  and  above  six  thousand  feet 
a  minus  blue  filter  is  used.  There  are  filters  in  between 
these  mentioned  but  for  the  usual  work  they  are  not 
necessary. 

Every  ascent  into  the  blue  is  a  new  adventure.  Every 
new  scene  to  be  photographed  presents  a  new  problem. 
There  are  hazards  which  the  news  cameraman  on  the 
street  does  not  have  to  face,  but  the  objective  is  the  same 
— get  the  picture,  and  get  it  back  pronto.  It  is  a  thrilling 
game,  and  while  it  is  not  as  glamorous  as  some  other  types 
of  flying,  I  can  assure  you  that  there  is  plenty  of  kick  to 
it  and  calls  for  the  use  of  steel  nerves,  ,good  judgement, 
quick  wits  and  the  keenest  photographic  ability  on  every 
trip. 


Chapter  XII. 

THE  PUBLICITY  MAN  GETS  THE  PICTURE! 

By  HAMILTON  WRIGHT,  JR. 

(Hamilton   Wright    Publicity    Organization) 

New  York  City 

(Mr.  Wright  has  had  published  many  thousands  of 
publicity  .pictures  in  newspapers  and  magazines  throughout 
the  world  during  his  18  years  as  a  publicity  executive. 
His  organization  headed  by  Hamilton  Wright,  Sr.  and  the 
author's  three  brothers  enjoy  an  enviable  reputation  in 
publicity  circles.  It  specializes  in  pictorial  publicity  and 
represents  many  foreign  governments,  resorts,  universities 
and  great  industrial  corporations.) 

Every  outstanding  personality  on  earth  was  made  out- 
standing with  the  help  of  news  publicity.  News  publicity 
can  make  or  break  any  man.  Daily  it  controls  the 
theatrical  box  office,  the  flow  of  business  at  resorts,  the 
elections,  the  sports  events,  the  popularity  of  social  lumi- 
naries, reactions  pro  or  con  to  Government  decisions, 
crusades  and  campaigns  of  every  conceivable  nature. 

Well  directed  publicity  can  saturate  public  opinion  like 
the  Flood.  Poor  publicity? — well,  if  it's  poor  you  never 
know  the  difference  because  it  just  isn't.  Thanks  to 
journalistic  standards  today  editors  are  the  bull  dogs  for 
press  agents.  Poor  ideas  hit  an  editor's  waste  paper 
basket  with  a  sickening  thud.  An  idea  has  got  to  click  or 
it  doesn't  get  into  print.  An  idea  today  must  be  sound, 
constructive,  interesting. 

Pictures  in  modern  publicity  today  is  still  in  a  sadly 
developed  stage.  The  written  word  is  100%  more  per- 


GET   THAT   PICTURE  175 

feoted  in  the  realms  of  publicity  than  emulsionized  ideas. 
I  don't  mean  that  publicity  pictures  are  not  mechanically 
perfect.  Far  from  it.  Exposure,  timing,  and  printing  are 
as  a  rule  excellent.  Indeed,  I'd  say  that  60%  of  the 
photographers  who  take  publicity  pictures  are  top  notch 
men.  But — out  of  every  100  publicity  photographs  you 
won't  find  three  that  can  create  news.  And  herein  lies 
the  key  to  success  in  pictorial  publicity.  What  you  need 
is  an  idea.  And  you  have  to  know  what  is  essential  in  a 
picture  to  carry  that  idea  across.  Remember,  pictures 
don't  lie.  The  camera  sees  everything — all  your  faults 
or  all  your  good  points.  Every  picture  should  tell  a  story. 
A  perfect  publicity  picture  needs  little  or  no  caption  writing 
— it  sells  itself. 

I  have  an  idea  for  a  publicity  picture.  I've  had  it 
for  two  years,  and  I've  never  used  it.  I'll  pass  it  along, 
and  the  first  press  agent  who  uses  it  will,  I  guarantee,  get 
it  published  in  every  third  newspaper  and  magazine  in 
the  country.  It's  an  idea  for  some  winter  resort.  There 
isn't  much  left  in  winter  resorts  that  hasn't  been  published. 
Editors  are  submitted  the  same  humdrum  pictures  every 
season — skiing,  jumping,  skating,  personalities,  etc.  What's 
left?  Nothing!  You've  got  to  manufacture  it.  In  order 
to  get  the  name  of  the  resort  published  in  hundreds  of 
newspapers  you've  got  to  give  the  papers  a  picture  con- 
taining so  rnuch  dynamic  and  interesting  material  that 
they'll  gladly  publish  your  picture.  Here's  the  idea.  Ten 
men  skiing  through  the  air  simultaneously  in  line  forma- 
tion! Impossible?  Almost!  In  order  to  get  this  picture 
you  would  have  to  search  for  a  hill  with  a  projecting  slope 
a  la  ski-jump.  Let's  assume  you  can't  find  it.  Then  get  a 
team  of  horses,  a  half  dozen  men  and  build  it.  You  can't 
find  ten  ski-jumpers?  Then  bring  them  up  from  the  city 
— or  from  a  nearby  ski  club.  They  won't  come?  Then 
pay  them.  They  can't  jump  together?  Then  train  them. 


176  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

They  don't  do  it  right?  Then  do  it  again  next  week.  And 
keep  after  it  until  you  get  them. 

But  getting  this  alone  is  using  an  idea  for  only  50% 
of  its  possible  value.  How  much  nicer  it  woud  be  to  have 
these  ten  boys  sailing  over  the  heads  of  a  mixed  group 
of  winter  vacationists  relaxing  for  a  moment  during  a 
snowshoe  hike.  Imagine  them  nonchalantly  talking  in 
knotted  groups,  some  sitting,  some  strolling,  some  stand- 
ing, some  enjoying  a  hot  beverage.  Perhaps  some  tables 
or  chairs  are  ,nearby.  Alright — let's  move  the  whole 
works  right  under  the  spot  where  our  ten  skylarking  heroes 
are  going  to  emulate  the  men  on  the  flying  trapeze — winter 
tempo ! 

Thus  we  have  a  double-barrelled  wallop  in  our  picture. 
We  have  human  interest  galore.  We  have  spectacular 
interest.  We  have  news  interest — it's  something  new — 
never  been  seen  before.  We  have  resort  appeal,  and,  last 
but  not  least,  we  let  the  world  know  that  the  town  of  Snow 
Use  of  the  Snow  Use  Winter  Sports  Vacationland  is  alive 
and  kicking,  and  here's  where  you,  dear  newspaper  reader, 
want  to  come  when  you  think  of  winter  recreation.  We 
haven't  mentioned  the  newsreels,  but  you  can  rest  assured 
they'd  go  for  this  like  a  kitten  goes  for  milk. 

Radio  City,  John  D.  Rockefeller's  $100,000,000  de- 
pression-built emporium  of  business  in  the  heart  of  Man- 
hattan, is  perhaps  one  of  the  outstanding  examples  of 
what  paper  pulp  can  be  made  to  do  to  pay  dividends. 
Here,  publicity  played  a  major  part  in  turning  the  tide  of 
investment  from  a  much  prophesied  white  elephant  into 
one  of  the  smartest  building  investments  in  the  history  of 
Manhattan.  Confronted  with  a  $3,000,000  annual  rental 
for  property  he  owned  in  the  area  now  Rockefeller  Center, 
John  D.  Rockefeller,  Jr.  elected  to  make  that  property 
pay  him  $3,000,000  plus  annually.  He  did,  and  it  cost 
him  $100,000,000. 

I  was  fortunate  enough  to  be  associated  with  the  en- 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  177 

tire  development  shortly  after  the  major  part  of  the  con- 
struction work  had  been  done.  Prior  to  that  time  news 
was  sent  to  the  press  almost  daily  heralding:  UA  7o-story 
building  will  rise  at  49th  Street  and  Fifth  Avenue" — "The 
world's  largest  theatre,  a  Music  Hall  will  be  built  at 
50th  Street  and  Sixth  Avenue" — "French,  English,  Italian 
and  German  Buildings  will  front  Fifth  Avenue  between 
49th  and  5ist  Streets".  It  was  excellent  news,  real  news. 
The  papers  gobbled  it  up.  But  the  time  shortly  came 
when  they  had  become  so  saturated  with  this  news  that  it 
no  longer  had  sufficient  reader  interest  to  justify  wide- 
spread publicity.  The  story  had  been  told  not  once  but 
ten  times,  and  it  was  wearing  off.  Yet  the  time  was  com- 
ing when  publicity  was  needed  more  than  ever  before. 
Offices  were  nearing  completion  for  occupancy,  and  the 
renting  department  needed  all  the  publicity  the  develop- 
ment could  get  to  close  leases. 

Studying  the  situation  in  all  its  aspects  there  was  one 
thing  left  to  do  that  had  not  been  done — pictorial  pub- 
licity! No  pictures  dramatizing  the  tremendous,  operation 
had  been  taken.  No  pictures  showing  four  dozen  men 
working  at  top  speed  in  military-like  formation  with  rock 
drills  boring  into  the  bowels  of  Manhattan's  solid  work 
had  been  made.  They  hadn't  been  made  because  four 
dozen  men  never  worked  on  one  spot,  yet  there  were  at 
times  ten  dozen  at  work  throughout  the  development.  I 
brought  four  dozen  together,  shot  the  pictures,  and  they 
were  published  not  only  from  coast  to  coast  but  in  many 
foreign  countries.  Rather  than  await  the  completion  and 
placing  of  an  important  bit  of  sculpture  we  went  direct 
to  the  artists'  studios  and  had  them  assemble  plaster 
models  of  gargantuan  statues  they  were  working  out. 
Result — pictures  in  all  the  papers. 

No  stone  was  left  unturned.  If  pictures  didn't  exist 
we  made  them  exist.  Time  and  again  newspapers  carried 
half-page  rotogravure  spreads  of  the  entire  development 


178  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

after  it  was  completed  and  work  was  still  going  on  within 
itself.  But  each  time  a  news  vehicle  had  to  be  provided. 
Once  we  arranged  to  have  four  autogyro  planes,  the  only 
four  in  the  East,  fly  over  the  Center  in  formation  saluting 
the  development.  By  luck  we  were  able  to  get  the  first 
cabin  autogyro  and  incidentally  the  first  pictures  ever  taken 
of  it.  The  day  was  set,  and  over  they  came  at  two  p.m., 
one  from  Philadelphia,  one  from  Floyd  Bennett  Field  and 
two  from  Westchester  County.  By  the  time  they  got  into 
formation  the  clouds  let  loose  a  downpour  that  nearly 
spelled  disaster  for  the  gyros.  Again  we  scheduled  it  for 
the  following  Saturday,  and  on  Sunday  a  week  later  papers 
from  coast  to  coast  carried  spectacular  pictures  of  those 
four  ships  majestically  displayed  against  ujohn  D.  Rocke- 
feller's new  $100,000,000  building  development  shortly  to 
house  executive  offices  of  the  nation's  greatest  businesses." 

Perhaps  the  most  spectacular  shot  was  one  made  on  the 
spur  of  the  moment  during  a  lunch  hour  on  top  of  the 
RCA  building  then  skeletonized  up  to  its  68th  floor.  I 
noticed  that  the  steel  workers  thought  nothing  of  sitting 
on  the  edge  of  a  girder  with  a  yawning  abyss  of  nothing 
between  them  and  the  street.  I  suggested  that  a  60  or 
yo-foot  steel  girder  be  hoisted  over  the  street,  and  asked 
the  men  if  they  would  sit  on  it  and  eat  their  lunches  while 
we  took  pictures.  The  response  was  so  great  that  we  had 
to  cut  the  number  down  to  eleven,  and  away  with  our 
cameras  at  a  subject  that  made  the  reader  hold  his  breath 
and  solemnly  swear  to  himself  that  he  would  never  be  a 
steel  worker. 

I  will  now  turn  to  another  outstanding  example  of 
creative  ability  in  picture  publicity.  Like  other  big  col- 
leges, Fordham  University  has  the  usual  classes  in  chem- 
istry, botany,  and  the  other  sciences.  Legitimate  news 
slowed  down  to  a  standstill  one  month  not  so  long  ago, 
and  we  were  forced  to  turn  on  the  "heat"  in  an  effort  to 
get  publicity.  Just  because  there  is  "nothing  going  on" 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  179 

is  no  reason  why  you  should  accept  your  check  every 
month  from  any  client.  He  pays  for  publicity,  and  he 
either  gets  it  or  you  don't  get  paid. 

One  day  we  wandered  into  the  microscopic  section  and 
noticed  a  half  dozen  boys  looking  through  the  instruments. 
The  idea  struck  us  immediately  to  line  up  fifteen  or  twenty 
in  such  fashion  that  we  could  get  a  perfect  alignment, 
almost  uncanny  in  perspective,  of  those  boys  all  observing 
at  the  same  time.  Consultations  with  the  professor 
resulted  in  the  boys  being  called  into  Room  A  after  school 
hours,  and  we  went  to  work.  It  was  essential  that  the 
boys  be  all  of  uniform  height,  dressed  alike,  and  using  the 
left  eye.  A  few  foot  stools  brought  uniformity  in  head 
height,  white  jackets  came  out  of  the  laundry,  and  we 
went  to  work.  This  picture  was  comparatively  simple  to 
get — a  chance  thought — and  it  received  widespread  pub- 
licity. 

Readers  throughout  the  country  may  still  remember  one 
unusual  picture  given  prominent  display  in  rotogravure, 
showing  a  trio  of  planes  flying  in  perfect  formation  over 
a  speeding  express  train  in  Florida.  A  lot  of  perspiration 
was  spent  on  that  one. 

The  Blankety  Blank  Railroad  has  as  its  greatest  com- 
petitor for  Florida  bound  travel  the  Blankety  X  Railroad. 
I  may  be  telling  stories  out  of  school  in  relating  this  inci- 
dent, but  it  is  done  to  show  that  sometimes  even  the  great 
minds  in  railroading  miss  a  bet  to  advertise  themselves. 

We  were  negotiating  with  the  Blankety  Blank  outfit 
for  a  contract  to  handle  news  publicity  for  the  winter 
season.  The  decision  was  constantly  put  off  through 
jealousy  on  behalf  of  a  certain  advertising  agency  who 
thought  we  were  doing  work  they  should  have  done  and 
taking  money  away  from  them.  We  told  the  agency  we 
would  give  them  a  regular  15%  commission  off  the  total 
allotted  for  publicity,  exactly  the  same  profit  they  would 


180  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

have  made  if  the  money  were  spent  for  display  advertising, 
but  apparently  it  did  no  good. 

In  the  meantime,  we  had,  with  the  encouragement  of 
the  Blankety  Blank's  traffic  department  gone  ahead  and 
arranged  to  have  their  crack  train,  making  its  annual  in- 
augural run  to  Florida,  the  recipient  of  a  cracker  jack  news 
picture  event. 

The  annual  Air  Meet  was  underway  in  Miami,  and 
we  thought  it  a  fine  idea  to  have  the  Army  send  one  of  its 
smoke  screen  laying  planes  fly  up  the  line  to  meet  the 
train  bound  south  for  Miami,  and  salute  it  with  a  smoke 
screen,  while  four  other  Army  planes  fly  in  tandem  forma- 
tion right  behind  the  locomotive. 

All  arrangements  had  been  made  two  weeks  ahead  of 
time  with  New  York  to  Miami  phone  bills  running  close  to 
$60.  Yet  the  rail  officials  couldn't  make  up  their  minds 
whether  they  wanted  to  go  into  this  or  not.  In  fact,  the 
cost  to  them  was  in  pennies  compared  to  the  amount  they 
spent  for  their  display  advertising. 

With  ten  hours  to  go  before  the  flight  was  scheduled 
they  advised  us  to  call  it  off !  It  was  sickening,  and  it 
made  me  so  mad  that  I  grabbed  the  phone,  called  their 
competitor,  the  Blankety  X  line,  and  arranged  the  stunt 
with  them.  But  it  could  not  be  done  for  a  week  as  their 
crack  train  did  not  start  until  a  week  from  this  date.  In 
the  meantime,  the  Miami  air  meet  ended,  and  the  army 
planes  went  back  to  Texas.  A  truly  sensational  news 
picture  was  lost. 

What  could  we  do?  One  other  thing.  We  could 
arrange  for  four  civilian  flyers  handling  exactly  the  same 
type  of  ships.  More  phone  calls  to  Miami,  more  head- 
aches when  we  learned  there  were  not  four  planes  alike 
available.  It  was  necessary  to  have  them  all  white  for 
photographic  purposes.  We  finally  found  three  of  a 
certain  type  in  Miami.  They  were  small  single-seated, 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  l8l 

two  or  three  cylinder  powered  gliders,  not  very  fast  and 
not  able  to  maneuver  quickly. 

Our  job  was  still  in  the  embryonic  stage.  Working 
with  the  factory  in  the  North  we  learned  that  two  more 
were  available  in  Florida,  one  in  Jacksonville  and  one  in 
St.  Petersburg.  We  got  them  all  to  Miami. 

The  day  came.  Up  they  went  flying  north  to  Palm 
Beach  to  meet  the  Special  of  the  Blankety  X  line.  Our 
camera  plane,  a  powerful  Stinson,  followed  them  down 
the  line  as  they  attempted  to  get  into  tandem  formation 
over  the  engine.  Only  two  could  keep  in  line,  and  the 
stunt  flopped  that  day  because  the  other  three  just  didn't 
get  in  their  places.  I  later  learned  that  high  winds  made 
it  impossible.  Well,  five  times  over  a  period  of  two  weeks 
we  kept  at  this  stunt  and  finally  got  it.  We  didn't  get 
what  we  wanted,  but  we  got  the  next  best  thing. 

All  arrangements,  all  the  details,  were  of  the  long 
distance  variety,  and  thanks  to  Karl  Voelter  of  the  Miami 
All  American  Airport,  our  close  friend,  who  worked  with 
us  on  a  hundred  similar  stunts  during  our  regime  as  pub- 
licity directors  for  the  City  of  Miami,  we  got  the  best 
pictures  possible. 

Needless  to  say,  the  striking  picture  appeared  from 
coast  to  coast  with  the  Sunday  rotogravure  sections  giving 
it  a  prominent  position  much  to  the  amazement  and 
chagrin  of  the  Blankety  Blank  Railroad. 


Chapter   XIII. 
THE  MINIATURE  CAMERA  ON  THE  NEWS  JOB 

When  the  first  "candid  camera"  pictures  of  the  dele- 
gates' conferences  at  the  League  of  Nations  meeting  at 
Geneva  first  arrived  in  this  country,  the  editor  of  a  large 
picture  syndicate  who  first  saw  the  intimate,  unposed  shots 
of  the  European  bigwigs,  the  first  of  their  kind,  pointedly 
remarked:  "These  will  revolutionize  the  news  picture 
field."  The  small  prints  were  arresting,  exciting.  Nothing 
like  them  had  ever  been  made  before.  Here  was  Ramsay 
MacDonald  with  hand  cupped  to  ear,  another  of  Premier 
Laval  of  France  in  a  moment  of  animated  conversation  with 
another  foreign  delegate,  all  snapped  within  the  sacrosanct 
portals  of  the  League  to  which  a  news  cameraman  had  never 
been  admitted. 

The  photographer  was  Dr.  Erich  Salomon,  a  portly, 
bespectacled  German,  who  up  to  the  age  of  42  had  not  even 
been  an  amateur  photographer.  Working  as  publicity  di- 
rector for  the  famous  Ullstein  publishing  house  in  Berlin 
in  1928,  he  had  heard  of  a  wonderful  small  camera  that 
could  be  held  in  the  palm  of  a  hand  and  could  make  pictures 
without  the  aid  of  a  flashlight.  He  decided  then  and  there 
to  buy  one,  and  learned  to  operate  it  very  efficiently.  It  was 
the  Leica  camera.  Salomon,  who  enjoyed  a  wide  acquaint- 
ance among  Europe's  statesmen,  decided  that  he  would  take 
pictures  of  them  in  their  most  natural  moments,  conversing, 
laughing,  seriously  concentrating,  yawning,  revealing  the 
human  side  of  the  great  men  to  the  public.  He  called  him- 
self a  photo-journalist. 

The  word  "candid  camera"  was  coined  by  the  London 
Graphic  which  had  published  the  first  of  Salomon's  unusual 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  183 

pictures  in  1930.  One  of  the  pictures  was  startlingly  frank 
in  its  subject  and  appeal,  and  created  a  sensation  in  the 
photographic  world.  The  picture  had  been  taken  at  two 
o'clock  in  the  morning  in  a  conference  room  of  The  Hague. 
Louis  Loucheur,  French  Minister  of  Labor,  was  holding  his 
hands  to  his  weary  eyes;  French  Premier  Andre  Tardieu 
was  slumped  back  on  a  couch,  with  eyes  almost  closed,  ap- 
parently exhausted.  Old  Henri  Cheron,  French  Finance 
Minister,  seated  in  a  high-backed  chair,  was  dozing  off. 
Between  Cheron  and  Tardieu  sat  Germany's  Foreign  Min- 
ister Dr.  Julius  Curtius,  slowly  succumbing  to  the  smooth 
fingers  of  Morpheus.  The  light  from  a  huge  lamp  in  back 
of  the  couch  was  softly  reflected  on  the  delegates'  stiff  shirt- 
fronts  and  the  high  foreheads  of  Cheron  and  Loucheur. 
The  meeting  of  men  to  decide  the  existences  of  millions  of 
subjects!  Unaware  to  these  leaders,  Dr.  Salomon  had 
stolen  off  to  one  side  to  focus  his  tiny  camera — and  they 
never  knew  that  their  picture  had  been  taken !  On  looking 
at  the  picture,  the  reader  could  almost  feel  that  he  had 
been  present  at  this  momentous  meeting. 

The  "candid  camera"  had  triumphed,  and  Dr.  Salomon's 
intimate  studies  were  in  immediate  demand. 

Years  before  Dr.  Salomon's  imposing  entrance  into  the 
field,  Dr.  Paul  Wolff  had  made  hundreds  of  interesting 
studies  with  the  Leica,  and  his  work  was  arousing  great 
interest  in  the  field  of  art  photography  in  Germany. 

The  tiny  camera  that  could  use  movie  film  so  successfully 
was  the  invention  of  Oskar  Barnack  employed  by  the  Leitz 
Company  at  Wetzlar,  Germany.  He  made  one  for  himself 
in  1914  and  one  for  Dr.  Ernst  Leitz,  Sr.,  president  of  the 
company,  and  the  first  picture  ever  taken  by  a  Leica  showed 
a  Berlin  kiosk  covered  with  a  Government  poster  announc- 
ing the  official  proclamation  of  the  mobilization  of  the  Ger- 
man Army.  Barnack  did  not  turn  seriously  to  the  improve- 
ment of  his  camera  until  after  the  war.  He  then  added  a 


I  84  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

new  lens,  the  Elmar,  designed  by  Professor  Max  Berek,  also 
employed  by  the  Leitz  Company.  By  1926,  the  Leica  had 
made  its  appearance  in  the  show-window  of  nearly  every 
photographic  dealer  in  Germany.  Starting  with  Model  A, 
the  Leitz  Company  steadily  added  improvements,  until  to- 
day its  Model  G  practically  leaves  the  camera  fan  nothing 
further  to  be  desired  to  take  any  kind  of  picture  under  any 
kind  of  condition. 

Soon  after  Leica's  appearance  on  the  market,  other 
miniature  cameras,  or  minicams  as  they  are  popularly  known, 
were  turned  out  by  rival  manufacturers,  and  in  1931,  the 
Contax,  the  Leica's  chief  competitor,  was  offered  to  the  pub- 
lic by  the  Zeiss-Ikon  Company,  the  world's  largest  camera 
manufacturers.  Today  there  are  as  many  as  40  different 
makes  of  miniature  cameras  defined  as  those  which  use  film 
two  and  a  quarter  by  three  and  a  quarter  inches  or  smaller. 
There  are  as  many  as  100,000  miniature  cameras  in  use  in 
this  country  alone.  The  "minibug,"  the  tyro  or  the  profes- 
sional cameraman  using  the  miniature  camera  is  to  be  seen 
everywhere  today,  training  the  compact  marvel  of  precision 
on  every  conceivable  subject.  The  bacteriologists,  botanists, 
dentists,  and  physicians  are  finding  it  an  invaluable  aid  in 
their  professions;  the  librarian  is  using  it  to  photograph  old 
manuscripts;  the  commercial  artist  is  finding  it  a  boon  to 
his  work;  nearly  every  large  newspaper  and  picture  syndi- 
cate in  the  country  has  added  one  or  more  to  its  photo- 
graphic equipment  in  their  pursuit  of  the  news  picture. 

The  most  astonishing  feature  of  the  miniature  camera  is 
its  ability  to  capture  all  the  details  of  the  subject  on  its  tiny 
one  inch  by  one  and  one-half  inch  film,  taken  under  any 
kind  of  light,  and  have  the  details  faithfully  enlarged  on  a 
print  eleven  by  fourteen  inches,  enough  to  satisfy  the  most 
discriminating  camera  fan  or  editor.  Enlargements  have 
even  been  made  up  to  eight  feet  square  and  larger  for  com- 
mercial purposes.  There  have  always  been  small  hand  cam- 


©   Hamilton   Wright 

THEY  CAN'T   PICK  UP   THEIR   NAPKINS 

Lunch  hour  found  these  steel  workers  perched  on  a  girder  68  stories  above 

the  street,  without  the  slightest  concern  either  for  the  photographer  making 

a  shot  from  another  steel  beam.     The  men  were  at  work  at  the  time  on  the 

completion    of    the    Rockefeller    Center    in    Manhattan. 


©  Hamilton  Wright 

FUTURE    LEADERS    IN    SCIENCE 

A  perfect  line-up  of  Fordham  University  members  of  a  class  in  microscopic 

anatomy  under  the  direction  of  Dr.   James  A.   Mullen,  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology,    preparing   for   final   tests   in    the    subject. 


©    Wide    World    Photos 

A  FLAMING  GIANT  OF  THE  AIR 

Flames  consume  the  last  fabric  of  the  huge  German  dirigible  Hindenburg- 
and  the  former  proud  monarch  of  hte  air  is  shown  but  a  twisted  mass  of 
steel  ribs — taken  in  about  a  minute  after  the  first  flames  shot  out  of  her 
tail  while  maneuvering  for  a  landing-  at  Lakehurst,  N.  J.,  May  6,  1937.  The 
body  of  one  of  the  passengers  who  had  leaped  lies  in  the  foreground. 
Thirty- -five  passengers  and  members  of  the  crew  were  burned  to  death. 
Photographers  waiting  for  a  routine  landing  recorded  the  greatest  picture 

story   of   all    time. 


©  Acme  Nevvspictures 

AND  THE  FLYER  ESCAPED  UNHURT 

It  was  a  miraculous  escape  for  Gordon  Israel  when  he  attempted  to  land  his 
plane  while  going  80  miles  an  hour  after  winning  the  50-mile  free-for-all  race 
at  the  Omaha  Air  Races,  August  12,  1934.  The  plane  bounced,  landed  on  its 
nose,  and  then  settled  to  the  ground.  Israel  was  unhurt  and  walked  from 
the  smashed  plane  unaided. 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  185 

eras  on  the  market,  but  the  coarse  film  grain,  when  enlarged, 
was  the  bane  of  the  photographer's  existence.  Even  as  far 
back  as  1880  there  was  a  camera  called  the  Stirn  which 
could  be  strapped  around  the  body,  with  its  lens  poked 
through  a  button-hole,  and  there  were  others  that  had  the 
size  and  appearance  of  watches,  and  still  others  called  detec- 
tive cameras  in  odd  sizes  and  shapes.  But  with  the  present 
minicams,  the  fine  precision  instruments  they  are,  have  all 
the  advantages  of  its  compactness  plus  the  favorable  results 
of  the  large  hand  cameras.  And  with  the  aid  of  fine  grain 
developers,  the  results  have  fulfilled  the  age-long  dream  of 
the  cameraman. 

Fast,  anastigmatic  lenses  are  a  feature  of  the  miniature 
camera,  and  speeds  up  to  i/i25Oth  of  a  second  can  be  ob- 
tained to  snap  the  fastest  action  of  a  racing  car  or  speeding 
plane.  An  exchangeable  lens  enables  the  photographer  to 
shoot  anything  from  closeups  of  bugs  and  flowers  to  the 
views  of  the  distant  skyscraper  or  mountain  top.  He  has 
the  choice  of  using  a  standard,  a  wide  angle  or  telescopic 
lens.  The  built-in  range  finders,  which  operate  with  any  of 
the  many  interchangeable  lenses  enables  the  photographer 
to  focus  his  picture  with  accuracy  by  a  simple  turning  of  the 
lens  barrel,  and  were  first  installed  by  both  the  Leica  and 
Contax  manufacturers  in  1931. 

To  the  minifan  the  entire  business  of  owning  and  using 
the  miniature  camera  has  been  so  absorbing  and  fascinating 
that  he  eats,  sleeps,  and  talks  focal  lengths,  lens  speeds, 
range  finders,  angle  view  finders,  and  the  rest  of  the  acces- 
sories as  sun  shades,  self-timing  devices,  filters,  which  con- 
tinue on  into  the  darkroom  vernacular  of  the  fine  grain 
developers,  fixing  and  hardening  solutions,  the  printing 
papers  with  their  grades  of  contrast.  One  fan  will  compare 
his  results  with  the  next,  and  the  perpetual  question  will  be 
bandied  back  and  forth:  "What  stop  and  speed  did  you 
use  for  such  and  such  a  shot,  and  did  you  use  Plenachrome 


I  86  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

film  or  Superpan?",  and  so  on.  Then,  of  course,  there  will 
be  the  topic  of  the  new  device  recently  placed  on  the  market : 
"Did  you  get  such  and  such  a  lens,  and  such  and  such  a 
filter?"  There  are  336  gadgets  alone  which  the  Leitz  firm 
sells  for  their  miniature  camera,  but,  of  course,  all  are  not 
necessary  for  the  immediate  purchaser. 

There  is  even  a  correction  lens  on  the  market  for  the 
man  who  wears  glasses,  so  he  can  properly  focus,  and  a  re- 
mote release  and  shutter  winder  for  the  man  who  is  inter- 
ested in  nature  photography,  so  that  by  using  two  cables 
attached  at  a  distance  to  guides  and  rollers  on  the  winding 
knob  of  the  camera,  he  is  able  to  snare  a  series  of  the  wild 
animal  in  his  lair  or  the  mother  bird  with  its  young  in  the 
nest. 

For  special  purposes,  as  astronomical  observatories, 
lenses  have  been  built  up  to  about  six  feet  in  height  for  use 
with  the  Contax. 

To  the  newspaper  and  syndicate  picture  editor,  the 
question  of  the  miniature  camera  had  to  be  weighed  more 
solemnly  than  to  the  man  on  the  street  who  saw  in  it  an 
instrument  for  relaxation  and  personal  pleasure.  Could  the 
crime,  the  fire,  the  accident,  the  feature  story  be  covered 
with  the  same  speed  and  accuracy  as  the  larger  cameras? 
To  some  of  these  questions  which  flitted  in  and  out  of  the 
editors'  minds,  as  the  country  took  to  the  miniature  camera 
by  storm,  the  answers  came  back  in  the  affirmative.  The 
miniature  camera  became  part  of  the  darkroom  equipment. 

Since  speed  is  essential,  the  developing  times  for  the 
cut  film  and  glass  plates  used  in  the  Graphic  and  Graflex, 
and  the  film  used  in  the  miniature  cameras,  were  compared. 
The  plate  holder  film  is  still  the  fastest  to  develop  and  more 
easily  to  handle.  For  instance,  the  standard  developing 
time  for  a  negative  used  in  the  larger  cameras  takes  six  min- 
utes; the  fast  Super  X  film  in  the  Leica  and  Contax  takes 
twenty  minutes.  The  newspaper  cameraman  thereby  still 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  I  87 

clings  to  his  Graphic  and  Graflex;  it  truly  is  a  marvel  for 
speed  both  on  the  job  and  in  the  darkroom.  But  the  minia- 
ture camera  is  also  an  invaluable  aid,  especially  in  the  cover- 
age of  semi-news  and  feature  stories  where  the  five  or  six 
picture  series  will  give  a  vivid  running  account  of  a  story, 
and  also  enables  the  cameraman  to  enter  places  where  a 
camera  case  is  immediately  barred.  Its  feature  of  incon- 
spicuousness  is  one  that  gives  it  great  value  in  a  newspaper 
office. 

The  picture  magazines,  like  Life  and  Look,  and  others 
that  feature  a  summary  of  the  news  in  word  and  picture 
like  Time  and  News  Week,  are  making  extensive  use  of  the 
miniature  camera,  and  many  unusual  news  pictures  have 
been  taken  by  the  men  with  the  minicams  employed  by  these 
magazines. 

Carl  Mydams,  one  of  the  many  photographers  employ- 
ed by  Life  Magazine,  was  assigned  to  cover  the  crash  of  a 
Western  Air  Express  liner  in  the  mountains  outside  Los 
Angeles.  The  Martin  Johnsons  were  among  the  passengers 
aboard  the  ill-fated  ship. 

"Deep  mud  and  almost  no  road  made  climbing  on  foot 
the  only  way  to  the  crash,"  he  narrates.  "The  first  four 
miles  were  in  a  heavy  mountain  downpour.  The  last  two 
in  a  sub-zero  snowstorm.  Then  having  reached  the  top,  we 
news  cameramen  had  to  wait  for  hours  for  a  team  of  mules 
and  a  tractor  to  draw  a  truck  and  a  hay  rick  to  the  mountain 
top  to  carry  down  the  injured.  Our  only  shelter  was  an  old 
wood  shed  used  in  the  summer  time  by  a  fire  lookout.  When 
it  came  time,  many  hours  later,  to  make  pictures  of  the 
transfer  of  the  injured  from  the  lookout  house  and  the 
crashed  plane  itself,  to  the  truck  and  hayrick,  my  speedgun 
which  had  been  soaked  in  the  heavy  downpour  during  the 
climb  up,  had  frozen  and  would  not  work.  I  made  all  my 
pictures  with  a  Contax  on  the  light  of  the  moviemen's  one 


I  88  GET   THAT   PICTURE 

minute  flares  and  was  able  to  cover  the  complete  transfer 
of  the  injured." 

Mydam's  equipment  consists  of  two  Contax  chassies 
and  six  supplementary  lenses.  He  usually  works  with  a  two 
inch  lens  in  one  camera  and  one  of  the  five  lenses  which  the 
situation  calls  for,  in  the  second  camera.  His  third  camera 
is  a  3%  x  4*4  Speed  Graphic  with  a  Carl  Zeiss  3.5  lens,  a 
Kalert  rangefinder  and  a  Mendelsohn  speed  gun.  Mydams 
believes  that  this  equipment  combination  will  cover  any 
situation  that  might  arise. 

One  of  the  most  unusual  series  of  news  photographs  was 
taken  by  the  unobtrusive  minicam.  When  Thomas  Dowell 
McAvoy  was  assigned  to  cover  President  Roosevelt's  sign- 
ing of  the  Brazilian  Trade  Agreement  in  the  White  House 
early  in  1935,  McAvoy  laid  careful  plans  to  get  something 
different  than  the  other  cameramen.  His  film  for  the  Leica 
he  was  using  was  specially  sensitized  in  an  ammonia  bath. 
While  the  other  cameramen  waited  until  the  President  fin- 
ished his  routine  letter-signing  to  get  their  shots,  McAvoy 
quietly  pressed  the  button  of  his  miniature  camera  twenty 
times.  They  were  the  first  complete  candid  camera  record 
of  a  President  in  an  official  capacity,  although  a  few  years 
earlier  Dr.  Salomon  had  for  the  first  time  snapped  a  news 
picture  of  a  President  performing  an  official  duty  in  a  part 
of  the  White  House  other  than  his  office  or  library.  At  the 
insistence  of  his  friend  Premier  Laval  of  France,  Herr 
Salomon  was  admitted  to  the  Lincoln  Study  in  the  White 
House  to  make  pictures  of  Laval's  conference  with  Presi- 
dent Hoover.  While  Laval,  conversing  through  an  interp- 
reter, gesticulated  in  typical  foreign  manner,  Salomon  made 
several  interesting  shots — and  the  candid  camera's  intrusion 
into  the  sanctum  sanctorum  of  the  White  House  was  the 
first  big  stone  cast  into  the  pool  of  American  news  photog- 
raphy to  create  ever  widening  ripples. 

Another  famed  minicam-armed  explorer  of  the  news 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  189 

world,  Peter  Stackpole,  whose  pictures  have  filled  many 
pages  in  Time,  Fortune  and  Life  magazines,  first  created  a 
sensation  with  the  candid  camera  shot  he  took  of  Herbert 
Hoover  fast  asleep  during  Secretary  of  Labor  Perkin's 
speech  at  the  University  of  California  Charter  Day  exer- 
cises several  years  ago.  He  made  the  picture  while  on  a 
special  assignment  for  an  Oakland  Republican  paper  which 
could  find  no  space  for  such  a  shot  of  Republican  Hoover. 
A  friend  of  his  insisted  that  he  send  it,  along  with  several 
other  shots,  to  Time  magazine — and  it  was  that  shot  that 
started  him  upward  on  the  road  to  fame.  The  magazine 
immediately  hired  him  as  a  member  of  its  staff. 

The  most  exciting  assignment,  Stackpole  says  he  has 
had,  was  his  first  with  Fortune  when  he  was  assigned  to 
Hearst's  summer  estate  at  Wintoon  in  Oregon.  The  pic- 
tures were  to  accompany  an  article  on  the  Hearst  Empire. 
Stackpole  had  been  given  a  list  of  about  fifty  subjects  to  be 
sure  to  get  but  he  had  only  two  days  to  do  the  job.  He  man- 
aged to  cover  most  of  the  fifty  and  still  take  additional  ma- 
terial such  as  Hearst's  guests,  the  publisher's  Tyrolian  hats, 
his  foreign  auto  plates  on  his  car  and  other  details  that 
might  have  escaped  a  less  enterprising  cameraman.  When 
the  issue  came  out,  more  of  the  circumstantial  shots  Stack- 
pole  had  taken  about  the  place  were  used  than  the  many 
given  him  on  the  list. 

Stackpole,  whose  series  of  candid  camera  shots  such 
as  the  bridge  photos  in  Vanity  Fair,  the  Hearst  story  in 
Fortune  and  the  Cardinals  baseball  training  camp  in  Flor- 
ida, Noel  Coward  backstage,  life  of  the  Admiral  of  the 
U.  S.  Fleet  and  the  Dartmouth  Winter  Carnival  in  Life 
magazine,  have  won  wide  acclaim,  uses  a  Model  F  and  G 
Leica  with  Summar  F.2  lens,  Elmar  50  mm.  3.5  lens,  Elmar 
90  mm.  F.4  lens,  135  mm.  Telephoto  lens  and  Elmar  Wide 
Angle  lens.  He  says  that  he  uses  also  a  Contax  often  be- 
cause with  it  he  has  three  speed  lenses  of  three  useful  focal 


190  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

lengths,  a  Biotar  40  mm.  because  of  its  fine  depth  of  focus 
at  large  stops,  the  rapid  Fi.5  Sonnar  50  mm.  lens  for  ex- 
tremely poor  light  and  the  85  mm.  F.2  telephoto  lens  which 
he  says  he  finds  useful  for  performance  photographs.  For 
assignments  requiring  stopped  action  indoors  where  the 
light  is  too  poor  to  use  either  the  Leica  or  the  Contax,  he 
uses  a  Welta  roll  film  camera  with  synchronized  speed  gun. 

Another  sensational  news  picture,  the  electrocution  of 
Gerald  Thompson,  sex  slayer,  at  the  Joliet,  111.  prison  was 
made  with  the  aid  of  a  miniature  camera  by  William  Van- 
divert,  now  with  Life  magazine,  and  employed  at  the  time 
by  the  Chicago  Herald  and  Examiner.  He  carried  a  Contax 
with  a  Fi.5  lens  past  the  guards  slung  in  the  crotch  of  his 
pants.  He  took  ten  shots,  eight  of  which  turned  out  well, 
and  one-third  of  another  negative  was  blown  up  to  a  16  x  20 
print  to  make  a  complete  back  page.  The  results  were  all 
the  more  remarkable  because  he  had  to  guess  focus  at  fifteen 
feet,  but  he  got  them  "right  on  the  button." 

Vandivert  also  had  a  narrow  escape  from  death  or  seri- 
ous injury  recently  when  he  accompanied  four  union  organ- 
izers into  a  laundry  intending  to  call  a  sitdown  strike.  The 
owner  of  the  laundry  took  a  shot  at  the  group.  When  the 
police  arrived  in  response  to  a  riot  call  the  owner  put  the 
finger  on  Vandivert  as  the  spokesman  for  the  organizers, 
and  he  spent  an  uncomfortable  afternoon  in  the  prosecutor's 
office  explaining  that  he  had  just  gone  along  for  the  fun  and 
a  series  of  pictures. 

Another  Life  magazine  cameraman,  Bernard  Hoffman, 
had  an  amusing  experience  one  day  when  he  was  getting 
ready  to  make  a  series  of  pictures  in  a  "hot  dog"  factory. 
Just  as  he  was  about  ready  to  shoot  his  pictures  he  discov- 
ered that  the  damp,  salt-laden  air  had  coated  the  lens  on  his 
camera.  He  made  some  repairs,  and  then,  because  of  a 
soggy  connection,  blew  out  all  the  light  fuses  in  the  place. 
Jhe  "hot  dogs"  had  to  lie  low  for  a  while. 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  191 

Besides  his  miniature  cameras,  the  Leica  and  the  Welta 
for  flashlight  shots,  he  also  uses  a  5  x  7  Korona  for  person- 
ality studies,  still  life  and  wide  angle  shots. 

Picture  editors  on  the  dailies  and  syndicates  are  con- 
tinually assigning  cameramen  with  minicams  to  make  the 
five  or  more  picture  series.  The  circus  is  in  town :  the 
cameraman  will  make  a  layout  of  the  performers,  the 
clowns,  the  animals,  and  most  interesting  of  all,  the  children 
spectators  who,  in  the  unposed  moment,  gaze  with  eyes  wide 
opened  in  amazement  while  the  aerial  acrobats  go  through 
their  stunts.  Children  are  among  the  best  subjects  to  cap- 
ture with  the  minicams.  Quietly,  the  cameramen  will  steal 
unawares  within  shooting  distance  to  get  the  most  natural 
pictures.  With  the  larger  cameras,  children  consciously 
stiffen  and  assume  the  most  awkward  poses;  they  are  very 
much  aware  of  the  lens  being  trained  on  them.  Some  of 
them  have  a  fear  of  the  flashlights,  and  the  sudden  burst  of 
light  will  frighten  the  smaller  children  into  screams  and 
tears. 

The  miniature  camera  is  also  well  adapted  to  the  dinner, 
night  club  and  theatre.  All  the  natural  poses  of  the  celebrity 
eating,  drinking,  conversing,  smiling,  seriously  engrossed  in 
a  moment  of  deep  thinking,  render  the  series  of  pictures  the 
most  life-like  possible,  and  the  aura  the  public  places  over 
a  well  known  figure  is  replaced  by  a  much  more  sensible 
depiction  of  him  when  they  see  his  likeness  in  a  real  human 
mood  and  moment.  By  jove,  he's  human — he  can  throw  his 
head  back  and  really  guffaw  1  The  minicam  has  caught  him 
at  that  moment.  There  is  no  ego  or  pose  when  the  minia- 
ture camera  catches  him  off  his  guard. 

Barred  doors  have  disappeared  as  if  by  magic  before  the 
cameraman  armed  with  the  miniature.  With  the  camera 
comfortably  fitting  into  his  pocket  or  safely  hidden  beneath 
his  coat,  the  photographer  has  invaded  courtrooms,  select 
dining  rooms,  debutante  parties,  board  of  director  meetings, 


192  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

state  ceremonials,  diplomats'  conferences,  gambling  halls, 
clip  joints,  and  gone  off  into  a  quiet  corner  and  taken  his 
pictures  without  a  person  aware  of  his  presence.  The 
mighty  gun  with  the  silencer — but  more  effective!  The 
angle  view  finder — that  deceptive  looking  gadget — has  con- 
quered many  an  unwilling  subject! 

What  miniature  camera  to  use?  The  question  is  asked 
a  hundred  times  daily,  across  the  shopkeeper's  counter,  the 
student's  desk,  the  artist's  easel,  the  newspaper  cameraman's 
darkroom.  Some  prefer  the  Leica,  others  will  swear  by 
the  Contax,  others  the  Robot,  the  man  with  the  thin  wallet 
the  $2.50  Univex  or  the  $12.50  American-made  Argus,  the 
rich  tyro  the  Zeiss'  $650  Contaflex.  Each  one  has  its  par- 
ticular attraction  for  the  minifan.  It  is  just  a  matter  of 
taste  and  individual  preference — and  the  pocketbook — for 
one  will  have  a  certain  feature  lacking  in  the  other.  Each 
day  brings  forth  a  new  camera,  a  new  improvement,  so  it  is 
impossible  to  judge  which  is  the  best.  With  proper  hand- 
ling, a  picture  of  perfect  tone  and  structural  balance  can  be 
obtained  from  one  as  well  as  the  next. 

The  miniature  camera  has  accomplished  one  big  thing. 
As  a  bright,  new  weapon  in  the  ceaseless  quest  for  the  photo- 
graphic gem,  it  has  stirred  the  imaginations  of  thousands  to 
the  possibilities  of  new  triumphs  in  the  photographic  field. 
To  the  news  cameraman,  ever  tireless  in  his  recording  of  the 
human  drama,  it  is  opening  new  vistas  of  accomplishment. 
Spurred  by  faith  in  its  powers  of  achievement,  he  will  record 
new  picture  documents  to  give  to  the  world  as  imperishable 
data. 


Chapter  XIV. 

THE  GREATEST  PICTURE  STORIES 
HINDENBURG  CRASH  —  PANAY  BOMBING 

The  Chinese  have  a  proverb:  "One  good  picture  is 
worth  ten  thousand  words."  This  is  often  exaggerated, 
but  on  two  stories,  it  was  an  understatement.  The  pic- 
tures taken  of  the  dirigible  Hindenburg  disaster  on  May 
6>  J937  and  the  bombing  of  the  United  States  gunboat 
Panay  in  the  Yangtze  River  on  December  12,  1937  pre- 
sented the  full  horror  of  the  catastrophes  as  no  amount 
of  words  could  have  ever  expressed — they  were  the  most 
dramatic  and  spectacular  picture  stones  of  all  time. 

Twenty-odd  cameramen,  movies  and  still,  were  on  the 
ground  at  Lakehurst,  N.  J.,  awaiting  the  routine  landing 
of  the  giant  Hindenburg  with  97  persons  aboard.  At 
7 :2O  p.m.  the  first  of  her  landing  lines  was  flung  to  a 
ground  crew  of  Navy  men  and  civilians.  The  second 
followed,  and  then  suddenly  a  burst  of  flame  shot  out  from 
the  port  side  of  her  stern.  Cries  of  horror  rent  the  air 
as  a  terrific  explosion  shook  the  giant  bag,  and  in  an 
incredibly  few  seconds  the  flaming  ship,  racked  by  suc- 
cessive explosions,  sank  earthward,  a  dragon-tongue  of 
fire  spitting  from  its  nose  turned  skyward.  In  less  time 
than  it  takes  to  tell,  the  burning  mass  crashed  to  the  earth 
as  more  explosions  followed,  and  mountains  of  flame  and 
smoke  blotted  out  the  sky. 

Just  before  she  struck  the  ground,  passengers  and 
crew  leaped  from  the  fiery  hell,  some  to  be  crushed  be- 
neath the  flaming  hulk,  others  to  be  dragged  to  safety  by 
the  landing  crew  who  at  first  ran  for  safety  and  then 
turned  back  risking  death  and  injury  to  save  many  lives. 


194  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

Ambulances  clanged  to  the  scene,  doctors  and  nurses 
rushed  to  give  first  aid,  and  fire  fighters  turned  great 
streams  of  water  and  chemicals  into  the  cauldron  of  smoke 
and  fire. 

Those  49  seconds  that  turned  a  glistening  monarch 
of  the  air  into  a  fiery  mass  of  twisted  aluminum  ribs  and 
snuffed  the  lives  of  35  persons  were  caught  by  the  veteran 
cameramen  as  they  stood  there,  horrified  and  gaping,  but 
with  steady  hands  completed  the  picture  record  of  a  dis- 
aster which  time  will  never  dim. 

It  is  the  first  time  in  history  that  the  news  photogra- 
pher was  able  to  record  on  his  negatives  the  start  of  a 
major  catastrophe. 

Murray  Becker,  Associated  Press  photographer,  was 
focusing  his  camera  on  the  Hindenberg  as  she  maneuvered 
into  landing,  aiming  for  a  nice  twilight  shot,  when  the 
first  flames  spurted  across  its  tail.  In  that  split-second, 
before  the  ship  began  to  dive,  he  snapped  the  first  picture 
of  the  flaming  dirigible  while  on  an  even  keel.  The 
others  raised  their  eyes  to  the  view  finders,  but  the  ship 
was  already  heading  earthward. 

The  cameramen  steeled  themselves  to  rigid  control  of 
hands  and  eyes  as  they  clicked  picture  after  picture,  snap- 
ping out  holders,  one  after  the  other,  and  then  raced  for- 
ward toward  the  settling  inferno  to  get  the  closeup  shots 
of  the  victims  plummeting  to  the  ground  and  others  with 
clothing  burnt  from  their  bodies  and  flesh  hanging  in  strips 
being  assisted  from  the  scene  by  Navy  men,  Marines  and 
civilians.  Disregarding  the  explosions  that  continued  to 
tear  the  flaming  mass  apart  and  the  terrible  heat  which 
beat  their  bodies  with  the  fierceness  of  a  thousand  open- 
door  furnaces,  the  photographers  kept  on  shooting  every 
available  plate  to  cover  the  story  completely. 

Every  newspaper  and  syndicate  photographer  on  the 
job  turned  in  remarkable  pictures  of  the  disaster.  The 
New  York  Daily  News  had  two  men,  Charles  Hoff  and 


GET  THAT  PICTURE  195 

Robert  Seelig,  Sam  Shere  represented  International  News 
Photos,  Samuel  Meyers  was  the  New  York  Times  Wide 
World  cameraman,  William  Springfield  was  Acme  News' 
staffman  on  the  job,  Murray  Becker  worked  for  Associated 
Press,  and  four  Philadelphia  newspapers  had  staff  camera- 
men there,  Jack  Snyder  representing  the  Record,  Joseph 
Nelson  the  Inquirer,  Gus  Pasquarella  the  Ledger  and 
Harry  McGonigal  the  Bulletin. 

Despite  the  fact  that  he  was  struck  down  by  one  of 
the  landing  cables  as  he  was  about  to  take  a  shot  of  the 
ship  at  the  first  explosion,  Meyers  regained  his  feet  in  an 
instant,  and  though  shaken  up,  started  shooting  his  pic- 
tures which  were  as  complete  as  any  of  the  others. 

Prior  to  their  landing  at  Lakehurst  in  two  News' 
planes  long  in  advance  of  the  arrival  of  the  Hindenberg, 
Hoff  and  Seelig  had  taken  many  pictures  of  the  ship  from 
the  air.  A  plane  was  still  on  the  field  when  the  explosion 
occurred.  Their  first  plates  were  handed  to  the  pilot  who 
flew  them  back  to  North  Beach,  Long  Island,  and  then 
rushed  by  car  to  the  News'  office.  As  a  result,  the  News 
was  the  first  on  the  streets  in  New  York  with  the  pictures 
of  the  disaster. 

While  the  photographers  continued  shooting  their  pic- 
tures, Miss  Patricia  O'Malley,  press  representative  of  the 
American  Air  Lines,  raced  from  cameraman  to  camera- 
man, collecting  their  holders,  and  then  made  for  a  plane 
which  the  Lines  had  waiting  on  the  field  to  bring  the 
Hindenburg's  passengers  to  Newark.  On  its  arrival  at 
Newark  Airport,  waiting  motorcycle  drivers,  dispatched 
from  the  syndicates'  offices,  grabbed  the  plates  and 
streaked  back  to  New  York. 

While  these  were  being  developed  and  printed,  relief 
photographers  and  portable  equipment  for  the  wire  trans- 
mission of  pictures  direct  from  the  scene  were  already  en- 
route  by  plane  to  Lakehurst,  and  a  short  while  thereafter 
planes  were  shuttling  back  and  forth  to  bring  fresh  mate- 


196  GET  THAT   PICTURE 

rials  and  men,  and  return  new  stacks  of  undeveloped  nega- 
tives. 

In  the  New  York  offices,  editors,  printers  and  boys 
worked  right  through  the  night  and  morning,  without  a 
single  letup,  to  rush  the  remarkable  pictures  by  plane  and 
train  to  newspaper  members.  Editors  everywhere  filled 
page  after  page  with  the  pictures,  replating  in  many  in- 
stances. An  outstanding  example  of  speed  in  picture  repro- 
duction was  the  ability  of  the  New  York  Times  to  place 
pictures  of  the  disaster  in  its  first  edition,  a  little  more 
than  an  hour  and  a  half  after  the  first  flames  were  sighted 
on  the  Hindenburg's  tail. 

Within  ten  minutes  after  the  arrival  of  the  undeveloped 
plates  in  the  offices,  syndicates  were  placing  the  prints  on 
the  telephone  wires  to  be  whirled  to  every  part  of  the 
country,  and  West  Coast  readers  of  the  morning  papers 
were  able  to  see  the  complete  picture  story  in  front  of 
them. 

Motorcycle  messengers  rushed  prints  to  the  Radio 
Corporation  of  America  in  downtown  New  York  to  be 
radioed  to  London  and  Buenos  Aires,  and  the  following 
morning  radioed  pictures  front  paged  the  English  and 
Argentine  editions. 

The  astounding  shots  that  revealed  the  majestic 
queen  of  the  air  crumpling  into  fire  streaked  ruins  were 
within  a  few  hours  hurtling  from  city  to  city,  from  con- 
tinent to  continent,  with  every  device  known  to  the  news 
photographic  world  to  speed  them  on  their  way. 

Two  amateur  photographers  also  broke  into  print 
with  their  miniature  camera  records  of  the  Hindenburg's 
last  landing.  Arthur  Cofod,  Jr.,  armed  with  a  Leica,  had 
a  full-page  layout  in  Life  magazine,  showing  the  disaster 
from  start  to  finish.  His  hands  shook  violently  as  he  took 
his  first  shot,  but  steadied  himself  and  took  the  others 
successfully  as  he  held  his  ground.  Foo  Chu,  a  Chinese 
amateur,  who  had  casually  gone  to  Lakehurst  to  try  for 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  197 

interesting  angles  of  the  Hindenburg  with  his  miniature 
camera,  secured  an  excellent  series  which  were  purchased 
by  the  New  York  Daily  News  and  used  in  continuity  form 
in  double-truck  display. 

From  those  men  who  with  their  trusty  Graphics  had 
gone  down  to  Lakehurst  to  cover  another  routine  assign- 
ment, and  the  amateur  photographers  who  with  their  ever- 
handy  miniatures  had  chanced  upon  the  story,  have  come 
the  "pictures  of  the  century."  To  them  belong  full  and 
everlasting  credit.  It  was  a  story  where  only  cameramen 
with  steel  nerves,  steady  hands  and  eyes,  and  lightning 
action  could  get  the  epic  pictures  they  secured,  the  most 
dramatic  and  remarkable  ever  made  till  that  time  in  the 
history  of  news  photography. 

Then  seven  months  later  came  the  bombing  of  the 
Panay  and  the  news  photographer  added  fresh  laurels  to 
his  crowning  list  of  achievements.  The  Panay  pictures 
were  secured  under  far  more  trying  conditions,  a  greater 
risk  of  death  and  injury,  than  those  which  the  cameramen 
got  at  Lakehurst.  When  we  read  the  story  of  that  hor- 
rible Sunday  adventure  on  the  Yangtze,  it  is  a  miracle  that 
any  pictures  were  secured  at  all. 

It  is  another  bright  tribute  to  the  bravery  of  the  news 
cameraman. 

From  the  moment  the  power-diving  Japanese  planes 
roared  over  the  ship  riding  at  anchor  28  miles  upstream 
from  Nanking,  unleashing  their  first  bomb,  a  direct  hit 
putting  the  fore  gun  of  the  ship  out  of  commission,  Nor- 
man Soong,  New  York  Times  Wide  World  photographer, 
recorded  with  his  Leica  strung  from  his  neck,  a  series  of 
seventy  pictures,  showing  every  phase  of  the  Panay's  proud 
but  helpless  fight  against  overwhelming  odds. 

Soong  was  on  the  top  deck  of  the  ship  that  fatal  after- 
noon of  December  12,  discussing  with  others  the  incident 
of  the  morning,  the  boarding  of  a  Japanese  officer  at 
Nanking,  when  the  first  warning  whistle  was  sounded. 


198  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

Oncoming  Japanese  planes,  a  formation  of  three,  had  been 
sighted.  "Look,  there  they  are!  See  the  red  balls  on 
them!",  someone  had  shouted.  Soong  scented  trouble. 
He  made  a  dash  for  his  room  where  he  had  left  his 
camera.  A  second  later  came  the  deafening  explosion  of 
a  bomb.  It  was  a  direct  hit.  The  ship  shook  from  stem 
to  stern.  Wood  splinters,  glass  and  water  were  thrown 
over  him  as  he  sought  a  vantage  point  from  which  to  shoot 
his  pictures. 

Fragments  of  the  shell  had  left  their  marks.  There 
were  wounded  men  all  over  the  ship.  Lieutenant  Com- 
mander J.  J.  Hughes  was  thrown  against  the  bridge  wheel, 
breaking  his  right  leg  near  the  hip.  J.  Hall  Paxton,  Sec- 
ond Secretary  of  the  U.  S.  Embassy,  was  struck  by  a  shell 
fragment  on  the  shoulder.  The  gunners  ran  for  the  machine 
guns  and  started  firing.  Smoke  and  the  dust  of  flying 
debris  left  the  men  choking  for  breath.  Again  came  the 
pursuit  bombers  with  their  deliberate  dives,  and  more 
deafening  concussions. 

Through  the  thick  of  it  Soong  kept  on  clicking  his 
camera.  Two  newsreel  photographers,  Norman  W.  Alley 
and  Eric  Mayell  were  right  there  with  him  filming  the 
terrible  moments  for  posterity.  Alley  cranked  his  camera 
on  the  machine  gun  deck  close  to  the  machine  gunners 
futilely  training  their  small  weapons  on  the  zooming  ships. 
Alley  was  hit  in  the  leg  by  a  shell  fragment  and  a  finger 
on  his  left  hand  was  scratched  by  a  bullet,  but  he  wasn't 
the  least  bit  fazed  and  continued  to  crank  his  camera. 

On  the  starboard  deck  was  Mayell  who  was  working 
from  an  exposed  spot.  The  planes  kept  returning  in  for- 
mation. Every  time  the  bombs  struck  the  photographers 
would  duck  and  then  return  to  their  cameras  to  snap  the 
effects  of  the  explosions.  No  cameramen,  even  in  the  World 
War,  had  ever  shot  pictures  under  more  harrowing  condi- 
tions. It  is  remarkable  that  their  pictures  came  out  as  well  as 
they  did.  Soong  finished  a  roll  of  film,  then  made  a  dash  for 


GET  THAT   PICTURE  199 

the  engine  room  hatchway.  By  that  time  the  Panay  was 
shipping  water  rapidly. 

At  2:05  p.m.,  exactly  35  minutes  after  the  first  shell 
struck,  Lieutenant  A.  F.  Anders  who  was  unable  to  speak 
because  of  his  throat  gashed  by  a  bomb  fragment,  scribbled 
on  a  bloody  pad  orders  to  abandon  ship.  •  An  outboard 
sampan  was  lowered  over  the  port  side  and  the  wounded 
taken  off.  The  planes  dived  low  to  machine  gun  the  boat. 
A  bullet  pierced  the  side  and  killed  Seaman  Charles  Lee 
Ensminger.  Then  came  their  turns  for  the  uninjured  to 
leave  the  ship.  Soong  was  only  able  to  save  his  Leica 
and  a  few  rolls  of  film.  The  rest  of  his  equipment  went  down 
with  the  boat. 

The  wounded  were  tenderly  placed  among  the  twelve- 
foot  reeds  on  the  bank  of  the  river,  on  the  few  dry  spots 
that  could  be  found  in  the  swamps.  The  uninjured  did 
everything  to  alleviate  the  sufferings  of  the  dying  and  the 
wounded.  While  they  waited  for  help  to  arrive  from  the 
town  of  Hohsien,  where  Mr.  Paxton  and  others  had  gone 
to  break  the  news  and  summon  aid,  Soong  took  some  of 
his  most  outstanding  shots.  Dusk  was  already  approach- 
ing, and  Soong  had  to  work  quickly  before  the  light 
disappeared. 

Three  of  his  most  dramatic  pictures  made  there  were 
the  ones  showing  Sandro  Sandri,  Italian  journalist,  who 
was  struck  by  a  bullet,  being  comforted  in  his  dying 
moments  by  Luigi  Barzini,  a  fellow  Italian  newspaperman, 
who  was  also  aboard  the  Panay;  Chief  Quartermaster 
John  Lang,  whose  jaw  was  split  open  by  a  bomb  fragment, 
sitting  on  an  improvised  couch  and  trying  to  stem  the  flow 
of  blood,  and  the  brave  Lieutenant  Anders  with  bandaged 
throat  and  arm  lying  prone  on  a  makeshift  bed. 

At  nine  o'clock  that  night  a  relief  party  arrived  from 
Hohsien,  and  the  five-mile  trek  began  over  a  dangerous  river 
bank  which  at  times  threatened  to  give  way  under  his  feet 
Alley  had  hidden  his  camera  in  the  swamps  lest  Japanese 


200  GET  THAT  PICTURE 

soldiers  surprise  them  and  destroy  it.  Doors  and  bamboo 
couches  were  used  to  carry  the  thirteen  wounded  men.  Soong, 
an  American-born  Chinese,  and  Paxton  with  their  knowledge 
of  the  language  were  helpful  throughout  the  trip,  and  pre- 
vented the  survivors  from  being  fired  upon  by  Chinese  sen- 
tries. 

The  news  of  the  tragedy  was  already  reverberating 
throughout  the  world.  Day  after  day,  the  story  was  front- 
page news.  But  the  public  was  more  anxious  to  see  the 
pictures  than  they  were  to  read  the  accounts. 

Picture  syndicates  and  newsreel  companies  made  fever- 
ish preparations  for  the  safe  despatch  and  arrival  of  the 
reels  and  films. 

American  and  British  gunboats  brought  the  survivors  to 
Shanghai.  There  Soong  developed  his  films  and  made  prints. 
Three  American  destroyers  carried  the  films,  reels  and 
prints  to  Manila  arriving  there  a  day  before  the  China 
Clipper,  giant  trans-Pacific  plane,  was  scheduled  to  leave 
for  the  United  States.  Alley  accompanied  his  4500  feet  of 
precious  film.  While  in  Manila,  Alley  had  his  leg  wound 
treated  before  continuing  on  his  way. 

The  morning  of  December  28  came.  The  Clipper 
glided  into  the  bay  off  Alameda,  California.  Motorcycles 
rushed  the  packages  into  the  syndicate  offices  in  San  Fran- 
cisco, a  short  distance  away.  The  pictures  were  soon  hum- 
ming over  the  telephone  wires  to  newspapers  all  over  the 
country.  Millions  of  readers  saw  for  the  first  time  the 
horrible  tragedy  of  the  Panay  bombing. 

The  cameramen  who  recorded  the  Panay  bombing 
have  made  news  photography,  a  symbol  of  greatness,  a 
profession  to  be  very  proud  of,  indeed. 

The  Hindenburg  crash,  the  Panay  bombing — no  other 
stories  have  ever  tested  the  cameraman's  courage  more. 
Amid  two  outstanding  trials  of  peace  and  war,  the  news- 
paper photographer  has  proven  that  he  will  never  flinch  in 
the  line  of  duty.  He  does  not  have  to  be  told:  "Get  that 
picture!"  He  gets  it! 


I 


every  large  picture  syndicate  in 
an  editorial  capacity  —  the  for- 
mer Pacific  and  Atlantic  Photos, 
syndicate  of  the  New  York  News 
and  Chicago  Tribune,  Acme 
Newspictures,  Associated  Press 
Photos  and  the  New  York  Times 
Wide  World  Photos  where  he  is 
at  present. 

He  not  only  deals  with  the 
newspaper  photographer  —  that 
daring,  resourceful  fellow  who 
seeks  no  glory  but  only  strives 
to  "get  that  picture"  —  and  re- 
lates thrilling  adventures  that  lie 
behind  so  many  of  the  master- 
pieces of  the  news  camera,  but 
he  also  tells  of  the  history  and 
development  of  news  photogra- 
phy, the  rise  of  picture  papers 
here  and  abroad,  the  transporta- 
tion of  pictures  by  train,  plane, 
dog  sled,  pigeon  and  the 
present-day  marvel  of  scientific 
research  —  wired  transmission. 
He  also  tells  of  the  war  camera- 
man, the  aerial  photographer, 
the  woman  gatherer  of  news 
pictures.  Every  phase  is  com- 
pletely covered. 

The  author  presents  a  word 
picture  of  an  interesting  and 
engrossing  profession  that  is 
sharply  focused  and  well  com- 
posed. 


WORLD 


*t 


PICTURES 


Newspaper  publishers  and  editors  are  realizing  more 
and  more  the  value  of  news  pictures  as  a  circulation 
builder  and  advertisement  attraction.  The  growth  of  pic- 
torial news  in  this  country  in  the  past  decade  has  been 
nothing  less  than  sensational.  There  is  scarcely  a  daily 
or  weekly  anywhere  in  the  country  which  is  not  using 
photographs  in  one  form  or  the  other.  Many  of  the  larger 
newspapers  subscribe  to  syndicates  for  news  pictures  in 
print  form,  still  more  take  the  matrix  service,  while  others 
are  turning  to  the  use  of  inexpensive  one-man  engraving 
plants  for  the  publication  of  pictures  of  local  interest.  THIS 
IS  THE  PHOTOGRAPHIC  AGE  IN  THE  NEWSPAPER 
WORLD. 

Behind  this  remarkable  growth  in  pictorial  news  lies  a 
great  story  —  one  that  is  now  being  told  for  the  first  time 
in  this  book  "Get  That  Picture!  -  -  The  Story  of  the  News 
Cameraman/'  written  by  A.  J.  Ezickson  of  the  New  York 
Times  Wide  World  Photos. 

He  not  only  deals  with  the  newspaper  photographer  - 
how  he  gets  his  daily  picture,  the  routine  shot  or  the 
"scoop"  but  relates  in  thrilling  manner  of  the  adventures 
that  lie  behind  so  many  of  the  masterpieces  of  the  news 
camera,  he  ..also  tells  of  the  history  and  development  of 
news  photography,  the  rise  of  picture  newspapers  here 
and  abroad,  how  pictures  are  transported  from  faraway 
places,  brought  thousands  of  miles  by  plane,  train,  dog 
sled,  pigeon  and  the  present-day  method  of  wired  trans- 
mission -  -  a  marvel  of  scientific  enterprise  and  research. 

The  author  searchingly  goes  into  all  the  bypaths  of 
the  news  picture  field,  presenting  in  vivid  detail  all  the 
experiences  of  his  sixteen-year  connection  with  picture 
syndicates.